Spiritual Science of Miracles

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES
BY
Jason Blanchard
2001 by Jason Blanchard. All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without written permission from the author. ISBN: 0-7596-6194-4 This book is printed on acid free paper.
www.spiritualscience.org Contact author by sending email to: author@spiritualscience.org Cover artDeep Thoughts in Deep Space by Rowdy Charpentier, used with permission Contact cover artist by sending email to: artist@spiritualscience.org
1stBooksrev. 11/15/01
DEDICATIONS, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS, & THANKS
Dedicated to the Dearest One, known only to me, simply as Ma. To my family. I hope that one day, all of you will also begin asking questions about this Awesome and Mysterious Universe in which we live, and begin your own journey to know Godthe same way I did. Also to my many friends, past and present, I have met at the former Church of Thessally over the years. Though we now stand at a Crossroads in our lives, no matter what the future may bringI will remember And lastly, to Rowdy Charpentier, whose artistic creation graces the cover of this book. Thank you so much for suddenly appearing at the eleventh hour and saving the day. A couple of beers, some Mexican food and a flash of Inspiration!! In recognition to my junior year English Literature teacher, R. Galjour. I would like to thank her (again) for her constant and ceaseless efforts to teach a bunch of think-we-know-it-all 16 year old kids something about American authors. Her endless persistence in the face of such certain doom indirectly taught me a most valuable virtuePerseverance. Her embodiment of this inner quality alone made her appear even more beautiful in my eyes than she already was. To you Mrs. Galjour, all my appreciation, gratitude, and my Love. Also, I wish to recognize my senior year Trigonometry teacher, D. Kieff. No other teacher ever inspired within me such fire and enthusiasm for learning. The fact that he was able to effectively teach such a cold, unforgiving, and altogether dull subject as Trigonometry with such genuine warmth and caring for his students is nothing short of amazing. Such an excellent teacher as this is a rarity. Such an excellent teacher as this should be the norm. Thanks, Mr. Kieff. For my vast Cajun Family from down the bayouboth a people and a place unique in all the world.
iii
I wish to thank God for my innate, insatiable, lifelong interest in both Science and Spirit. I wish to thank God for instilling within me an endless, burning desire to learn and understand, and for blessing me with natural abilities to discern Truth from fiction, to investigate mysteries, and to both discover and comprehend hidden things. I wish to thank God for surrounding me with absolutely no one who shared my interests in my early years. I wish to thank God for providing me with friends who abused my trust and lied to me at every opportunity. I wish to thank God for consistently providing me with an endless parade of selfish, arrogant, ignorant idiots disguised as authority figures, every last one of whom, proved to know absolutely nothing of any value. I wish to thank God for ensuring that every last one of those selfish, arrogant, idiotic, ignorant authority figures filled my head with an overwhelming, mountain sized heap of ridiculous and absurd lies. I wish to thank God for providing me with enough sense to doubt the nonsense disguised as education, and for granting me the initiative to teach myself what was lacking and learn something of value. I wish to thank God for continually providing what I have desired in my ongoing Spiritual quest, and for continually withholding what I never needed. I wish to thank God for revealing to me the need for this book, and for providing the inspiration and the necessary energy to write it. And finally, I wish to acknowledge the teachers, the real three wise men. To Franz (Frantisek) Bardon, for revealing the Western way, the methodical, logical, and Scientific path to Enlightenment. To Paramahansa Yogananda, for revealing the Eastern way, the Joyous, effortless path to Enlightenment. To Jon Peniel, for so exhaustively explaining and clarifying the details involved in the process of Enlightenment.
iv
FOREWORD
It is with some hesitation that I have decided to include a detailed autobiography with my first book. This was not at all necessary, given the content of this book. Nevertheless, I have decided to include it for the following reasons. Many people in recent American history, especially my generation, Generation X, and also the younger, so-called Generation Y, share similar experiences in our lives. I know for a fact that I am not the only member of my generation to have ever questioned authority, social norms, and the useless trivia called education. I also know for a fact that I am not the first to ever raise an eyebrow at religious truth and completely disagree with it, if not flatly reject it. In these respects, and more, I absolutely know I am not alone. I included a telling of my life to let the reader know that his/her life experience is not unique, but in fact shared by many in our generation. It is not at all necessary to read the autobiography to learn about the Spiritual Science discussed in this bookit can be skipped altogether. But if you want to understand just what drove me to learn about, and write of, the Truths you will read in this book, then by all means the Autobiography is a must-read. I do not expect to reach the entire population of the planet with the profound and enlightening message in this book. Although the message itself affects absolutely everyone on the globe, regardless of whether or not one believes it does so, it is simply not possible to reach all people. This book was written only for certain people. And who are they? If you have this book in your hands now, I assure you it is by no mistake or coincidenceyou are one of these people. It is evident by a perusal of the population of our own country, that there are some of us who absolutely cannot and will not listen to the Truth, because they are too caught up within their own tiny microcosm of beliefs and judgmental standards to even listen to anything or anyone which differs from their neatly packaged, preconceived idea of truth. This book was not written for these ignorant, arrogant, narrow-minded fools. But, if you have ever marveled at unexplained phenomenon, then this book is for you. If you have a burning desire to know how these phenomenon occur, then this book is for you. If you have ever wondered if there was a way to really know God, then this book is for you. If you have wondered if there was a way to unify Science and God, then this book is for you. And if you have ever wondered if miracles are not only possible, but both Spiritually and Scientifically explainable without resorting to religious rubbish, new age nonsense, or mystical mumbo-jumbo, then this book was absolutely written for you.
v
It is my sincerest hope, that this book, as I have foreseen it, will be a blessing to you, a source of inspiration, a valuable teaching, and as much a Joy for you to read as it was for me to write. Here is the book which God has inspired me to write for my fellow gods of this Earth.
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS AUTOBIOGRAPHY ............................................................................................ ix CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 4 CHAPTER 5 CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 7 CHAPTER 8 CHAPTER 9 CHAPTER 10 CHAPTER 11 CHAPTER 12 CHAPTER 13 CHAPTER 14 CHAPTER 15 CHAPTER 16 CHAPTER 17 CHAPTER 18 CHAPTER 19 CHAPTER 20 THE MIRACLE WORKER & THE SPIRITUAL SCIENTIST .............................................................................. 1 LESSON 101THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF GOD ......... 4 OPPOSITES OF THE ONE THING...................................... 12 PROPERTIES OF THE EXTREMITIES .............................. 19 VIBRATION AND THE HUMAN BEING .......................... 24 ITS ALL IN YOUR MIND................................................... 31 HYPNOSIS ............................................................................ 38 MEDITATION & HYPNOSIS .............................................. 45 EFFECTS OF MEDITATION ............................................... 52 LOVE & EMOTION.............................................................. 61 MASTER OF LOVE .............................................................. 68 THE LONELY PATH OF THE HERMIT............................. 75 THE TWO WAYS ................................................................. 84 A BRUTALLY TRUTHFUL EXAMINATION OF EVIL, AS TOLD BY EVIL ITSELF ................................................ 96 TRANSFORMATION, BEGINNINGS, ENDINGS & THE IMPERMANENCE OF ALL THINGS....................... 104 CYCLES & REINCARNATION......................................... 113 KARMA, PAST LIVES, DESTINY .................................... 120 WHEN THE CIRCUS CAME TO TOWN .......................... 125 ITS JUST THE JOY OF IT ALL........................................ 131 AN ENLIGHTENING EXPERIENCE THE AWAKENING OF THE DEAD .......................................... 139
vii
CHAPTER 21 APPENDIX
WORLD
OF
POSSIBILITIES
THE
FOOLS
JOURNEY ENDS ................................................................ 153 MEDITATION INSTRUCTIONS ....................................... 157
viii
AUTOBIOGRAPHY A FOOLS JOURNEY

things. How wonderful to be wise, to be able to analyze and interpret things. joyous. Understanding is joyous.Carl Sagan I have had a Scientific Mind all of my life. Every kind of science has interested me at one time or another. I have had an inquisitive and scientific mind right from the very beginning, always asking how and why about anything I could see or think of. Doubtless, this drove my parents nuts when I was very young. I was said to be a very talkative child, and always asking those questions. I would even talk to myself when no one wanted to talk to me! I could not help myself. The world around me was new and beautiful and so full of wonder, that kind of wonder that is so natural in young children. Who would not want to explore and understand this beautiful and fascinating world and everything in it!? All too often though, no one I knew could answer my questions, or else, the answers they gave were not fully enlightening. But this was understandable. Due to circumstances early in their lives, both of my parents were forced to leave school far too early. And besides this, no one in my family, or for that matter, anyone around me, seemed to have such an extraordinary interest in understanding the visible world. They did not actively study any of the sciences, so the answers I so desperately wanted were unavailable from anyone in my surroundings. I was basically on my own in this regard. So, I took to satisfying my insatiable curiosity in books. Even before I could read, I practically lived in books. Who wouldnt? After all, they were wonderful creations containing thousands of words and fascinating pictures. And the huge books with the odd name, those encyclopedias, were devoted to preserving and increasing knowledge and understanding! Endless hours of total fascination! By the time I had entered school, I had literally looked at every page of every volume of my familys encyclopedia set. Whenever relatives would visit, my mother would tell them the story of the salesman who came to our house one day and noticed a pair of legs extending beneath a hefty volume from our library. Somewhat bewildered about the sight, he asked my mother for an explanation. He was rather dumbfounded to learn someone so young could take an interest in reference books and encyclopedias. My entire early youth recalls to mind all the hours I spent reading books, observing the natural world, and watching television documentaries with my
ix
8:1 Ecclesiastes 8:1
Jason Blanchard
father, who also enjoyed those programs. In fact, I still relish these activities to this day. I have always had a natural ability to learn, especially in the area of science. I had a rather easy time in school, and science class was, more often than not, my strong point. I was even named science student of the year as a freshman in high school. Subjects like astronomy, physics, chemistry, biology, geology, and others, while the bane of many a student, were totally fascinating to me all throughout my school years. While some of my classmates struggled to grasp science, it was second nature for me. Even subjects like math and English, while not considered scientific in nature, nevertheless, possessed certain laws, which when followed, made the subjects useful and effectivethere was a science of application essential to their harmony. I perceived science lurking everywhere in some form or another. Time and time again, science would answer questions I had about the universe in which I lived. Science explained objective reality objectively. Science was methodical, rigorous, and unbending. It was reliable, trustworthy and dependable. The sciences not only explained our world, but did so in a precise, exact, and accurate way which was wholly indisputable by ones mere beliefs. So what if someone did not believe the sun produced light and heat? Thanks to the scientific laws governing the universe, the sun continued doing so independent of anyones belief system! Science is unconditionally independent of human belief. Reality is that which does not go away when one stops believing in it. And science with all its precise laws and rational explanations do exactly thisthey dont change or go away simply because one foolishly chooses to believe otherwise. Because of its inherent ability to explain the universe and also for its unyielding and enduring qualities, Science has always been my way of perceiving the world, the universe, and objective reality, ever since I can remember, and it has never let me down, not even once. GOD? WHAT THE HELL IS GOD? So, early in my life, when I first began hearing about this phenomenon called god and of the incredible stories surrounding the subject, I, being the natural scientist I was, began asking questions like what exactly is god?, how did god do that? or how is that possible? Every answer I ever received somehow offended my developing scientific mind. No one could provide any rational or logical explanation for the fantastic statements and stories which they believed without any proof. In fact, most of the time, no one could provide any answer at allI dont know was a frequent response to many of my queries for explanations. Not my parents, nor siblings, not even my priests could explain the what or how of god. This total failure on everyones part, especially that of the priests, to supply answers confused me to no end. After all, our priests are supposed to be our representatives to god since the rest of us are presumably
x
ignorant of god and therefore incapable of knowing god. If this is really so, then shouldnt our priests, more than anyone else, know indisputably everything about god, have an answer to every query concerning god, and wouldnt such intimate knowledge of god perhaps even grant the ability to perform miracles? Why was it my priests didnt have any logical or scientific reasoning to support their own proclamations about god? And why couldnt they, or for that matter, the rest of us, perform miracles too? After all, I had been told that somewhere in the Bible, Jesus himself said it was possible for us to do greater things than he ever did. It was absolutely natural for me to ask these questions. I simply wanted proof of all claims made. Yet, everywhere I looked, I encountered no miracle workers, just people who simply believed what they believed and knew nothing more. No one could provide any scientific rationalization for god, nor could anyone perform some demonstration of gods power. This overwhelming lack of knowledge and ability which surrounded me was incredibly frustrating and perplexing. It only made me want to question more. And it was not long before some of my questions were avoided altogether and I was sternly warned not to question god or doubt its existence, or the result would be a frightening place called hellanother matter for which no one had any proof! In fact, the subject of hell was supremely strange and confusing to me. I was told that god loved everyone, and despite this, there was a lifelong possibility that a loving god would heartlessly send your soul to such an awful and altogether loveless place. Deep down, I just could not understand it. I was told to believe like everyone else, and that was that. Apparently, my questions had struck a nerve and made people uncomfortable. I know now that most people dont like to have their faith or beliefs questioned. But back then, being so young and trusting of my elders, whom I erroneously assumed knew better than me, I began accepting their statements, even though they made no logical or scientific sense. What else could I do? I was a mere child! No one would listen to me! Besides, I was being bombarded with the same doctrine and dogma repeatedly, both in church, and in afternoon religious classes. I soon began to stop asking questions aloud, and kept what few I had left to myself. I was forced to all but suspend my logical, scientific mind when it concerned matters of god. A reluctant belief, and not proof, slowly prevailed whenever I thought of god. And fear of punishment for believing or even thinking otherwise settled in. I was methodically programmed just like everyone else till my thoughts of god were not my ownI was indoctrinated. Some people would call it brainwashed. This produced a divisive effect in my mind. I was a natural learner, a young budding scientist possessing logic, reason, and intelligence, who just so happened to throw these natural faculties out the stained glass window whenever god was concerned. In my innocent quest to understand god, I had became as ignorant and unenlightened as everyone around me.
xi
Jason Blanchard
Despite this, somewhere inside of me there still lurked a small intuition, an inner knowing, that there really were answers to my questionsthat not only should answers exist, but they must exist! This feeling would increase as time went on, but I would remain totally silent about this as I grew up. The questions remained, and I would quietly try to find the answers myself. And as the years passed, and my knowledge and intelligence increased, I gradually began to regard it as downright absurd and unacceptable that absolutely no one seemed to know many, if any, limiting facts about this big holy thing they feared and held in such reverence. Neither could they justify why they ever believed stories they could not prove, nor why they accept on faith, instead of fact, fantastic miracles they could not even reproduce. To me, the idea of subjugating oneself to something about which one knew virtually nothing was very constricting and viscerally disturbing. It made me feel insignificant. Nevertheless, I followed suit with everyone else because, I assumed the adults in my world presumably knew better than me. And being the youngest, my family basically forced me to do whatever they thought was best for me. Utterly defenseless against such conditions, I reluctantly acquiesced and quietly began my early association with god. YOU WANT ME TO BE LIKE...THEM? Like many others, my family believed it was absolutely necessary to go to church on the weekend. Of course they always brought me along, despite my occasional protests. I was a kid who tried hard and did well in school all week, and it was the weekend. I just wanted to sleep! Nevertheless, I attended both mass and catechism classes weekly. I did my best to understand the concepts being repeatedly spoken of, but I was to unable to grasp any logic or reasoning behind the obscure doctrines of my religion. It was difficult for me to see my religion as an absolute truth because there was absolutely no proof available and there was no explanation of why it was this way and not another. There were only demands to learn it and accept it without question. Since I trusted those who taught me, I did as I was told, and this did not help my already puzzled scientific mind. As a result, my religion slowly became a lifeless collection of prayers, practices, and stories sprinkled with doctrine and dogma, which became so ingrained within my mind, I could relate all the information from memory, but with little meaning or vitality to support the words I repeated. Seeing that I could not comprehend it all at that time, I assumed that the ideas proposed were for adult minds to understand, even though those ideas were bewildering even to the adult congregationthey just accepted it all and believed it. So, I committed to memory what I was told, expecting that one day, when I was older, it would all make sense to me. Till then, I just tried to make the best of both mass and
xii
catechism classes and waited for the great day of comprehension which never arrived. Still being scientific and observant by nature, I began taking note of the people who attended mass. Coming from a small community, I personally knew many who were there. What I saw confused me. After years of observing people both in church and out, I learned that church attendance comprised the summit of most peoples attempts to know and understand this thing they believed in. Most really believed church attendance was not only necessary, but was all that was necessary to know and understand god. Their very actions proved this. While at church, everyone was very restrained and disciplined, but as soon as they left, they launched right back into their old modes of various negative personal conduct, much of which is preached against by all major religions. I could not help but notice this as I grew up. Why did people put on the appearance of being godly only to drop this temporary mask while driving home afterwards? Was this god in the church and nowhere else? Is this why those attending mass were so well behaved only within the confines of the building? I had been told that god was everywhere and saw all things, not just what went on in the actual church building, so why would anyone in their right mind attempt to be more godly for only one hour inside the walls of the church? What about the rest of the day? Or week for that matter? Wasnt anyone even slightly concerned that god monitored their actions at all times, as they themselves so often said? Contrary to their own statements, their behavior itself suggested they believed god was only in the church. I was stunned and even angered by some peoples behavior. I tried my best to lead my life in a manner which I was told would be pleasing to god. I refrained from engaging in any activities which were frowned upon, and yet, I saw my friends and even their parents (and sometimes my own family) ignoring the same dictates which I faithfully upheld. Only now, with the benefit of personal experience, wisdom and hindsight, do I understand the cause of everyones contradictory conduct. They only felt god within the walls of the church and nowhere elsenot a single one of those attending mass felt that god was inside of them at all times. BUT HOW!?! Of course, back then, I did not know this great secret either. No one knew it, so no one taught it. Not even our priests knew it. I never once heard any priest really explain anything about god. All they ever did was preach about a god they did not personally know, from the use of a book which contained loads of fantastic stories and mystifying statements for which there seemed no logical or scientific basis. How did Jesus walk on water? I would ask. He had faith was the answer. So I attempted it myself. And I had lots of faith when I did soI still got wet. What did I do wrong? Why could I not do this? Jesus said
xiii
Jason Blanchard
we all could do greater things than he did. So why did I fail at a simple duplication of a miracle? Everyone I knew simply had faith in their belief in the story that Jesus had enough faith to walk on water. And yet no one I knew ever tried it, much less questioned it. Well, what kind of attitude is that? How can someone just accept something without some kind of proof or evidence? Despite my religious brainwashing, the scientist in me could not be killed by years of endless preaching. I had learned as my academic education continued over the years, that science dictates that the result of any experiment can always be reproduced. Even things that happen only once can be made to occur again, if the phenomenon itself is sufficiently understood, and if the right conditions exist. This is the fundamental principle on which all experiments restthe fact that any phenomenon can be duplicated. Now, assuming that the Bibles miracles were actual events, and not fabricated, then theoretically, this water-walking phenomenon should be reproducible simply because it happened once. And in fact, the Bible claims it was repeated by one of the disciples only moments after Jesus performed it. In fact, Jesuss own disciples even duplicated the miracle of healing long after his disappearance, once again, assuming the stories were true. And if they were true, then the question of how inevitably reappeared in my mind. But religion made no attempt to explore or explain how. It just claimed it did happen as a matter of belief, and faith in that belief was required, with no science involved. I had heard it repeatedly stated that since science could not explain anything of god, then science obviously had no part in the miracles of god, and yet the very act of replicating these miracles implied that there was an underlying science at work! These miraculous phenomenon of water-walking and healing were duplicated by disciples, mere humans, not sons of godin effect, proving what Jesus had said was possible for all of us, but still not describing exactly how it was done. But I wondered how could any of this be done without science, or even outside the sphere of science, as was claimed by some? Why would god operate outside the very laws god created, laws which operated in every corner of the universe? Who would, or could, possibly explain or argue for this baseless assertion? I simply could not be convinced that the scientific laws of the universe were always miraculously suspended when miracles were involved. That would make the universe far too chaotic and uncertain, and it just did not make any sense to me. I began to entertain the possibility that there was some kind of spiritual science at work here. If these miracles were real and possible, then there had to be some kind of science behind every miracle. I could not help thinking this, because if I had learned anything, it was that all things can be explained by some kind of science, even if we have not yet discovered the actual science needed to explain the mystery in question. The more I thought about it, the more I was convinced that there existed such a science, a spiritual science, which could
xiv
explain all my questions about miracles and god. I had assumed, at that time, that since no scientist ever spoke of a spiritual science, that it had not been discovered yet. That assumption would eventually be proven wrong. Yet my intuition of the existence of a spiritual science persisted over the years. It had to exist. Somehow, I just knew that I simply had to be right. Years later, my intuition proved correct. NOWHERE TO TURN As a result of this science-versus-religion issue, I soon became fascinated by the ongoing rivalry between these opposing camps. Sometimes, I was even amused by it because I had thought that since the time of the great European scientists like Newton and Galileo, someone would have figured out the secrets of god by now. Or at least, someone would have discovered some of it by the time I was born! Since it seemed to me that this had not happened, I kept my eyes and ears open for any scientist who had anything to say in regards to religion. I eagerly read the occasional article in magazines, or read the even rarer books written by scientists, concerning the subject of god. I would also watch, with unbroken attention, any scientist on television who would dare to volunteer a few words on the subject. What I eventually noticed was that scientists never had much to say of god, and in those precious few moments when they did, they always seemed to be dancing around the subject, never declaring anything outright, as if it was illegal to merely open ones mouth about god. The more this lack of information persisted, the more I thought they feared something. Their behavior seemed to indicate this time and time again, whether in their writings or on television. It was apparent they had opinions and possibly had information, but were afraid of saying anything definitive. This fear, of course was for a number of reasons. None wanted to incur the wrath of prominent religious leaders, lose status in the world of science, or worse, be fired by their employers. This lack of any concrete information persisted and frustrated me. I had nowhere to turn for information. In my quest for answers, just like many years before, I was left on my own again. Except this time, there were no magnificent books to help me. I still held on to my intuition of the existence of a spiritual science, constantly keeping a vigil for any evidence to support my idea, but not finding any. The years passed and I finished my religious confirmation ceremony. After this, I was so disinterested in my faith that I rather abruptly stopped attending church. After entering high school, I began taking an interest in world events. I thought it was a sign of intelligence and maturity that a teenager like me wanted to be aware of world news. But awareness of world events had adverse side effects. I steadily grew more sickened with the state of the world. As if the problems in my own little corner of the world were not bad enough, everywhere
xv
Jason Blanchard
else were endless wars, social turmoil, economic hardships, injustice, people dying of hunger, rampant crime, political scandals, etc. This parade of endless sorrow was performed daily on the television and newspapers. I was unable to understand why there was so much evil everywhere and, even worse, I was powerless to stop it all. I was also growing more disillusioned with my religion as time passed. I was no closer to getting any spiritual answers to my same old questions than when I first asked them. I had an intuition of the reality of a spiritual science which could answer my questions, but had no evidence to even prove its existence. My whole outlook was terribly bleak. I did not see any future for myself, much less the world. Becoming more introverted, I rarely did anything of importance except attend high school and earn my usual good grades. I lived a rather meaningless existence. Despite my usual polite manners and soft smile, inside, I was sliding into a downward spiral of despair and hopelessness. As my junior year was approaching mid-year, I hit bottom. Depression set in, and I began thinking of suicide on a daily basis for the next two and a half years. HELL? BEEN THERE, DONE THAT... Trying to remember many details of those endless days of persistent mental and emotional anguish is, thankfully, difficult. I dont recall much of my life because my mind was constantly filled with thoughts of hopelessness and dying, and little else. Few events stand out. But I do remember repeating one ritual every time I felt I just could not bear my lot anymoreI visited the beach. My original reason for going there had absolutely nothing to do with the attractive and relaxing qualities associated with that magical blend of sun and surf. The fact is, when I had enough of life, I would jump into my little car with the full intention of driving to the mental health hospital located in a nearby city. To get there, I simply had to turn north on the main road connected to my street. But, every single time I drove to this junction with this intent in mind, I invariably turned south instead and ended up on the beach. And my reason for this odd directional diversion? Hospital stays cost money, and being so young and still in school, money was something of which I had extremely little. On top of that, the very idea of money depressed me. It seemed money was all everyone cared about. Even my church demanded money. I could not understand the concept of money anyway. I hated it and everything associated with it. And as far as the hospital was concerned, I thought it was downright inhumane and heartless of the medical community to ever demand money for treatment of people like me, who were so close to ending their own lives. And in my case, money was one of the causes of my misery. How could I possibly accept treatment and hopefully be cured only to be issued this huge bill which was payable only by one of the very things which helped cause my depression in the first place? This was the vicious circle from which I could not escape.
xvi
What could I do? My growing introverted behavior over the years had become deeper because of my illness, so I felt that I could not tell my family anything of my condition. And even when I tried, I was not understood. And I certainly did not want the family to pay for any medical treatment, no matter how seriously I needed it. So, invariably, I always turned south and ended up at the beach. While there, I would just listen to the roar of the crashing waves and stare into the horizon, wishing that tomorrow would never come, because if it did, I knew I would have to think of another reason to go on living. Sometimes, in moments of total desperation, I would pray, or more accurately complain, to some distant and impersonal god in which I was rapidly losing all faith, because it never answered my heart wrenching pleas to stop the endless unidentifiable pain. After an hour or more of these countless cathartic ocean visits, I would return home with a silent promise to myself that, next time, I would turn north. But I never did. The last half of my junior year passed without any memorable incident, other than more visits to the beach, and my senior year which followed, was the absolute darkest time of my life. I vividly recall one afternoon at school, only one month before graduation, when I revealed to one of my teachers the depth of my melancholy by telling her that my only goal in life was to live long enough to graduate. She was, of course, shocked by this declaration. Trying to help, she immediately asked me if I believed in god. So much was said that day, and I was so upset that I can only guess at my exact response, but in fact, I think I replied, I guess. For all I knew, the god I had been told to believe in, if it existed, simply did not care about me, and had let me sink into my dismal state of mind. The only real and tangible piece of religion for me was the hell that I was living inperhaps hell existed after all. I managed to survive long enough to graduate high school with honors, but what was there to live for now? As if my depression was not enough, now that school was over, I was no longer going to see all my dear schoolmates on a daily basis anymore, perhaps not even for years. Spending free time with them each week was the only joy I felt in an otherwise joyless existence, and now this had ended. As I woke up the next morning after attending various graduation parties with friends, I was left with an uneasy feeling within. I was accustomed to having school as a part of my life, and now school was over. But this uneasiness would not last long. I entered college during the summer, with renewed hopes of finding whatever it was I needed to make my life meaningful and enlightening. My hopes were quickly dashed. HIGHER LEARNING? College, as I soon learned, was just like high school in many respects. I still had to wake up early, attend class, study, take tests, etc. And thankfully, I had a tiny handful of my high school friends attending the same college with me. But
xvii
Jason Blanchard
there were some differences which horrified and angered me during my college life. Registration for class was always a nightmare. There always lurked the possibility of registering for a class which was presided over by a professor who was inept at teaching, or worse, one who had some sort of prejudice against you. Unfortunately, both of these experiences became a fact in my college life. I am aware that not everyone can necessarily teach what they know. Talent for teaching is just as rare as any other talent. Besides, in my previous twelve years of school, not every single teacher I ever had possessed a real talent for teaching, so I was used to it. But, I could not understand, nor could I forgive, someone who, despite being so educated could still be susceptible to something so detestable as prejudice. It was outrageous! How could a professor possibly behave in such a deplorable manner? I expected and demanded upright and ethical behavior from these people. After all, I was paying them to educate me, not to make my life more miserable than it already was. I expected that since I paid for this education, the university would hire only the best and most principled of people to teach the courses. But this was not so. Getting an education soon became a ridiculous game of dodging certain professors. Another activity which was absolutely inexcusable was the bribing of professors for grades. Of course, this did not happen often, but the fact that it did happen was appalling. Thankfully, the majority of the faculty resisted bribes, but, if my memory still serves, a few professors were caught in these illegal activities. My friends and I knew that bribing for grades did in fact happen, but we never much cared to do anything about it. We were just there to get an education, not start an ethical cleansing campaign. Once, I even witnessed an actual attempt of bribery as I was walking through one campus building. But this particular event was rather humorous. A very attractive female student was trying her best to persuade her male instructor to change a disappointing grade by using her obvious assets. After I walked past them and entered the stairway, I could not help but laugh aloud at this pathetic attempt of bribery because she was obviously unaware of one important facther instructor was gay. Though my friends and I laughed hysterically at this event when I told them about it later that day, it proved to me personally that this unsavory activity was indeed taking place. Before entering college, I looked up to university professors as models of society. I thought that since they were educated, they were beyond all immoral and unethical behavior. But that ideal image soon dispersed into nothingness. Even some professors, it seemed, were capable of the same kinds of behavior as those church attendees whose personal conduct had offended me years earlier. I had erroneously thought that a university education, something which most of those church attendees lacked, would somehow illuminate the human being and give him some brilliant insight into human existence or at the very least, provide some moral backbone to resist engaging in illegitimate actions.
xviii
In college, I was exposed to all kinds of people of whom I had previously only heard about. People of different races, religions, and even sexual orientations were all around me. This was quite shocking to me because I had lived my whole life in a rural community where I was not exposed to people who were very different from me. For years, I had heard all kinds of tasteless and derogatory remarks from various adults and their children directed towards anyone who was different from us, including people of a different race. And yet, at college, some of the friends I made the very first semester were of another race. I found them to be essentially no different than me. Also, for most of my young life, I was so shielded by my faith, that when I finally learned of the existence of different religions, it genuinely confused me. I literally could not comprehend the fact that other people claimed different religions from mine. No one in my church ever bothered to tell me that the five billion inhabitants of our planet were not Catholic. And yet, at college, I personally came to know people of different faiths. I had also been told that certain types of sexual activity, especially homosexuality, was wrong, and should be avoided. Yet, in college, some of the female student body were really getting to know other female student bodies, and young men were making dates with each other by using the bathroom wall as a free dating service. Previous to this, I had only seen derogatory remarks about women in restrooms. Also on the bathroom walls was written evidence of the existence of other groups of people, mostly campus fraternities and some infamous hate groups, who either did not like anyone different from them, or were at war with just one group who were labeled as being opposite. Most of the time, the groups singled out for discrimination were various races, homosexuals, and even other fraternities. Sometimes there were campus rallies held by one group or another. Sometimes there were protests. Because of some inept and unethical professors and a very factioned student body, college seemed to me to be a hotbed of separation, dissension and misunderstanding, wholly incapable of providing a higher education. The effect of all this was shocking and transformative. My preconceived image of the world had been shattered. Many false notions were replaced with the truth. And not all of that truth was encouraging. I witnessed some of humanitys evil firsthand. Much of the worlds turmoil which I had previously only seen reported on the television and the newspapers was now a concrete reality for me, reflected in the microcosm of college. Why were people behaving like this? What drove some people to be unkind and intolerant? Didnt anyone have real answers which could help the world? Was there a way to genuine goodness and real spirituality? Neither religion nor classical education seemed to provide the world with an end to all its suffering. And neither provided the supreme answers to my questions about life and the meaning of existence. It was
xix
Jason Blanchard
about this time, while still very depressed and without the enlightenment I sought after, that something unexpected and supremely profound happened to me. FAR OUT, MAN Several months after I first entered college, I began having absolutely bizarre and beautiful experiences which increased in frequency until it was a daily occurrence. I called these Zen-10 experiences. I had seen the word Zen in the new age and religious section at a bookstore in the mall. I did not know exactly what Zen was except to say that it was some kind of religion or philosophy which I had never studied. Since I did not know about Zen, it was a mystery to me. And since these strange experiences were also a mystery to me, I decided to name them Zen-10. The number ten referred to the intensity of the experience itself, which very often was so unbelievable that I rated each a 10. To this day, I am not entirely sure why they ever occurred in the first place. Using hindsight, the only explanation I can possibly give is that it was time for a change in my life, and the change would begin with an experience which was Truly Spiritual in nature. Let me explain a typical Zen-10. Usually, but not always, while I was driving to or from college, I would simply happen to look at something in nature, a tree, cloud, group of flowers, animals in fields, and quite literally stare at it with slack-jawed wonder as if I had never laid eyes on it before, accompanied by an indescribably intense feeling of wonder and amazement. For comparison, imagine the reaction of a blind person, who now healed of his blindness, can see the beauty of our natural world for the very first time. Imagine the look on his face at seeing the grandeur and beauty of our planet. Imagine the wonder, like that of a young child, the same wonder I once had so many years earlier. Take that image and accompanying feeling and amplify it dozens of times over and then one can understand the nature and intensity of my Zen-10 experiences. They were, without exaggeration, the most awe-inspiringly beautiful and Truly Spiritual experiences I had ever had in my life at that time. And they were supremely baffling too. Why was it, I wondered, that I should stare at something with such a stupefied look on my face, feeling this intense awareness and wonder at some object in nature which I had seen literally thousands of times before? It felt like nature had slapped me in the face and screamed, Look at me, dammit! Open your eyes and see how beautiful I am! I can only describe the feelings I experienced as a supremely ecstatic intoxication brought on by the wonder of the experience itself. The feelings of wonder and amazement were so extremely profound that I literally could not do anything else while under the temporary spell of a Zen-10. This became rather dangerous if the Zen-10 popped up while driving, which it usually did, but, thankfully, I never crashed. The Zen-10s persisted for about the next two years, both combating
xx
and outlasting my depression. Not long after they began occurring, I came to expect their arrival because they were so frequent. During one rare period, I had up to three each day. Soon, these wonderful Zen-10 experiences were initiated by another unexpected sourcemusic. At the time, I was discovering both classical music and the progressive, artistic music of bands such as the English groups Yes and Pink Floyd. Sometimes, when I would hear a gorgeous composition by Rachmaninoff, Bach, Beethoven, or Mozart, I would immediately launch into a much longer lasting version of a Zen-10. The experience would also occur when I listened to certain songs by the bands just mentioned. The fact that music could also produce a Zen-10 was a priceless gift. By purchasing a recording of the relevant music, I could reproduce Zen-10s almost anytime I wanted. I no longer had to wait for nature to slap me with its splendor. The musical Zen-10s experiences outlasted those which were nature-induced. In fact, music still affects me this way. The effect of these astonishing experiences was enormously uplifting and inspirational, and, if for some unknown reason, I did not have a single Zen-10 during the span of one day, I was incredibly upset. I looked forward to them each day. They were, sometimes literally, a ray of sunshine, which inspired in me, hope. During the experiences, I would behave as if I were encountering something which was not only brand new, but was the most wondrous and inspiring thing in existence. The Zen-10s were, without exaggeration, the only truly Spiritual experience I ever had at the time. They spoke of a beautiful and enchanting universe which I had apparently never perceived. Or perhaps I had known it before, when I was very young, when the world was new. Perhaps, as a child, I was in a constant state of Zen-10 before the reality according to adults was heaped on me. Possibly, I had merely forgotten that sense of curiosity and wonder I had so loved as a young boy. Maybe I was just reclaiming that sense of natural wonder and awe which had been always mine from the very beginning, but had became suppressed by both the dictates of society and the doctrines and dogmas of religion. Perhaps because of this reclaimed sense of wonder and natural curiosity, I began an earnest and determined search for the Truth of the Universe. I always had a scientific mind and a natural capacity for learning. I also had superb sleuthing skills. I just loved looking for the secret inherent in all mysteries. And there was a grand mystery calling out to me through the Zen-10 experiences. I wanted answers to all my questions, both old and new, and I would not accept any compromise. Was there a god? If so, did science fit into gods scheme of things? Or was science the end of all there was? Or was the grand total of all the scientific laws the reality of what god is, as Einstein suggested? I wanted answers about this gigantic universe I lived in and so I cast my gaze out to the
xxi
Jason Blanchard
stars (and across the bookshelf in the bookstore) and found something totally out of this worldthe subjects of aliens and UFOs. IS THERE ANYBODY OUT THERE? I was always fascinated by astrophysics and had been an amateur astronomer since I first learned about space as a child, so it was inevitable for me to eventually ask the scientifically valid question, Are we alone? Just the sheer size of the Universe itself did much more than simply respond no in answer to the questionit literally screamed, No!!. The odds that we humans on this Earth are totally alone in this Universe are so astronomically (pun intended) huge, it was ridiculous for me to think that we were the only genetic accident in the Universe. It insulted my intelligence, and I did not consider this possibility for long. I was convinced by logical thought that we had to have neighbors out there. I had seen our own planets with my telescope, and these planets orbit just one star. I had also seen huge star clusters in our own galaxy and also entire galaxies too. Our galaxy alone contains billions of stars, and there are billions of galaxies like our own in our known Universe. One giant number multiplied by an equally giant number results in one gigantic headache. How could planet Earth possibly be the only cradle of life in such an enormously huge place with so much potential for life? Religion failed to convince me that we were the only garden of intelligent life in such a tremendous Universe. But the scientific community did not help the matter much either because they could not produce any concrete evidence to even support the possibility of life elsewhere. And as for the possibility of intelligent extraterrestrial life, scientists were often heard to use the words possible and probable, never putting much faith behind what they said because they saw no evidence. I remember hearing more than once, the prominent scientist Carl Sagan, whom I admired and respected as much as all the other scientific giants of history, ask in regards to the possibility of extraterrestrial life, Where is the evidence? The lack of anything concrete forced most scientists to be very reserved in their statements about life in the universe, always unwilling to speculate openly. By their very words, they implied their secret hope of extraterrestrial life, yet they were also the first to condemn and criticize anyone, especially any fellow scientist who dared to publicly proclaim a mere belief in the possibility of life elsewhere. The SETI (Search for Extraterrestrial Life) program was always snickered at by mainstream science as though the dedicated scientists listening to radio waves from the heavens for a chance phone call from ET were engaging in activity worthy of mention in a disreputable tabloid newspaper. This narrowminded attitude of mainstream science resulted in a meager amount of official information on the subject of extraterrestrial life. I was left with no alternative but to look elsewhere for information. So, I, being attracted to anyone who had
xxii
anything to say about extraterrestrial life, frequently journeyed to the bookstore in search for the answer to the nagging question Are we alone? I purchased one book after another on the subject of extraterrestrials and anything related to it. The field of ufology is certainly a fascinating one to study. It can teach one many things. Examining alleged photographs of UFOs and flying discs teaches one the sciences of physics, photo analysis, meteorology, and forces the student to be competent in identifying every kind of known flying machine in existence. Reading the claims made by witnesses to sightings teaches one to be a psychologist and human lie detector. Researching claims of conspiracies and cover-ups force one to learn methods of investigation and how to identify misinformation. By studying the alien abduction phenomenon, one learns about the technique of hypnosis, and some aspects of the medical field, including the ever-fascinating inner workings of the brain. That adds up to quite a list of disciplines needed to study a subject which many people have regarded as ridiculous and absurd. All in all, I came to two conclusions regarding the whole issue of ETs, flying saucers and UFOs. First, I concluded that Extraterrestrials are real and have visited Earth before and still do so today. Second, since I was unable to do anything about these visitations, I simply decided not worry about it anymore. All of my research eventually led me to confirm my original scientifically based suspicion that we were not alone. During that time when I was studying these far out subjects, I ran across something in one book which totally captured my attentionactual quotes from the abducting alien. This being spoke to the abductee of things which can only be described as Spiritual in nature. It was only a couple of sentences in length and I dont remember the exact content anymore. But the effect was rather shocking to me. Aliens have a religion?! Or at the very least, some Spiritual view of the Universe? This, of course, resonated with my long interest in finding answers to my old questions. But a couple of sentences were not enough to provide answers to any question I had. Nevertheless, I was introduced to the mere idea that other civilizations might have some ideas of Spirituality which might answer my questions. It was not long before I found some information on possible alien spirituality. At the beginning of 1991, I discovered a book which told the story of an investigation of just one UFO case. Besides the various details of the investigation, the book contained within its pages a small amount of information, mostly quotes, which came directly from the alien involved in the case. Of course, there was no way in the world I could personally prove that this alien ever existed, much less know exactly where this information was coming from. Despite this, I decided to adopt an experimental and theoretical attitude as I read the book. I would simply let the book speak for itself, especially in regards to the aliens material, and then judge it later. I highlighted the aliens information
xxiii
Jason Blanchard
throughout the entire book and ended up reading the entire book five times in that same year. The highlighted materials effect on me was amazing. Not all of the highlighted data was of a spiritual nature, but there was just enough to set my mind ablaze with thought. Something inside me clicked when I read those few quotes in the book. There was some Truth inherent in the very words themselves which could not be denied at all. I still did not have all the answers to my questions, but I did have new fuel for the fire, so to speak. At long last, I at least had something to work with, something to go on. The books precious few quotes on spirituality set my mind thinking about why, after all these years, I still did not have any Spiritual answers to my old questions. By the end of the year, I figured it out. I had finally realized that my single biggest hindrance to finding the answers I yearned for was the very thing which had always falsely claimed to have the answersreligion. For years, religion had not provided the answers I so desperately wanted. It had not explained the deepest mysteries of god and miracles for thousands of years, and it showed no signs of doing so anytime soon. So what was I waiting for? My religion had been incomprehensible to me all my life. The great day of comprehension I had hoped for never came. My religion never comforted me during my depression. And the fear of hell and my general ignorance of the afterlife were the only reasons I never killed myself. My religion provided no answers and no comfort in a mad world. By this time in my life, my faith had deteriorated and the whole religious thing just seemed like a gigantic lie. In December 1991, I secretly wrote a short letter, for my eyes only, declaring my atheism. Early into the next year, I learned that I could purchase a couple of books which apparently had a great deal more quotes from the same alien of that same UFO case. Without thinking, I bought both books and read them very quickly. At this point in my life, I could have cared less if all the information contained within these books were lies. This was irrelevant to me. There was a possibility of finding a few answers to my old questions and I was not going to pass up this opportunity. I would not be disappointed, because as I read the books, something inside me was screaming, This is it!! The information was, as expected, far out (pun intended), but it touched a nerve deep inside me. It introduced me to a new way of looking at the Universea new Spirituality to replace the now dead faith of my old religion. My atheism, declared in writing only weeks earlier, soon gave way. From the books, I learned that there was a Spiritual Presence which not only permeated the whole Universe, but also inside each living thing, including the human being. This was, in the truest sense of the word, a Revelation. Never in my religious life had anyone told me that I possessed a powerful Spirit which was equal, in essence, to a Supreme Spirit permeating the Whole Universe. The books spoke of the limitless possibilities and potential of the human being and the radiant grandeur of the Universe. My mind was opened
xxiv
to this new Universe and I was not the same anymore. This new information, although coming from a very unusual source, to say the least, was an important primer for what was to soon come. The basic concepts I was introduced to by an otherworldly source were again echoed when I began studying eastern religions some months later. ALWAYS WITH THE BOOKS... And so, after having some time to digest this new space spirituality, I began building a collection of ancient scriptures which were not included in the Bible. I did not immediately understand this sudden and inexplicable fascination I had with the acquisition of ancient textsI simply had to own them! Soon, copies of the Dead Sea Scrolls, various Gnostic texts, obscure Jewish books, and a host of other scriptures from Hermetic and early Christian sources filled my shelves. My basic rule for collecting these scriptures was simpleif its not in the Bible, get it! And so, my collection of ancient scriptures was born and continues even now. (Among the most unusual finds in my collection is a translation of a recently discovered ancient gospel titled The Gospel of Judas Iscariot. This short, obscure gospel was only one book among many, mentioned in a huge list of existing early scriptures made by an early Church father.) This collection did not include any standard or orthodox text of any major religion like Christianity, Judaism, Islam, Hinduism, Buddhism, etc. Every single scripture I collected is ancient, written in the centuries just before and after the appearance of Christ. Currently, I estimate that my collection contains between 340 and 370 individual Holy Scriptures, absolutely none of which appear in the Bible. A substantial number of these books speak directly of the individual named Jesus Christ. By contrast, the Bible contains 66 books total, only 4 of which actually speak of Jesus Christ directly. Of course, I managed to read some of my collection. There were a couple of particular ancient gospels which intrigued me. The first was the Gospel of Thomas. This scripture is nothing more than a collection of the sayings of Jesus. These sayings are full of that sort of dualistic, subtle, double meaning which is so prevalent in Gnostic writing. The verses were short and simple enough, but when I first read them, they made absolutely no sense to me. So, I simply put it aside. The very next time I read it, exactly one year later, I understood literally every single verse in this ancient Gospel. I can only say that during those twelve months, my mind evolved to such an extent that I was finally able to comprehend the deeper esoteric meanings of the many verses in the Gospel. I vividly recall feeling that this sudden comprehension was a sort of graduation that marked the beginning of a path which would lead to some answers to the questions I had harbored so long within me. I also remember reading a startling verse in the Gospel of Philip which stated, in no uncertain terms, that those who believed that
xxv
Jason Blanchard
Jesus died and was resurrected are wrongthe Gospel of Philip claims that he was resurrected first and then died. This declaration, of course, shocked the hell out of me (pun intended). This was flying in the face of common religious doctrine and dogma, but then again, at this point, I did not care about religion or its teachings anymore. I would, later on, finally understand that this fascination and preoccupation with scripture collecting and reading was necessary, if for no other reason, to justify to myself (and, if needed, to others) why I had dropped my old religious beliefs. What I eventually learned when I read these ancient scriptures was an underlying thread of Truth which repeated precisely what I had read in those two books containing quotes from an alien regarding its concepts of Spirituality. Truthfully, all of the ancient scriptures I read contained some deep meanings behind some of its verses, as though there were two meanings to these strange sayingsa surface meaning which anyone could understand and a subtler, occulted (hidden) meaning which could only be grasped by someone with the appropriate mindset. Apparently, during those twelve months which separated my two readings of the Gospel of Thomas, something had clicked within meit seemed that the Great Day of Comprehension had at long last arrived. Over the next year or so, I began collecting book after book on spiritual topics, and of course, I continued to expand my precious ancient scripture collection. This was a time of spiritual education for me. I studied almost anything I could get my hands on. Anything which caught my eye in the new age/spiritual section at the bookstore was soon purchased and read quickly. This spiritual self-education has proven invaluable to me ever since. And learning it all was so easy for meit was just like reading those big encyclopedias when I was a young boy. Here was a whole other world which my old religion never even spoke of. At last!! Some answers to those old questions!! My mind, so repressed by religious doctrine and dogma for so long, now would soar to intellectual heights undreamed of as I comprehended the ever-growing amount of information which was at my fingertips. Those flights of fancy were absolutely phenomenal and nearly impossible to describe well with words. I would find myself daydreaming, lost in the deepest abyssal thoughts contemplating the mysteries of the Universe and God for literally hours on end. The time I spent so pleasantly lost in such deep pondering was immensely enjoyable. New vistas of limitless possibilities opened up to my expanding awareness. The wondrous awe!! The joy!! I felt like a little boy again, gazing wide-eyed into the distance in utter amazement as I wondered about the new things I was learning and processing each day. And then one night, I did something which had very unexpected and transformative effects.
xxvi
MY GOD, WHAT THE HELL IS THIS? In the spring of 1995, I had purchased a compact disc which contained not music, but rather an hour-long continuous synthesized drone of people chanting the sound Om, which is so often heard by those who practice meditation. In fact the CD was specifically recorded to assist meditation. One night, I decided to listen to this Om CD with headphones and meditate for the first time just to see what, if anything would happen. In short, it was a life changing experience. I only meditated for about 15 minutes that night, but the after-effects were amazing. For the next three days, I was wearing a perpetual smile on my face. I was absolutely happy for absolutely no apparent reason, as far as I knew. This happiness ran very deep and was overwhelming. During those three days, I was working outside in the backyard piecing together chunks of earth with a pitchfork and a rake. I was arranging the pieces, like a jigsaw puzzle, inside some depressions in the backyard, trying to level out our familys property. Not very exciting work, nor much fun, to be sure, especially with the hot tropical sun blazing away in the sky. And yet, despite this work and the conditions under which I did it, I was happy!! Profoundly happy!! Absolutely nothing could disturb this inner delight I was experiencing. I thrilled to feel the wind whipping around me. I cherished the brightness of the noonday sun. The singing of the neighborhood birds was like a symphony to my ears. I was quite simply, overjoyed to be alive!! I soon realized that this bliss I was feeling for three days was the result of just a few minutes of meditation, just a few nights before. I could not help but wonder how in the world meditation, this act of quieting the mind and body, could possibly affect anyone, much less me, in such an extreme way. This whole episode was an experience which I simply could not ignore. I could not have imagined that such little effort on my part could ever produce such long-range positive effects. Meditation had produced, quite naturally, a fantastic high. Why didnt anyone tell me about meditation before? Didnt anyone know about this? I immediately wondered if it were possible to continue to produce the same joyous feelings if I meditated again. And so, I soon experimented with the same results as beforehappiness for no apparent reason!! I had obviously stumbled onto something. I began meditating sporadically from that point on. Meditation definitely helped me to deal with the overwhelming stupidity of the world. In meditation, I could enter a space, which was a sort of inner sanctuary away from the rest of the world. I could temporarily escape the pressures of the outside world and just quietly exist in a self-created, inner temple of silence. It was relaxing, refreshing, and revitalizing. Meditation soothed frazzled nerves, allowed me to forget my troubles, and restored my inner well-being. When life was too much to bear, when various troubles would plague my mind and upset
xxvii
Jason Blanchard
my inner balance, I would simply meditate and I would feel centered again, ready to deal with the foolish world and all its nonsense. But meditation did more than that. While in the meditative state, I began to experience feelings which were absolutely impossible to describe with any accuracy in waking consciousness. With my eyes closed and pleasantly lost inside my meditative state, I would have experiences in which I felt my body to be 15 feet wide, or spinning round and round on an invisible axis, sometimes in two directions at once (as impossible as that sounds), while my physical body was still stationary. Feelings of rising or falling, lightness and heaviness were also not uncommon. It seemed that in meditation, normal reality gave way to something else, something vastly different. I had discovered a whole new inner reality, a very subjective existence which was vastly different from the rigid, objective scientific existence I had known so long. Here was an inner reality which flatly defied any accurate descriptions with words, and laughed at my efforts to understand it from an analytical and logical viewpoint which I had been so accustomed to all my life. What was this inner reality? It was not physical at all. I could not touch it, or measure it, or work with it on a calculator. It did not seem connected to anything in the physical world. Had I finally stumbled onto the real Spiritual World at last? Was meditation the key to the doorway which leads to the Spiritual World? Was the Spiritual World what I had experienced in meditation? Is this what the ancient scriptural authors were always referring to in their writing? Is this inner spiritual reality necessary to understand things religious or miraculous? No one in my life ever mentioned, much less practiced, meditation. Is this why absolutely no one could ever explain anything of a spiritual or godly nature? Were my meditational experiences each really a direct experience of God itself? It most certainly was, in the truest sense of the word, spiritual. Of that much, I was certain. I knew I had found something new to explore. And yet I could not help but think that since this reality existed, then it must follow some set of scientific laws which make it work the way it does. I had learned long before that anything which existed followed some set of scientific laws. Science was always behind everything. I simply could not help thinking this wayI had a scientific mind after all. Maybe if I could find a link between this inner, Spiritual reality, and the field of Science itself, then I could prove that Science, Spirit and God were really all one and the same!! This discovery would then go a long way in describing how that which we call miracles is possible. It would also provide what was needed for scientists to accept spiritual reality, and conversely, for the religious minded to accept scientific reality. A linking of Science, Spirit, and God could also provide proof that we humans, possessing a Spirit, are much more glorious and amazing than we could ever imagine. Now, it seemed, I had a whole bunch
xxviii
of new questions to ask, and more answers to look for. But I would not have to wait long to find them. EUREKA!! IT FOUND ME!! One day, a magazine which I had never ordered (much less even heard of) arrived in the mail. It was a magazine devoted to the Science of Yoga. It looked interesting enough, so I read a little of it, and then a little more, until I had read it cover to cover. (I suppose I found it interesting?) I had heard of Yoga before, but I was no expert on the subject. I knew that Yoga was obviously more than just attempting to tie oneself into a knot. After reading the magazine and learning a little more of the various disciplines of Yoga, one day, I journeyed with a friend to a local shop owned by a hypnotist, who was a friend of ours. While we were waiting for the hypnotist to finish with a client, we browsed the shelves of the shop for anything interesting. While looking in the book section, I noticed a small orange colored paperback with a cover picture of what I guessed was a holy man of some sort. The book was titled, Autobiography of a Yogi written by Paramahansa Yoganandathe holy man in question. Something about this face immediately caught my attention. Although I had never remembered seeing this face before, it seemed familiar somehow. I have always had a sharp memory, and I tried my best to remember just where I saw this face before, but I kept drawing a blank. This annoyed me a little. Being so inexplicably drawn to the book, I grabbed it and thumbed through the pages scanning for anything which might jar my memory or catch my attention. The book was small and incredibly cheap, but it was absolutely packed with information on various subjects, including Yoga, of course. I could not explain it at the time, but I was overwhelmingly compelled to buy the book. I simply could not understand this sudden preoccupation I had with itI just had to own it. And besides, it contained valuable information on Yoga, which I was now interested in. But that faceI had to know just who was that face. I still could not remember where I saw it before, or why it looked so familiar to me when it seemed obvious that I had never seen it before in this life. Living in a fairly closed community all my life, I certainly would have remembered seeing someone of Indian nationality. I bought the book for just four dollars. To this day, that oddly colored little book is still the most valuable and wisest purchase I ever made for such a trifling sum. Reading that book took a long timeit was more packed with information than I thought. But it was worth it. The self-told story of one monks life, all the people he met around the world, all the things he learned from teachers and his personal guru, and of his personal relationship with Spirit was endlessly fascinating to me. Few books had ever captured my attention like this one. Throughout the book were explanations of the Science of Yoga and expositions of the nature of God, meditational practices, even the inner workings of some
xxix
Jason Blanchard
miracles (wow!!). But the whole thrust of the book lead to the fact that Yogananda was living a life of destiny, which would eventually lead to the establishment of spiritual centers around the world devoted to dispensing information on the Science of Yoga Meditation which he himself had used to achieve Enlightenment. The name of the organization which he helped to create was Self Realization Fellowship. There was a small mailing card in the book which could be used to get information from the organization. I was so impressed with the book, that it was not long before I sent the card in the mail, joined the organization, and began learning and practicing the Science of Yoga Meditation. Learning to meditate in the Yogic way, in addition to the other ways of meditation I also learned, has had the most positive effects on my life. The experiences have been many and each wonderful in its own way. Meditation has become a habit for me. Through meditation, I have stabilized a previously wildly fluctuating personality, learned to control wasteful outbursts of emotions, and both ended and prevented occasional bouts of depression. I have also improved my physical health without directly attempting to do so. I rarely become ill anymore. Nagging sinus problems which run (no pun intended) in my family, no longer afflict me. I even lost a little weight without trying to do so directly. But, to me, the most amazing changes are the mental or spiritual intuitions which I have had. Through meditation, I have learned things previously unknown to mefantastic ideas or intuitions pop into my head from nowhere on occasion. I sometimes have visions of my future and my familys future. I can talk to my spirit guide, or God directly, and get Truthful and useful answers to any questions I may have. The list of benefits goes on and on, but one of the most important benefits which most people can relate to is thisI have gained some sense of my Self, just who I am, and what my purpose is in this crazy world. READING BOOKS WAS FUN, BUT WRITING THEM? Which brings me to the authorship of this book itself. I suppose it is natural for one to want to teach others of great things learned from great experiences, and I was no different. After nearly a lifetime of searching, I had found great treasures which were responsible for phenomenal changes in my life. All the knowledge and experience I possessed was useful to me, but what about others? Certainly there were others out there in the world with similar questions about the nature of God, Spirit, miracles, etc., questions which they may also have been asking nearly all their lives. I wanted to help these people. If you are reading this book, then rest assured are you are one of these people I wished to reach. This book you are now reading was nothing but an idea I was entertaining in the fall of 1997. It seemed like a great idea tooa book which would finally prove
xxx
the Union between Science and Spirit by explaining the exact scientific process of miracles. I would reveal the union between both the obvious, outer, logical, analytical, left brain Knowledge of Science and the subtle, inner, intuitive, abstract, right brain Wisdom of Spirit by imparting the Truth of both as learned by me through years of the Study of Science and years of the Direct Experience of the Wisdom of Spirit. All of this, however, was just an idea until a fantastic dream one morning made me realize the explosive impact of such a publication. Upon using Spirit to immediately interpret the dream and its meaning, I was inspired to immediately begin writing this book. But the primary reason for even wanting to write this book can be summed up in a few wordsit is greatly needed. There is no further need to explain in detail that the present sad state of our world and its effects on my life were the impetus for my writing this bookI think this introductory biographical section has made this fact abundantly clear already. All I can add here is this. The seemingly endless pain and frustration in my life caused by a desire to know the True Secrets of God is the primary reason why I ever turned into what I am today. This pain made me look for an end to the pain itself. And I found a way to end it. I found a way to know God, to know the Universe, to know My Self. This knowledge gave me great peace, but ended up causing more pain to well up in me for a single reasonit seemed I was the only one who knew!! All around me were family, friends, neighbors (and the rest of the world) who did not know God personally, did not know peace, joy, wisdom, etc. They simply did not know what I myself had learned. What to do? Then the idea came to me one day to write what I know for the benefit of all who also wish to know. As I said, I fancied the idea for a while until a dream and its subsequent interpretation provided the needed catalyst to begin this book. As stated, it is the purpose of this book to reveal the hidden Union of Science and Spirit by explaining the scientific process of miracles. Along with the Spirit/Science connection I will reveal, I will also illuminate the reader on various Spiritual teachings and Truths. Everything I introduce to the reader is Fact and Truth. Many things in this Universe are easily and readily provable to anyone, but some are not. Some things are provable only by experience itself. Some are knowable only by a deep connection to God. God is the Revealer of All Things. God has taught me and revealed many things to me, some of which seem unbelievable, impossible, or just plain ridiculous to the inexperienced, ignorant or uninitiated, but such attitudes do not deter me. There is only One Way to know Godly thingsyou must know God personally. It is absolutely imperative to become One with God in order to even begin to understand some things in the Universe. I do not make apologies for this. It is the way of the world, as we sometimes say. The reader must learn and realize right here and now, that if
xxxi
Jason Blanchard
he/she disagrees with something I state, then this conflict is attributable to an ignorance of God, Spirit, and Truth. I do not claim to know Everything, nor do I even care to know Everything, but I assure the reader that no matter what you may read here, I am speaking the Truth, and I do know of what I speak. If the reader wants proof of anything stated in this book, then it is up to him/her to stop demanding proof of someone else, and personally prove it to themselves. Get off your dead ass and on your dying feet! I cannot prove Everything. And I will not. I am not even compelled to prove anything. Proof is simply not required of me. I have proven to myself all I needed to prove. As with any teacher, I can only go so far, and help you so much, but the rest is up to you. If all of this sounds cryptic or incomprehensible, all I can say is just read the whole book with an open mind. Even before reaching the end of this book, the attentive reader will have enough information to prove to him/herself that Spiritual Law and Scientific Law are indeed, One and the same, that Spirit and Science are One, and that there Truly does exist a Spiritual Science of Miracles.
xxxii
CHAPTER 1 THE MIRACLE WORKER & THE SPIRITUAL SCIENTIST

I wish to tell you about a very special Human being. This particular Human being was a man who lived and walked on our planet roughly 2000 years ago. He was a man like no one had ever seen before. He was a caring man. He treated all people with love. He urged people to share with the poor and needy. He had compassion for the sick and suffering. He healed many people. He performed miracles time and time again. He cast out demons and raised the dead. He could see the future, and had the gift of prophecy. He traveled the ancient world, urging all to turn towards God. No matter where he went, great crowds followed him. He owned nothing. He held no title. He held no office. He was only recognized as a Spiritual authority, and then again, not by everyone. He loved all people. He loved God with all his heart. He served God. Of course, if you have not figured it out yet, I am speaking of the one and only, Apollonius of Tyana. Surprise!! Did you actually think I was talking about Jesus Christ? Think again!! Precious few people even know the name, Apollonius of Tyana, and yet the lives of both Apollonius and Jesus parallel each other. Similarities abound. They both lived during the same time period. They were both teachers. They were both reputed to have been born to a virgin woman. They were both miracles workers. In fact, many of the miracles both men worked were the same. And yet, despite all these similarities and more, only one of these men has been remembered during the last 2000 years of history, while the other is practically nothing more than a historical footnote. But this destiny of obscurity is not exclusive to Apollonius. There have been an enormous number of people in history like this man, and practically all of them have been overlooked by history. But this does not change who they were. Call them Spiritual Masters, call them miracle workers, call them mystics, call them philosophers, call them wizards, call them magicians. Who cares? Whats in a name, after all? The historical designation does not matter so much as what they were. Given what I know about them all, I like to think of them as Spiritual Scientists. Certainly not a romantic label, but by the time the reader reaches the midpoint of this book, it will be clear why I call people like Apollonius, Jesus, and all the rest, Spiritual Scientists. Perhaps a brief explanation is in order here. Why the name Spiritual Scientists? Among other things, what I have discovered in my life is that there is a definite Science which explains things Spiritual. Every phenomenon which has been labeled paranormal, psychic, supernatural, metaphysical, miraculous,
1
Jason Blanchard
etc., has a definite Scientific explanation. All too often, strange phenomenon, unexplainable by conventional Science, such as supposed miracles, are merely relegated to the Spiritual realm with absolutely no attempt to understand the phenomenon any further. This attitude has always disturbed me ever since I was young. I have learned quite a few things after years of searching and questioning, and also through personal experience. I can generally sum up the main discoveries with just a few statements. Science can explain Anything and Everything. Science permeates the Whole Universe. Spirit is comprehensible, understandable and knowable through Science. Spirit is Scientific. God is Scientific. God is not mysterious at all. Part of the main focus of this book will be an explanation of some of the most important main Laws which compose this Spiritual Science. The reader may be surprised just how similar the Spiritual Laws are to Physical Laws. In fact, the careful reader will notice that the Laws are actually identical. This is no coincidence. In fact, there is no such thing as coincidence. In a Universe governed by a set number of Laws, everything which occurs does so according to the dictates of those Laws. The Universe is not a hotbed of chaotic activity. There are no accidents. Everything happens for a reason, and is explainable. Even those miracles I heard about as child are not baffling when one understands the Spiritual Science. Within this book, I will do what I have known no author, scientist, or theologian to ever doI will examine and explain the Science needed to understand the precise process of miracles. In doing so, I will also inadvertently prove an enigmatic phrase from the Bible to be very much the Truth. WE ARE GODS? I never intended to prove anything from the Bible, really. But I could not ignore the Truth underlying this following statement as I studied and applied the Spiritual Science. Here is the relevant quote from the Bible. John 10:34Jesus replied, It is written in your own law that God said to certain leaders of the people, I say, you are gods! The implication of this verse is, without exaggeration, of biblical proportions (pun intended). God calling mere humans gods? It seemed to me that this was the most incredible thing that Jesus could possibly say to the huge crowd who gathered to hear him speak that day. The son of God calling mere humans gods? Could this be True? Could it be proved in any way at all? In addition to proving with this book, that there is a Spiritual Science after all, it will also be seen that the above statement, You are gods!, is also the Truth. In proving to
2
myself the existence of a Spiritual Science, I inadvertently also proved this statement to be Truth. Indeed, we are gods. THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE The Spiritual Science of God. Spirit & Science? Science and God?!? Can this be real? Can this possibly exist? For untold centuries, this long-hoped-for connection of Science and God has seemed impossible. Theology and religion with all its dogma and doctrine have always been at odds with the Scientific world because it seemed that Gods ways were eternally unknowable, supernatural and simply not for humans to comprehend. Well, everything is not always as it seems. Sometimes the very thing we accept as Truth is nothing but a bald-faced lie. The union of Science and Spirit is not only possible, but rather, it simply IS. It is Truth. Spirit and Science are One. Science is the method by which God created the whole Universe, and continues to create today. There is a Science which underlies and explains the ways and workings of Spirit. The Spiritual Science has always existed since the very beginning. It is the set of Divine Laws by which the Universe works. The workings of the Universe have always followed these Laws since the very Creation of the Universe, and it will continue to be this way. God is definitely Spiritual and Gods methods are most definitely Scientific. This wonderful realization, this Blessed Jewel of Truth, is precisely what I intuitively knew when I was still very young and questioning the adults in my world for any detailed information about God. But it was not until many years later, when I studied Spiritualism in as much extensive detail as I possibly could, and began to apply what I had learned, that I finally came into possession of some of the actual Laws by which the Universe operates. It is these things I wish to share with the readerthe Truth, the Facts, the Laws. I will endeavor to explain all of these things, one by one, as best as I am able. The open-minded reader may find that in the end, Science, rather than blind faith in a belief, will be the real method of salvation. The Truth of Science will set you free. Ready for the first lesson?
Jason Blanchard
CHAPTER 2 LESSON 101THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF GOD

All is Vibration.The Lost Teachings of Atlantis The above quotation is a Universal Law. It is one of the most important of all Laws. And for our purpose here, this Law is central to this book. Remember this Law!! I will refer back to it many times, because this Law is the Key which will unlock many secrets. All is Vibration. What is the True nature of Reality? It is the Universal Law just statedAll is Vibration. A detailed explanation is in order here. What exactly do I mean that All is Vibration? Perhaps if we examine a famous scientific equation, we can begin to understand this Universal Law. Let the reader take notice that the following scientific equation will be the only one quoted in this entire book. E = mc Albert Einstein Show your work!!Einsteins teacher Disregarding my attempt at scientific humor, I am sure that most people have heard of Einsteins famous equation, E=mc . This equation has had far reaching effects during this century. The most infamous application of this equation was the building and detonation of an atomic bomb. Nuclear reactions, whether in a bomb or in nuclear reactor, are based on this equation. These are the most obvious and well known uses of Einsteins famous equation. In case you fell asleep in science class and dont know about this equation, let me explain. E=mc is an equation which equates energy to mass, or vice versa. The letters in the formula mean thisE is Energy, M is the Mass of a material object, and c is the Speed of Light squared (the speed of light multiplied by the speed of light). The equation reads like this: Energy is equal to the mass of an object multiplied by the speed of light squared. What Einsteins equation means is that there is a huge amount of Energy trapped in mass (material things). The speed of light squared (which is already a big freaking number) multiplied by the mass of any material thing equals a very big freaking number, and hence, the giant amount of energy contained within the object. When one looks at the precise math involved, which we wont do here, it staggers the mind at just how much stored up energy lurks within matter. But I will mention one math-less example for the curious, it has been calculated that a single matchstick, if converted into pure energy, would release enough energy to lift an entire mountain.
4
2 2 2
2
In the scientific world, everything in the Universe is defined as Energy or Mass. Everything. Anything which we call physical or material is considered to be matter. If it looks solid, if it is heavy, if it takes up space, then it is matter. On the other hand, anything which is neither physical nor material is considered to be energy. If it is not solid, if it seems to weigh nothing, and if it doesnt seem to take up any space at all, then it must be energy. 2 The formula E=mc reveals the relationship of energy and matter in plain mathematical terms. The reason an atomic bomb releases so much energy from a small amount of radioactive material is because there is such an enormous amount of energy contained within matter. When an atom bomb is exploded, the small amount of radioactive matter in the bomb is quickly converted into energy, seemingly creating a huge amount of energy in the process. The energy is not really created, but rather the radioactive matter simply transforms directly into 2 energy. This is a great secret contained within the equation E=mc namely that energy and matter can be transformed into each other. But why is this? The equation tells us that Matter and Energy are equal to each other. This means that Matter and Energy are, in Truth, one and the same thing. But what is this thing? What is it about Matter and Energy that make them equal? Here is the answer. Both Matter and Energy are a manifestation of something. And that something is Vibration. Vibration is the Key to understanding just what matter and energy really are, because in Truth, all matter and all energy are nothing more than a Vibration. Remember the Law? All is Vibration. I have 2 heard all too many times from both scientists and science books that E=mc means that everything is energybullshit. Everything is a Vibration. E=mc tells us that matter and energy are the same thing (Vibration), and that they are both interchangeable. Matter can be changed into energy, proven by atomic bomb explosions. And the equation also works in reverse, meaning energy can be turned into matter. Since a small amount of matter releases a huge amount of energy, then the reverse is True, namely that it takes a huge amount of energy to make a small amount of matter. This is so because energy and matter are polar opposites of each other, sort of like light and dark, heat and cold, etc. It can also be compared to two sides of a coin, one side being energy, and the other being matter. But what is the coin itself? What is the thing which actually composes both Matter and Energy? Its Vibration. Well, if everything is a Vibration, then these Vibrations should be Scientifically detectable,...and they are. FREAKING FREQUENCY Energy is measured by its frequency, which means rate of vibration. Frequency is something we are all familiar with. Our radio stations all broadcast
5
2
Jason Blanchard
their programs on radio waves which are tuned to specific frequencies, which we can then listen to if our radio is tuned to the correct frequency. The familiar letters FM on our radio means frequency modulation. The numbers 88 to 108 on a FM radio refer to the frequency, the higher numbers representing the faster frequencies. Television is also a receiver of frequencies. In fact, television frequencies are found below 88 megahertz, which is just below the FM frequencies. Even television remote controls utilize energy of certain frequencies. It is a fact that energy vibrates, and this Vibration is measured as frequency. Energy Vibrates. FREQUENTLY, THE TRUTH MATTERS Its a case of mind over matter. I dont mind and you dont mattersome jerk It is a little known Truth that matter vibrates. Have you ever heard of an atomic clock? These are clocks which measure the passage of time with phenomenal accuracy. Atomic clocks work so well because they are calibrated to the very precise and consistent frequencies (vibrations) of certain atoms or molecules. Here we have Vibration at the atomic level, which is still physical matter, albeit in its smallest of forms. All atoms Vibrate like this, each at their own particular frequency. All of the 100+ elements on the chemical periodic charts Vibrate. Matter vibrates. ITS ALL THERE IS Energy Vibrates. Matter Vibrates. Energy and Matter are equal to each other. And they are all there is in our manifested Universe. Everything in the Universe is Matter or Energy, but both of these are, in Truth, Vibration. All is Vibration. VIBRATION IN THE BIBLE From the Bible, in the book of Genesis, we read in chapter 1, verse 3: And God said, Let there be Light, and there was light. What is light? It is a Vibration. Light can be measured. Light has frequency. Light is perceived as Energy. But, Energy is a Vibration. This Bible quote could have just as easily read, Let there be Vibration. In the Gospel of John, chapter 1, verses 1-5, we read: In the beginning the Word already existed. He was with God, and he was God. He was in the beginning with God. He created everything there is. Nothing exists that he didnt make. Life itself was in him, and this life gives light to everyone. The light shines through the darkness, and the darkness cannot extinguish it. Here John speaks of the Word. The word Word means Vibration. What is a word if
6
nothing but a sound, a Vibration? Even John knew that everything was Vibration. In fact, John equates the Word (Vibration) with God itself!! He also states that God, as this Vibration, created everything there is. The Vibration lives, or exists, in all things. Since God is the Vibration, this means that God, manifesting as a Vibration, lives in all things. And since All things were created by God/Vibration, then, as stated earlier, All is Vibration. In Matthew 4:4, we read: But Jesus told him, No! The Scriptures say, People need more than bread for their life; they must feed on every word of God. It appears that even no less a figure than Jesus also knew about the Vibrational character of the Universe. (I should hope so...) I included these quotes from the Bible for the benefit of any reader with religious tendencies. I quote these verses simply because they happen to concur with the Scientific Truth that All is Vibration. VIBRATION WITHOUT END, AMEN... So, All is Vibration. The next logical thing to do is describe this Universal Vibration. Geez, is that all? How does one describe That which is Everything? How does one describe the very essence of God? What can be said about it? Sometimes the best way to describe a thing is to describe what it is not. Unfortunately, that is absolutely impossible here, since this Universal Vibe/God is literally All Things. There is nothing which the Vibe is not. There is no place which the Vibe is not. The Vibe is All, and is In All. Once again, All is Vibration. The Vibration is without limits. In fact, the frequency (rate of Vibration) range of the Vibration has no bottom level and no upper limit. That may be difficult to comprehend, but it is the Truth nonetheless. In regards to Vibration, there is always a slower frequency, and there is always a higher frequency. A simple examination of music can help us understand this Truth the endless frequency range of the Universal Vibration. Let us take a look (and a listen) to a piano. The piano has one of the greatest ranges of any musical instrument, being second only to the mighty pipe organ. The range of the piano is 7.5 octaves of the musical alphabet. This alphabet consists of 7 letters: A, B, C, D, E, F, & G. The pianos range begins at the left end of the keyboard with the very low bass note of the first A, and continues to climb higher in pitch (vibration) for another 7.5 cycles of this alphabet until it stops with the last key on the right side of the keyboard, the highest C. This low A has a frequency of 27.5 hertz, or vibrational cycles per each second of time, producing a deep bass tone. The highest note on the piano, the high C, has a frequency of 4224 hertz, meaning this particular sound wave creates 4224 vibrations in the air per second creating a very high, shrill sound. These two notes may seem extreme when they are heard, but they are only a tiny fraction of the infinite vibrational spectrum. The human ear can generally detect sounds
7
Jason Blanchard
(vibrations) from roughly 15 hertz up to 15,000 hertz. Some people can even hear vibrations a little lower than 15 hertz, and sometimes, children can hear up to 20,000 hertz. But these are not the limits of sonic vibration. Infrasonic sounds are vibrations which are so low that they are felt rather than heard. Earthquakes produce these slow vibrations, which are responsible for their destructive power. Recent discoveries have proven that elephants can both produce and hear infrasound, and apparently communicate with it. This ability of elephants to communicate with infrasound may be responsible for the previously unexplainable way in which they could suddenly organize their herds, much to the bewilderment of the onlooking biologists, who could not hear what was happening. Although I have not heard of any further discoveries, I would not be surprised if quite a few animals on our planet communicated with infrasound. Unlike with infrasound, most people have heard of ultrasound. Ultrasound is a frequency which is so high, that humans cannot hear it because it, like infrasound, is also beyond our hearing range. Silent dog whistles produce ultrasonic vibrations which humans cannot hear, but will cause a response in dogs. The canary also produces ultrasonic pitches in its songs, which are inaudible to humans. A squeaking mouse also produces ultrasound, but unfortunately for the mouse, stalking cats can hear these vibrations. Bats also utilize ultrasonic squeaks in the range of 40,000 to 80,000 hertz. These high pitch sounds then reflect off of the environment, which the bat then uses to detect even tiny objects or small prey, allowing the bats to fly and hunt in the dark. This process is called echo-location. Dolphins also use ultrasound to navigate the oceans, although this is usually called sonar. In recent years, couples who are expecting the birth of a baby can get a photo of the fetus using ultrasound. This cursory examination of music and sound helps one to understand Vibration and its many frequencies. The frequencies of physical sound extend far beyond the human hearing range. In Truth, they are infinite. All is Vibration. And Vibrational frequencies are infinite. There is no upper limit or lower limit to the Vibration. But so far, we have only looked at the vibrations of physical sound, which are vibrations carried through a physical medium, like air or water. Vibration and its frequencies are not confined to those of a purely physical nature. LOTS AND LOTS OF ENERGY Energy...pure energyMr. Spock, from Star Trek Modern electronic appliances such as radio, television, CB radio, cellular phones, satellite dish receivers, microwave ovens, remote controls, etc., all operate thanks to another kind of Vibrationelectromagnetic vibration. This phenomenon is commonly called electromagnetic radiation. Technically
8
speaking, electromagnetic radiation is energy waves (waves are a vibration) which are produced by the oscillation (moving back and fortha vibration) or acceleration of an electric charge. The Vibrational range of electromagnetic radiation is vast (endless, in Truth). Within the range of the spectrum of electromagnetic radiation we find familiar modern technologies, radio waves such as AM, FM, shortwave, cellular communications frequencies, even television. We also find microwaves, infrared light (hot lights), ultraviolet light, x rays, and gamma rays. Visible light, the light which we see with our eyes is also a part of the electromagnetic spectrum. In fact, visible light makes up only a tiny fraction of the electromagnetic spectrum, and is the only electromagnetic radiation that we humans can normally perceive with our eyes. I still remember my high school chemistry teacher repeating many times in class that our eyes are electromagnetic radiation detectors. And she was absolutely right. Light is electromagnetic radiation. In Truth, all of the various frequencies of electromagnetic radiation are light, but we do not normally see this light. We normally see only the colors of the visible spectrum, which are the same as the 7 colors of the rainbowred, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. The visible spectrum represents only a small range of frequency. Just as our ears can normally detect only a certain range of vibrations, so it is with our eyes. We can normally perceive a visible range starting with the lower frequencies of red light and ending with the faster frequencies of violet light. Just as it is with the sounds we call music, light also vibrates at different frequencies, which are responsible for the 7 colors of the rainbow. But the frequencies dont stop with those visible colors of course. Remember, the frequencies of Vibration are endless in range. For example, just below our normal viewing range is infrared light. Conversely, just above our normal range is ultraviolet light. Electromagnetic radiation is commonly called Light. And Light is Energy. But Energy is a Vibration. All Light is Energy is Vibration. This Energy, in the guise of Electromagnetic radiation (Light), pervades the entire Universe, but thanks to our limited organs of perception, we generally only experience a tiny fraction of all of the Light, or Energy, in the Universe. Truly, this Energy is all around us at all times, as though we were surrounded by a soup of electromagnetic radiation. Yet all of this is Vibration. We are surrounded by various Vibrations which appear to us as Energy, also called electromagnetic radiation, or Light. But, Vibration, as the Energy we call Light, is still what it isa Vibration. Energy is a Vibration.
Jason Blanchard
AS A MATTER OF FACT ...all matter is merely energy condensed to a slow vibration.the late comedian Bill Hicks, featured in the song Third Eye, by Tool Chemistry teaches us that all matter is composed of tiny things called atoms. Atoms are the building blocks of all matter. From gases to liquids to solids, absolutely all matter, all of those 100+ elements on the periodic charts in our chemistry labs are composed of atoms. All elements from the smallest, lightweight hydrogen to the largest and heaviest of the radioactive elements are composed of atoms. Atoms themselves are composed of even smaller things three components called protons, neutrons, and electrons. (In recent years, scientists have gone even farther into the atom and found smaller things which compose the proton, neutron, and electron, but they are of no interest to the topic here.) The basic structure of an atom is exactly like the image of planets orbiting a star. Let us take a look at the atomic structure of the first and most basic element, hydrogen. In the center, the nucleus of the hydrogen atom, are found one neutron and one proton. Together, these can be viewed as the sun. Now, far away (in atomic terms) and flying in orbit around the nucleus (sun), we find one electron, which can be seen as a lone planet orbiting around the star. The atom also resembles the relationship between the earth and the moon, with the earth as the nucleus containing the proton and the neutron, and the moon as the electron orbiting from far away. Basically, this is all there is to an atom. If you think that it doesnt sound like much of anything but some tiny particles flying around in a huge empty space, then you are right. Scientist Carl Sagan once said that matter is 98% empty space. Do you realize the implications of this? What we perceive as solid is really an illusion, not really what is there. Matter, if we could see it as it really is, would not be opaque (as we see it), nor transparent (clear), but rather translucent, meaning we could see both the matter, and also through it at the same time, as though we were looking at a thin curtain or veil, and able to see what is on the other side. All matter is practically nothing but empty space. All matter is really like this. All matter. But there is something else we must remember about these atoms which make up the matter in the Universe. Please keep in mind, that these three incredibly tiny particles, which are the ingredients in all of the elements, are actually small bundles of energy condensed to a slow vibration. Remember, Matter may be viewed as compressed, condensed, slow-frequency Energy. Imagine itone tiny collection of compressed energy (electron) constantly orbiting about a center, which itself is composed of two more individual tiny collections of compressed energy (proton and the neutron). But each bundle of energy is a Vibration, above all else. Remember, Matter, just like Energy,
10
Vibrates. This is the nature of all Matter and Energyit is all a Vibration. Different frequencies of the Vibration, and different collections of these various frequencies are what creates the multitude of different elements that scientists have discovered so far. In other words, the Key to understanding why gold is different from silver (and vice versa) is all in the Vibration. The heavy element lead is heavy because of its Vibration. The element mercury owes all of its physical properties to its Vibration. If you manipulate and change the Vibration of any element, then the physical characteristics will change as well, and you will end up with a different element from the original, which will also have a different Vibration from the original. One could quite literally change elements like lead, mercury, or silver into gold just by manipulating the Vibration. This may sound like impossible fantasy or total nonsense, but it is absolutely True that Matter can be manipulated this way, because Matter is a Vibration. SUMMARY So far, we have examined the Truth that All is Vibration. In the view of physics, absolutely everything in the Universe is either Matter or Energy. But in Truth, both of these, Matter and Energy, are a Vibration. We also covered the fact that all Vibration can be measured as frequency. Also the range of frequency of Vibration is endless. Frequencies continue in either direction, both faster and slower, but there is no end to the range of frequencies. This was the perfect place to begin the explanation of the Spiritual Science, because this Law of Vibration applies to Everything that has ever been created, or will be created. All that has ever been was a Vibration. All that will ever be is a Vibration. And all of these Vibrations are vibrating at different frequencies, the range of which is endless. So, this is the first lesson to be learned: 1) All is VibrationAll manifests as Matter or Energybut All is Vibration. 2) Vibration is measured as a Frequency. 3) The Frequency range of Vibration is endless. ###
11
Jason Blanchard
CHAPTER 3 OPPOSITES OF THE ONE THING

In this Universe, there is a law called the Law of Polar Opposites. Defined simply, it states that for everything that exists, there also exists its opposite. The Law of Opposites also states that although both of these opposites appear different, in Truth, both opposites are manifestations of One and the Same Thing. Take the colors white and black for instance. Seen from the perspective of the white side, the color white is simply an absence of the color black. That may sound simplistic, but the Truth is indeed very simple. Think about it. What is the brilliant color white if nothing else but an absence of the darkening characteristic of the color black? Look at it from the perspective of the color black. Seen from this perspective, the color black is simply an absence of the color white. After all, what is the dark color of black if nothing else but an absence of the brightening characteristic of the color white? This example proves the Truth of the Law of Opposites. There can be no white without black. There can be no black without white. They appear different. They manifest as different. And yet they are both interdependent on each other for eachs survival. If one did not exist, then the other would also cease to be. White and Black are both One and the Same Thing. They are two sides of the same coin, so to speak. Similarly, look at Light and Dark. It is the same situation here. Light is an absence of Darkness. And Darkness is an absence of Light. They are opposites of each other and yet they are One and the Same Thing. Eachs existence is dependent on the others existence. Light and Dark are both opposite manifestations of the Same Thing. Remember the riddle: what is composed of light and yet is dark? The answeryour shadow!! Your shadow is dependent on the thing which it is notlight. What is your shadow if nothing but an absence of light? Once again, two sides of the coin. Have you ever spoken of a coin as purely a head or purely a tail? Of course not. The so-called head and tail of a coin are nothing but opposite sides of the same thing, in this case, a coin. So it is with Everything that Exists. Everything has an opposite, and yet, both opposites are really one and the same thing. It may be difficult to comprehend sometimes, but even Good and Evil are two opposites of the exact same thing. MATTER & ENERGY But for now, lets examine the opposites of Matter and Energy more 2 closely. Einstein, by the equation E=mc , showed us that Energy and Matter
12
are both equal to each other. The equation tells us two things. First there is an immense amount of energy trapped within a small amount of matter. Second, it takes a large amount of compressed energy to condense a tiny amount of matter. Here, Energy and Matter are seen from two different perspectives. Each is dependent on the other. Each is considered opposite of each other. Each cannot exist without the other. Therefore, they are Polar Opposites of One and the Same Thing. So what is that thing? Its Vibration!! Both Matter and Energy Vibrate. All is Vibration, and all Vibration has a frequency. What makes Matter and Energy so different from each other, what gives them each their own unique characteristics is Vibration, or more accurately, the specific frequency of Vibration. Matter and Energy are both manifesting a Vibration, but at different frequencies. In general, Matter has a slow frequency while Energy has a high frequency. Matter, manifesting as the slower frequencies, has the characteristics of being physical, condensed, and solid. Energy, manifesting as the higher frequencies, has the properties of being immaterial, ethereal, and subtle. But still, both are a Vibration. Take another look (or listen) at music. High tones are very piercing and ethereal, evoking uplifting emotions like love or joy, or even spiritual thoughts. Deep bass tones tend to wrap around you, can actually be felt physically, and evoke such feelings as seriousness, fear, and enormity. Have you ever noticed that in general, most spiritual music centers around the high end of the musical range, and most heavy metal music centers around the lower registers? Even the respective names of each musical category (spiritual & heavy) offer a hint as to where the Spiritual and the Physical are located on the Vibrational spectrum. As mentioned above, Matter has a slow frequency while Energy has a high frequency. Which brings me to the subject of the Spiritual and Physical worlds or planes. Most would agree with the notion that the Spiritual and the Physical planes of existence are, in a sense, opposite of each other. I would tend to agree with this, but I would also have to add the Law of Polar Opposites to the assertion, and state that, in Truth, both the Spiritual and Physical worlds are really opposite manifestations of One and the Same ThingVibration. That may not make much sense at first. It may even seem incomprehensible, but it is the Truth. Just as Energy and Matter are opposite and yet One and the Same (Vibration), so is that which we call Spiritual and Physical, also One and the Same, each being a manifestation of Vibration. This Truth will be evident when we examine this next example. SPINNING YOUR WHEELS This example will focus on ever-increasing Vibrational frequencies, and its subsequent dramatic effects. Imagine something which can be spun around about
13
Jason Blanchard
an axis, bicycle wheels, plane propellers, helicopter blades, etc. For this example, I will use the wheel of a bicycle spinning horizontally, in the air, as if the bike had been laid on its side. Let us begin spinning our wheel. As the wheel begins to spin, we soon begin to hear a very deep, low pitched hum as the wheel begins to make sounds due to its movement through the air. As the speed of the wheels revolution increases, the sound will increase in pitch, rising ever higher and higher on the musical spectrum. The notes rise higher and higher in pitch till at last the highest note is heard by our ears and then all detectable sound disappears altogether. The wheels revolving speed is now so high, that our ears can no longer perceive the high vibrations coming from the wheel. The wheel is now emitting ultrasonic vibrations. The wheel continues to spin faster. When the wheel eventually reaches the appropriate speed, we will perceive heat coming from the wheel. This heat continues to increase in temperature even though we cannot yet detect any of the classic reddening color which comes with heating. But, before long, we soon distinguish a faint red color as the wheel continues its acceleration, and gets hotter. This red becomes brighter, and changes in hue to orange, and all of the colors of the rainbow until at last it glows violet. With the wheel spinning faster, the violet color disappears and the wheel appears to show no more color. It is now emitting ultraviolet light. As the wheel accelerates, it will even produce X-rays, and other frequencies which are dangerous to human beings. This process will continue until all manner of frequencies and vibrations are produced, even those of electricity and magnetism, until something quite extraordinary occurs. The wheel, now spinning at unbelievable speeds, continues to accelerate even more. Here is what happens next to our wheel. Eventually, at the proper speed of revolution, the wheel will be producing a vibration which will cause the atoms of the wheel itself to vibrate with such speed, that all of the atoms of the wheel (and hence the wheel itself) will begin to be less dense, less material, and less physical. The atoms will actually begin to change their manifested form, slowly converting into Energy. The formerly Material wheel (and its atoms) will begin to behave more like Energy, and start to exhibit more Energetic, ethereal qualities, and will literally disappear from view altogether. The wheel will actually become, at first, translucent, appearing as though it were a thin curtain or veil. And then, as the speed of revolution increases, the wheel will become totally transparent (invisible), as though absolutely no material object even existed. Why is this? What has happened to the wheel? It has become nonphysical. It is now in a pure energy state of existence. The Material wheel, in a sense, has died, and is now existing as an Energy wheel. This example with the wheel is really a metaphor for the Physical and Spiritual worlds. It demonstrates in a vivid fashion the difference between Matter and Energy, and, by analogy, also between the Physical and the Spiritual. The difference is nothing but the frequency of Vibration. That which we
14
call Matter is Physical, of course. That which we call Energy is Spiritual. All is Vibration. This Vibration is measured by Frequency. The Frequency is without end. Matter and Energy are One and the Samethey are both Vibration. All is Vibration. What we call the Spiritual world or the Spiritual plane is really just a high frequency (plane of) existence. What we call the Physical world or Physical plane is really just a low frequency (plane of) existence. The Physical world and the Spiritual world are really One and the Samethey are both a manifestation of Vibration. The only difference is the Frequency. Can you see the obvious connection between Spirit/Physical and Energy/Matter? The Spiritual is analogous to Energy. And the Physical is analogous to Matter. The words are completely interchangeable. In the end, they are all just a Vibration. CONTINUITY Earlier, it was stated that the Spiritual and the Physical were just opposites of each other, and that in Truth, they are both the same thingVibration, to be exact. The above experiment with the spinning wheel helped demonstrate the Truth of the Law of Opposites. All that was really changed about the wheel was its frequency, and nothing more. All of the other strange and fantastic things that occurred as the wheel was spinning were the natural result of the rise in the wheels frequency, the rate of Vibration. Look at the wheels journey from the lower Physical/Material realm to the higher realm of Spirit/Energy. Take notice of the continuity of the process. The process of ascending into the higher frequencies was accomplished slowly and steadily. All of the observable effects of this ascension were noticeable as they slowly made their appearance, dominated for a while, and then faded away. In the end, even the wheel itself slowly faded from view, after a certain frequency was reached. Notice that there was no sudden point where the wheel was visible one moment and invisible the next. There was no definite dividing point separating the Spirit/Energy from the Physical/Matter. Rather there was a gradual ascension in frequency which was accompanied by a simultaneous decline in the physical-ness or material density of the wheel. As the dense, gross, material wheel increased its Vibrational frequency, it became less material, and began to resemble Energy itself, which is invisible. This made the wheel transparent. It was, in a sense, half Spirit/Energy and half Physical/Matter. The wheel was in a sort of middle ground, but it still did not jump suddenly at one moment, going from a totally Physical/Material object to a pure Spiritualized Energetic form. The wheel just slowly disappeared from view as it became more like Spirit/Energy, and less like Physical/Matter. This process of ascension
15
Jason Blanchard
showed that there was no concrete or definite dividing point between the polar opposites of Matter and Energy. The two are connected. The reason for this inter-connectedness is that just as the Law of Opposites state, the two opposites are dependent on each other. One cannot exist without the other, since they both are really just one thinga Vibration. They are mutually tied to each other, and cannot exist alone. Where one is, so is the other. In the case of the wheel, the general characteristics of Energy were not detectable when the wheel was manifesting as Matter. To the observer, the wheel looked more like Matter than Energy. Conversely, later in the experiment, when the wheel manifested as Energy, the general characteristics of Matter were not very noticeable, making the wheel seem more like Energy to the observer. As the wheel accelerated, the characteristics of Matter slowly subsided while the characteristics of Energy simultaneously arose. In short, there is no obvious, sudden dividing line between Matter and Energy, or Physical and Spirit. In Truth, the characteristics of each polar opposite still manifest in each other, albeit it is barely detectable. In other words, Energy still tends to resemble Matter, and conversely, Matter still tends to resemble Energy. It is impossible to have Pure Energy or Pure Matter, which do not possess any characteristics of the other. Physics has proven this statement. Physicists discovered that gravity can bend and attract the Energy known as Light. Keep in mind that gravity only affects those things which possess some characteristic of Matter, things which manifest even the tiniest Physical characteristic in order for gravity to attract it. (Gravity attracts all Physical things, all Material things, such as planets, moons, asteroids, and everything on and including earth.) The gravitational pull of a star (like our sun) can bend any light which is passing next to it by several degrees of arc. During a solar eclipse of our sun, it is possible to actually view background stars appearing on the side of our sun, even though the stars actual position in the sky is directly behind our sun during the eclipse. The gravity of our sun actually pulls the light from distant stars and bends it so much that the starlight appears to us as though it were on the side of the sun, instead of appearing where it really is. Ever heard of a black hole? A black hole is a very condensed star of sorts. In fact, black holes are really stars which have collapsed onto themselves forming a very dense and compact ball of matter which owns a tremendous gravitational pull. This gravitational pull is so strong that it actually has enough strength to pull light (Energy) with such force, that light itself falls into the black hole, and cannot escapehence the name black hole. Now this pulling of the light would not be possible if light, which is Energy, did not still retain even a little bit of the characteristics of Matter. But since Energy still tends to resemble Matter (as just stated above), the black hole, with it massive gravitational pull, attracts all light which gets too close to it. If light (Energy) was absolutely pure
16
Energy, then it would not retain even the tiniest characteristics of Matter, and therefore, it would not be capable of being pulled by a black hole. Despite experiments to do so, physicists have never created or seen anything which is Pure Energy, exhibiting absolutely no properties of Matter. Conversely, there neither exists no Purely Material thing, an object which is Pure Matter, Purely Physical, which exhibits absolutely no properties of Energy. Scientists who have studied the Universe in detail know that there is always a tendency for Energy to behave, in even the slightest fashion, like Matter. And there is also a tendency for Matter to still retain even the tiniest, most minuscule characteristics of Energy. Physicists who have done this research into the extremes of Matter and Energy have thus far been unable to find any absolute point from which to study Matter or Energy. It has been impossible to separate them completely. No matter how far in the extreme one may observe Matter or Energy, it will always be possible to observe one behaving like the other, even if only a little bit. And so, the Law of Polar Opposites proves itself. The opposites are really One thing, and are not really separate. Energy behaves very much like Energy, and does not appear to exhibit much of the characteristics of Matter. Conversely, Matter behaves very much like Matter, and does not appear to exhibit much of the characteristics of Energy. But in each case, there is still a tendency for one to resemble the other in some fashion. These past few paragraphs may seem like anal retentive, technical nit picking, but it was necessary to prove the Law of Polar Opposites. It also proves that the frequency of Vibration has no upper or lower limits. If it did, then there really would be such a thing as Pure Energy or Pure Matter. This extreme technical examination is not so terribly important, but it is necessary to know that the opposites of Spirit/Energy and Physical/Matter are really just opposite manifestations of the same thingVibration. Remember the spinning wheel did not suddenly change from Matter to Energy. It was a gradual process of transformation as the frequency increased. There was a loss of the Material characteristics coupled with a rise in the Energetical characteristics. This phenomenon is purely an attribute of the frequency of Vibration. Frequency determines which characteristics happen to be predominant, and whether the thing in question will appear as Matter or Energy. And just as this is so in regards to Energy and Matter, so it is also with the Spiritual and the Physical. They appear different, to be sure, but, just like Matter and Energy, the Physical and the Spiritual are just different frequencies of a Vibration. But just as Matter and Energy have certain qualities, or characteristics, so do the Physical and Spiritual planes of existence. And these characteristics will be discussed in the next chapter.
17
Jason Blanchard
SUMMARY The Law of Polar Opposites states that for everything that exists, there also exists its opposite. It also states that although both of these opposites appear different, in Truth, both opposites are manifestations of One and the Same Thing. Matter and Energy are both opposite manifestations of the Same Thing Vibration. The Spiritual and Physical worlds are just opposite manifestations of the Same ThingVibration. Spirit is analogous to Energy. Physical is analogous to Matter. Spirit is Energy. Physical is Matter. The main difference between Spirit/Energy and Physical/Matter is the frequency of Vibration. There really is no sudden dividing point between Spirit/Energy and Physical/Matter. There is only an increase or decrease in frequency from one to the other which causes the Vibration to manifest more as one or the other. ###
18
CHAPTER 4 PROPERTIES OF THE EXTREMITIES

The equation E=mc tells us that the opposite extremes of Vibration are related to each other, which is not surprising since each is just a manifestation of Vibration anyway. Energy is matter which vibrates at a very high frequency, 2 and matter is energy which vibrates at a very slow frequency. E=mc energy is equal to mass multiplied by the square of the speed of light. This equation means that there is a huge amount of pure compressed energy which can be released from a small amount of matter, or seen from another perspective, one must compress and condense a huge amount of energy to make a small amount of matter. And in the end, both are just a Vibration. As stated in an earlier chapter, anything which we call physical or material is considered to be matter. If it looks solid, if it is heavy, if it takes up space, then it is matter. On the other hand, anything which is neither physical nor material is considered to be energy. If it is not solid, if it seems to weigh nothing, and if it doesnt seem to take up any space at all, then it must be energy. LETS GET PHYSICAL Lets begin with the plane which is all too obvious for all of usthe Physical plane. The Physical plane is the lower and slower end of the Vibrational spectrum. Anything which exists as part of the Physical plane exhibits a relatively slow frequency of Vibration. The Vibrational plane we call the Physical world contains certain characteristics which are found only as a result of this slow frequency. The slow frequency exhibits denseness, grossness, and solidity, all of which are exclusive to the slowly vibrating Physical plane. As a result of these characteristics, the Physical plane of existence possesses a few very familiar and specific qualities. These are weight, measure, space, and time. Weight is something we all know about. Weight is one quality of the slow Vibe. Wherever the slow Vibration is manifesting, you will find weight. Anything which vibrates at a relatively slow frequency, and is therefore Physical, has weight, no matter how little weight that might be. In addition, all matter can be measured in some form or another. All Matter, because of the slow Vibrational frequency present in the Physical plane, has various properties which can be measured, such as weight, denseness, viscosity, hardness, etc. All Matter, whether it be small or large, since it manifests in the Physical plane, can be measured in some way. Another special characteristic of the slow Vibe is the phenomenon of space. All matter, in addition to having weight, and being measurable, also takes up
19
2
Jason Blanchard
space. All things which are part of the Physical plane take up a certain amount of space, no matter how great or small that space may be. Space is another quality of the Physical plane. All physical things manifest themselves within a space. And here we have something else to measure. Space can be measured as distance from one place in space to another. We often say that one place is far away, or that another is close by. Distance within space is a property exclusive to the Physical plane. But space, distance and measure also evoke the last quality of the Physical planetime. In relation to space, time is a function of distance and speed. We say that at a given speed of travel in space from one point to another, the speed of travel determines the time it will take to complete the journey from one point to another. Increase the speed of travel, and shorten the travel time. Decrease the speed of travel and the journey will take longer. Time is another property exclusive to the Physical plane. Time exists only in this plane of existence. The Physical plane exhibits these four qualitiesweight, measure, space and time. ENERGY SOUP And now to the other side of the cointhat of Spirit/Energy. The Spirit/Energy plane is not as readily familiar to us as the Physical. The Spirit/Energy plane is the higher and faster end of the Vibrational spectrum. Anything which exists as part of the Spirit/Energy plane exhibits a relatively high frequency of Vibration. The primary characteristics of Spirit/Energy plane are twofoldspacelessness and timelessness. In the realm of Spirit, there exists no space and no time. The same can be said for Energy. Energy is independent of space and time. Space and time simply do not exist in Spirit or Energy. Remember, we are concerned with a Vibration above all. While a slow frequency Vibration will give us space and time, a high frequency Vibration will nullify both of these qualities. Thanks to the absence of both space and time in what we call the Spiritual plane, the familiar characteristics of weight, measure, distance, and even relative speed also disappear. In fact, different frequencies of Energies or Spirit can exist at the same time, occupying the same space, without any physical separation, as it is commonly understood. It is obvious that two things cannot exist at the same time in the same place, but here, we are dealing with high frequencies, and not things as it is commonly understood. There is no place in Spirit. Rather, in the case of Spirit/Energy, we have different levels of existence, that is, different frequency levels. These different frequency levels make the simultaneous co-existence of different Energies or Spiritual frequencies possible. Lets look at an example of this co-existence of Energies in the same space. In our modern world, we have manufactured an enormous amount of
20
electronic products which produce electromagnetic waves. As a result of all of these devices broadcasting EM waves, our skies are literally filled with a giant soup of EM waves. Turn on any receiving device such as a radio, TV, ham radio, etc., and you will have evidence of this saturation of airwaves. It seems that there is almost nowhere on the electromagnetic frequency spectrum where there can be found an absence of some kind of broadcast or another. Practically all of the frequencies are being used. And yet, all of this Energy, these EM waves, do not get crowded or mixed up. In a vegetable soup, which is Physical, no two vegetables can occupy the same space at the same time. Yet, in this big Energy soup, all of the EM waves are flying through space, crossing each others paths, and never getting tangled as they pass right over each other. The waves just keep propagating at tremendous speeds, flying in all directions, criss-crossing each other, but never running into each other, as the case would be in the Physical world. This action of the EM waves has a certain analogous connection to the actions of waves on the surface of water. Though you may throw several stones in a pond, which creates several waves, these waves, when they meet, occupy the same space, and keep moving along on their paths. This is not a perfect analogy, but it does help to illustrate the non-interference of moving EM waves. Why can EM waves do this? With the Spiritual/Energetical planes inherent absence of space, therefore, there is no space for the EM waves to get tangled and mixed up. The phenomenon of Physical space is a result of a relatively slow frequency Vibration. Space is exclusive to the Physical plane. In the Physical plane, no two things can occupy the same space at the same time. But since there is no space in the Spirit/Energy realm, the problem of this kind of physical entanglement does not appear. In the Spiritual/Energetical realms, the only factor separating all the different Vibrations is frequency. There are different levels of existence in the Spiritual plane. The levels are directly related to frequency. It may be viewed this way the higher the frequency, the higher the level. Thanks to these different levels, the high Vibrations of the Spiritual plane can occupy the same space at the same time. Just as the different electromagnetic waves can fill the same space surrounding both you and your radios antenna and not get mixed or tangled, so it is with the Spiritual world. All around you are existing infinite levels of Spiritual Vibrations which you cannot normally perceive with your senses. Not only is the Spirit/Energy plane lacking space, but it is also lacking distance. Getting from here to there in the Spirit/Energy realm is terribly easy, as it were. Since there is no space, then, in a sense, there is no way for something to exist here or there to begin with. In this plane of existence, all places are here. And here is wherever you happen to be. But where is this here? In the Spirit/Energy realm, there is really only one way to measure anythingby Vibrational frequency. The only here and there in this realm is the
21
Jason Blanchard
measurement of frequency. It is impossible to get lost in a place if there is no space to be lost in, but it is possible to exist, as it were, on different frequency levels of Spirit/Energy. These frequency levels can be viewed as the only place to go in this plane of existence. One can either go up in frequency or down in frequency, sort of like moving to different floors in a skyscraper with the help of an elevator. The only difference is that this skyscraper would never end. It just keeps going both lower and higher, just like the frequency range of the Vibration, which is endless. It is difficult to come up with a great analogy for this, since it is somewhat difficult to think of an existence in which there is no space involved. We have always been exposed to three-dimensional space all of our lives, and to understand that there is an existence other than this sometimes boggles the mind. But, perhaps we can use the soup analogy again. Imagine your existence is inside of a soup. For our purpose here, we can say that the idea of spacelessness is like saying that it is impossible to be here or there, since no matter where you go in the soup, you are always in the soup anyway. It reminds me of the sayingNo matter where you go, there you are. If the temperature of the soup (and hence, its frequency vibration) were raised, then you could say that the soup was existing at a different frequency level of Vibration. Again, this is not the best analogy, and I wonder if there is a really great one, since we are dealing with the absence of space, something with which we are all familiar. But the seeming strangeness of the Spirit/Energy plane of existence still owns one more special quality. SIMPLY DONT HAVE ANY TIME Also inherent in the Spirit/Energy plane is the timelessness, or the absence of time. Time is a special quality of the Physical plane of existence. Time is exclusive to the slow Vibration prevalent in the material world. But in the Spirit/Energy plane, there simply is no time to speak of. There is no yesterday or tomorrow. There is no last year, or last decade, or next year, or next millennium. Within Spirit, there is only NOW. All that exists is now in the higher Vibrational realm. Time disappears to nothing as the frequency rises to that of the Spiritual range. Time is, in a sense, suspended in the high Spiritual Vibrational plane. It has also been said that time stands still in the Spiritual world. Perhaps if we look at an example, this suspension of time will be better understood. Devices such as radio, CB, and television use ElectroMagnetic waves to carry information over vast distances. These EM waves are really just Light in essence, just like the light we see from the thousands of stars which fill our night skies. Both starlight and EM waves, are Energy, a Vibration, and are both analogous to Spiritual frequencies. Just as there is no time or space in the
22
Spiritual plane, there is no space or time within the high Vibrations of starlight and EM waves. These high frequency Vibrations, starlight, and EM waves, travel at the speed of light, carrying a frozen piece of information with them over huge distances. In the case of the starlight, the information in question is the exact color of the starlight, which is caused by its chemical composition. This information is carried throughout deep space by the lightwave without any essential change. This means that the light we see from a star is exactly the way the star looked like when it created this light we are seeing. This information (the light itself) is frozen in time. The image of the star itself is locked within the timelessness quality of the light itself. The light will travel to the far ends of space, and although it will become fainter as this happens, it will never change its original form. While Physical things may change over time, the image which light carries will never change its basic pattern, because this pattern is literally a moment in time, frozen in time because of the high frequency Vibrational quality of timelessness inherent in the Energetical/Spiritual realm. If we were concerned with a radio signal, the same characteristics are present. The radio signal, which is an EM wave, will lose its strength while traveling out from it original source (such as a radio broadcasting antenna), but the basic information contained within the EM wave will not change at all. For example, if you lived very far out in space, and tuned your radio to the right frequency, then you could literally listen to the original radio broadcast of The War of the Worlds, and actually think that there was a planet called Earth which was being attacked by its stellar neighbors called Martians. The signal would be very faint of course, but its content (the radio play) would not have changed. The famous radio play would remain as it was frozen in the radio signal (an EM wave) because of the quality of timelessness inherent in the high frequency Vibration of the EM wave. The original signal has preserved a moment in time, as it were, forever. SUMMARY And so we have examined the properties of the extremities of Energy and Matter, and its counterparts, the Spiritual and Physical planes of existence. As mentioned before, these two groups of polar opposites are so closely related that the terms can be interchanged with each other without invalidating any laws. As Energy is to Spirit, so Matter is to Physical. The higher frequency Vibrations belong to the polarity of Energy and Spirit. The primary characteristics of this fast Vibration are spacelessness and timelessness. The lower frequency Vibrations exist in the polarity of Matter and the Physical. The basic qualities of this slow Vibration are weight, measure, space and time.
23
Jason Blanchard
CHAPTER 5 VIBRATION AND THE HUMAN BEING

Know Thyself.Ancient Spiritual command inscribed on the Oracle of Delphi Let it be known right here and now that the human being is far more wondrous and amazing than the relatively simple descriptions I will use in the pages of this book. The human being cannot be accurately summed up with just a few words, regardless of the profundity of the given descriptions. The reader should know that throughout his/her life, there will be no greater undertaking, no greater journey, than that of committing oneself to the task of completely and totally understanding and comprehending all aspects of yourself. Now that we have covered the preliminary specifics of the Science of Vibration and its manifested polar opposites, Matter/Physical and Energy/Spirit, it is time we apply this Scientific knowledge to the human being. For our immediate purpose here, I am forced, for the sake of teaching the Spiritual Science, to divide that which is not divisible, to dissect and analyze the human being into various parts. Hence, to educate the reader, I will split the human being into only two primary partsBody and Mind. We will examine the Body first. BODY OF EVIDENCE The human body is a cohesive collection of a vast amount of atoms and molecules which make up various cells, which in turn compose tissues, and organs, all of which form the human body that we all possess. The body is the part of the human being which is, of course, Physical. It is a Material object. The body is composed of Matter. As a result, the Physical body exhibits the characteristics of Matterweight, measure, space, and time. The weight of the human body is something we are all familiar with. Some modern health companies literally rely on weight, or lack thereof, for their profits. The body, being Material, owns weight. Practically hand in hand with weight, is measure. The body can be measured in Physical terms, not only in how much a body weighs, but also things like denseness or hardness. For example the bones of our skeletons are known for their rigidity, while the inner organs are very soft. Since the body is Physical, since it is Material, it can be measured in different ways. Then there is space. Physical things take up space in three dimensions vertical, horizontal, and depth (breadth). Any Material thing takes up space in
24
three dimensions, and the human body is no different. The body takes up space (some more or less than others). And this space itself can also be measured. And finally there is time, which again, can be measured since it is a quality of the Physical plane. While a Physical object does not actually own the property of time, it exists in the Physical plane, which means the object exists within time. The Physical object is subject to time and its effects. Hence, the human body exists within this construct of time. And we all are aware of the existence of time while living in our bodies within the Physical plane. DO YOU MIND? And now to the other part of the human beingthe Mind. Have you ever asked yourself the following questions? What is the Mind? What are the thoughts which the Mind creates? What is the nature of thought? What exactly is thought itself? Perhaps you already know where I am going with this? What is Mind? Mind is Energy. The mind produces thoughts, and thoughts are also Energy. Please do not confuse mind with the human brain. In this exposition, I am not interested with the Physical brain, but rather with the mind, and the thoughts of the mind. With that said, lets examine the mind and thoughts. But before we look at what the mind and thoughts are, lets quickly look at what they are not. Is the mind a Physical thing? No. The mind has no weight. Is thought a Physical thing? Of course not. Our thoughts which run through our minds also have no Physical weight. Our thoughts cant be put on a scale to be measured. Can our thoughts be measured in a Physical fashion? No. It is impossible to feel a thought with our fingertips, and say that it is a soft thought, or a thought with a rough texture and so forth. Thoughts cannot be measured in miles or inches either. Thoughts are not Physical. Do either the mind or thoughts take up threedimensional space? Once again, no. They are not something which takes up space the way Physical objects do. Are thoughts related to time? No. There is no time associated with thoughts. Thoughts are independent of time altogether. It may be possible to think of the concept of time, but our thoughts are in no way constrained or limited by time. So here is what mind and thoughts are. The mind and its thoughts are Energy. And Energy, as we have learned, possesses the qualities of spacelessness and timelessness. There is no space associated with the realm of Energy. Likewise there is no space linked to the mind. The mind does not work in a space, and it does not rely on space for its functions. Have you ever once asked yourself just where do those thoughts exist if there is no actual space for them to exist? And just where do all those thoughts you have during the day go when you are not thinking of them? Thoughts just come and go all the time, appearing out of nowhere and disappearing into nothing. Well, well,...even our
25
Jason Blanchard
very expressions for the actions of the mind fit the description of a place which is not a placea spacelessness. The mind operates in a spacelessness. Thoughts occur in a spacelessness and appear within our mind, but they are in no way Physical, and therefore do not need a space to manifest. And then when the thought passes, it disappears back into the non-place from which it came. Incredible, isnt it? Since the mind and its thoughts are Energy, then in addition to owning the quality of spacelessness, our mind and its thoughts are also subject to timelessness. Time, remember, is purely a construct of the Physical or Material world. In the realm of Energy, time does not exist. Therefore, in regards to the mind and thoughts, time does not exist either. Our minds and our thoughts are not constricted to time in any way. Our minds are capable of searching out our memories and remembering some major events which occurred in our lives, and piecing them together as though the memories were a quick movie. Memories from childhood can move ahead in time to those of adulthood as quick as a flash of lightning, all because the mind, existing in timelessness, is not constrained by time. We not only know when something happened in our life, but we can recall it from our past in only fractions of a second. This is possible because the mind can function without the limits of time, in a state of timelessness. We can even replay favorite movies or songs within our heads in only seconds, even though the movie or song in question can extend over very long segments of time. All of this is possible because the mind does not exist in time, and is not limited by the Physical construct of time. I THINK, THEREFORE, I AM Perhaps you have noticed that although I have been discussing Energy, there seems to be a certain related word which I have not mentioned yet. What happened to Energys relativeSpirit? Nothing happened to Spirit. I purposely avoided the use of the word thus far so I could reveal a most important Truth right here. As stated before, Spirit is analogous to Energy. And since this is the Truth, then we can take the above discussion to its next logical step. We can declare with certainty that since the mind and thoughts are Energy, then there must be a Spiritual component to the human being. The Mind and Thoughts are, in essence, the activity of Spirit within the human being. Put simply, the proof for the existence for the Human Spirit or Soul is within us all. All we have to do is Think, and the very action of thinking thoughts, of using our minds, proves the existence of an Energy-based action within us. Since Energy and Spirit are, for all intents and purposes, identical, then we can state that there is a Spiritual action going on within each and every one of us. Spirit exists within. The proof of the Soul is within. The actions of the Mind are all the evidence we
26
need to prove that human beings have a Divine component. The very act of thinking provides the proof of ones own Divinity. The proof of Humanitys Divinity is in the Science alone. Please note that this profound Truth has thus far been deduced with Science, and not with the dogma or doctrine of any religions. I think, therefore, I am. So said the philosopher Rene Descartes. This famous statement by a famous philosopher ends the tired old argument of whether or not humanity is, in any way, Divine, possessing Spirits or Souls, etc. We are Divine. We all possess a Spirit. A BIG DEAL, INDEED So, what is the deeper, profound meaning of this Inner Divinity within the human being? Recall chapter 2, the chapter on Vibration, which quotes from the first verses of the Gospel of John. John speaks of the Word (Vibration), and actually equates the Word (Vibration) with God itself. God, manifesting as the Word is the omnipresent Vibration which permeates Everything, and has created Everything, and is Everything. This Word, or Vibration is inherent in all of the Energy and Matter in the entire Universe. Scientifically speaking, the Human being is composed of Vibration, both Body and Mind. This Vibration which composes the Human being is identical with the Vibration which is present within the entire Universe. It is this Vibration which has been recognized for all time as the direct manifestation of that which we call God. This Omnipresent Vibration, which is recognized as God, is not only the key component of our Physical bodies, but this Vibration (God) is also the substance of our Inner Selves, our minds, our thoughts. This Inner Self, this invisible, immaterial, subtle half of the human being must resemble God Itself, since this Inner Self is identical with the Vibration, which is God. This means that the human being resembles God. It means that humans are a part of God. It means that God lives within us. The Vibration, the Spirit of God, which is God, is within us. LIVING TEMPLE OF GOD Perhaps it should come as no surprise that the Bible would contain at least a few verses which also proclaim the Truth of the Inner Divinity of human beings. Although my primary interest is Science, and not religion, I nevertheless do not want to deprive any reader possessing religious tendencies of some scriptural verses which happen to concur with my Scientific findings presented above. Here then, are just a few verses which point to the Divinity within us all.
27
Jason Blanchard
Perhaps the most relevant verse is found in Genesis 1:27, we readSo God created people in his own image; God patterned them after himself; male and female he created them. This key verse from Genesis states quite plainly and in no uncertain terms that we are created in the Image of God. If we are created in the image of God, then we must resemble God. Anything which resembles God and is created in the image of God must be very godly, and Divine indeed. Even from a purely religious viewpoint, is this not enough reason to accept ones own Inner Divinity as fact? There is a spark of Divinity in us all. Genesis tells us so in its first chapter. We each have a Spirit within us. Here are some other verses which also speak of the Inner Divinity of the human being. 1Cor 3:16Dont you realize that all of you together are the temple of God and that the Spirit of God lives in you? you Spirit, 1Cor 6:19Or dont you know that your body is the temple of the Holy Spirit who lives in you and was given to you by God? 2Cor 6:16And what union can there be between Gods temple and idols? For we are the temple of the living God. As God said: I will live in them and walk among them. I will be their God, and they will be my people. 1Cor 2:12And God has actually given us his Spirit (not the worlds spirit) so we given can know the wonderful things God has freely given us. From these few verses (with my own particular emphasis added) it should be apparent to the reader that the Bible does indeed corroborate the Scientific findings presented above. Human beings possess an Energetical, Spiritual component within them. Call this component a Spirit. Call it a Soul. Call it an Inner Divine Spiritual Energy patterned after the Original Divine Spirit of God. Call it the invisible what-cha-ma-call-it. Who the hell cares? It does not matter what name it is given. All that matters is that the reader understand and accept this Truth, which has been Scientifically proven right here. All human beings possess an Energy component within themselves, and this Energy is the Human Spirit, which is patterned after the Original Vibration which created Everything, and permeates Everythingwhat is commonly called God. CLONES OF GOD Since the Human Soul, the Spirit, is created by God, and resembles God, then, in a manner of speaking, we are clones of God. We are created in the image of God. This means that we are like God. It has been said time and time
28
again within religious circles that we are the children of God. This is a rather excellent explanation of who and what we are in Truth. After all, that which is created by something else can be called its child, in a sense. This would make God the Parent. Sometimes I like to call God the Perfect Parent, or the Eternal Parent. This name makes perfect and complete sense to me, both personally and scientifically. While the designation children of God is reasonably accurate, there is another phrase in the Bible which also refers to the human being. This particular phrase occurs only twice within the verses of the Bible, and it proclaims, in no uncertain terms, the True greatness of the Human Spirit. Here are the two verses which are, in my opinion, the most important verses in the whole Bible. Ps 82:6I say, You are gods and children of the Most High. 82:6 10:34Jesus replied, It is written in your own law that God said to certain John 10:34 leaders of the people, I say, you are gods! You are gods...Quite a little phrase, isnt it? The implications of these verses are, without exaggeration, of biblical proportions (didnt I say this already?). Composed of only three words, and yet possessing infinite meaning. It is absolutely amazing that in my entire life, I have never heard any religious person, neither priest nor believer, even so much as mention either of these verses. In the verse from Psalms, it is God Itself that is calling mere humans gods. Would any religious person like to argue with God on the matter? In the Gospel of John, it is Jesus, the so-called Son of God, who finds this verse to be of such stupendous importance, that he takes the time to quote it in front of the hundreds of listeners who gathered in the Temple to hear him speak the Truth. Would any religious person like to argue with Jesus, the claimed Son of God, on the matter? God said we are gods. Jesus said we are gods. Though I possess no religious tendencies anymore, I am inclined to agree with both God and Jesus with this Truth because it is provable Scientifically. I stated in an early chapter that this little verse would be proven, if only indirectly, by proving the existence of a Spiritual Science. Before I get accused of some kind of ridiculous blasphemy or something, I will explain in the following chapters why I agree with both God and Jesus on this Truth that we are gods. Is it possible to Scientifically prove this incredible Truth? Of course it is. (Why else would I bother to even mention this verse?) Hang on tight. Get ready to discover just how Truly awesome and powerful you are. Prepare to learn of your Spiritual power and of your Inner Divinity. It gets really interesting from here (as if all this Science has not thoroughly captured your undivided attention!)
29
Jason Blanchard
SUMMARY And so we have examined the properties of Matter/Physical and Energy/Spirit as it applies to the Human being. The Body is, of course, the Physical part of our being. It is subject to the properties of weight, measure, space and time. The Mind is Energy and operates in both spacelessness and timelessness. Since the Mind is Energy, it is also Spiritual. This means that the Human possesses a Spirit. The Human Being is composed of Vibration, the same Vibration which composes Everything in the Universe. This is the same Vibration which is equated to God. Humans have an Inner Spirit. The Bible equates the Spirit of God with the Spirit of the Human, and in no uncertain terms, both God and Jesus, in referring to mere humans, proclaim the Truth by saying, You are gods. ###
30
CHAPTER 6 ITS ALL IN YOUR MIND

GOD DOES IT, & SO CAN WE Perhaps the one of the foremost characteristics of Divine Providence, the Universal Spirit, the Great Spirit, the Supreme IT, etc., (whatever name you choose) is that it creates. This is hardly contestable. The entire manifested Universe, in all its obvious and subtle wonders, is all the proof one needs to say with certainty that something must have created it all. Practically all human beings, whether they be religious, spiritual, or purely scientific, all tend to agree that there must be a Supreme Being, or something which must be behind the scenes, creating all the wonders of the Universe. With this assertion, I have no disagreement at all. I would also state with certainty that there is something, to be sure, which must have created everything, and is still doing so, whether anyone knows it or not. For brevitys sake, I will simply call this grand something God. I agree that God has created the Universe, and is continuing to do so. With that said, what of the verse which says of human beings, You are gods.? How could both God and no less a figure than Jesus, possibly make such a bold declaration? What makes either one think that we, humans, can be gods? This all but ignored verse in the Bible refers to, among other things, the ability of the human being to create. The first book of the Bible, Genesis, states that humans were created in the image of God. Keeping that in mind, it should not be too difficult to understand why both God and Jesus would ever call humans, gods. God gave us the ability to create, so naturally, God knows that we humans can create, and therefore called us gods. Jesus also knew that humans create, and he felt this fact was important enough to tell the huge crowd of people who gathered at the temple of this great Truth. But how do humans create? How is it possible? Creation is done through the inner processes and workings of the Mind. That part of the human being which I have called the Mind is the key to understanding how we create. The Mind is the part of us which perhaps, more than any other, closely resembles God. The Human Mind is amazing, powerful, endlessly fascinating, and full of wonders. DAYDREAMING Among others, the Mind possesses one truly amazing abilitythe Imagination. In our Minds, during fantasy flights of the imagination, we can do
31
Jason Blanchard
absolutely anything we desire. In our imaginations, we are completely limitless. Anything which we cannot or will not do in the Physical world (for whatever reason) can be accomplished in the imagination. The Mind is capable of creating whatever the heart desires, any experience, any historical period, any story, people, places, and events all within the limitless expanse of the imagination. It is the imagination which allows us to experience the reading of a great novel as though it were real, if only within our Minds. Shakespeares plays, which use language to describe absolutely everything which the audience member cannot see on stage, would be of little entertainment value to us if we did not possess an imagination which creates the incredible stories of the immortal Bard within our Minds. In short, Imagination is a priceless possession of the Mind. And it is all too indispensable to our discussion here. CHANGING THE FREQUENCY Visualize world peace.bumper sticker Visualize whirled peas.bumper sticker Continuing our examination of the Mind, and still with an eye on our Imagination, let us make an analogy. The Imagination is comparable to a radio station, capable of generating frequencies. The biggest difference here is that unlike a typical radio station which only generates and broadcasts one particular frequency, the Mind, with its ability to Imagine, can generate any frequency at all. Remember, we learned earlier that the Mind is Spirit/Energy, and is not limited by space or time. In like fashion, the Imagination is also without limit in regards to its function of creating experiences within the Mind. Since the Mind is not limited, and neither is the Imagination, they can generate absolutely anything within itself. Remember, All is Vibration, all Energy, and all Matter. The Imagination is capable of imagining both the Vibrational opposites of Energy and Matter, and anything in between. The Mind and the Imagination can do this because they generate Vibrations within itself. For example, imagine the color green. The color of green is right in the middle of what is called the Visible Spectrum of Light. It is the central color in a rainbow. Green, just like all other colors of Light (visible and invisible) is a Vibration, and as such, is measured as a frequency. So if you imagine the color green, then, by the Law of Vibration, your Mind, with the power of the Imagination, must be creating the specific Vibrational frequency which is the color green. If you can imagine anything at all, and see it in your minds eye, then it must exist as a newly created form of Energy on the Energetic/Spiritual Plane. The Mind, utilizing the tool of Imagination, creates. Imagine that you wish to change the color. Merely do so with your Imagination and you instantly see it as you wish. Say, for example, you tire of green and you now imagine the color red. The color red is a lower frequency of
32
Light than green. Your Imagination and your Mind now produce the color red, which you can see with the minds eye of your Imagination. You can even make the color brighter or dimmer if you so choose. Or change the color to a florescent orange if you will. The Mind and the Imagination will follow suit and produce the color you desire. This is proof that the Mind and the Imagination can control, change and manipulate Vibration. Combine this proven Truth and the proven Truth that the Mind and the Imagination create. Doesnt this sound like the actions of God, which also creates? Proof #1 that You are gods. Imagination is more important than knowledge.Albert Einstein From the above, it can be seen that the Mind and the Imagination are generators of Vibrations, creators and controllers of all manner of frequency. If we wish to get specific here, we can say that the Imagination selects the frequency to be created, and the Mind, which is already composed of Spirit/Energy, generates the Energy which creates the selected frequency Vibration. The two work together like a team. It is sort of like two electronic technicians on a job, one (Imagination) dials in the desired frequency on his unlimited range channel selector, and the other technician (Mind) applies the power (Energy) to the channel (frequency) selected, in order to generate an Electromagnetic wave (Vibration). Amazing isnt it? The Mind and the Imagination work the same way. The Imagination selects the specific frequency to be created, and passes on this information to the Mind so it can be generated. What is created by the team of the Mind and the Imagination is entirely up to the individual. The range of frequency is limitless. Remember the Law of Vibration which states that the Vibration has no upper or lower limits. This explains why we can Imagine not only high frequency vibrating Light, but also a slowly vibrating Material thing, despite that fact that the Mind itself is not Material or Physical in any way. The realm of the Mind, which is not limited to space and time, can imagine both Spirit/Energy and Physical/Matter. The Mind and the Imagination are without limits in regards to what they can create in the world of thoughts. Thoughts are thingsthe Mind creates. As if this Truth that the Mind creates is not amazing enough, in and of itself, the wonders do not stop here. This creative ability of the Human Mind has an even greater range of power. If we examine the Mind, specifically the Conscious and the Unconscious, along with the practice of hypnosis and related practices, we shall eventually learn that the Mind is not only capable of creating Energy only, but the Mind is also capable of creating Physical change.
33
Jason Blanchard
CONSCIOUS Lets examine the two common distinctions of the Mind, which are referred to as the Conscious Mind and the Unconscious (or subconscious) Mind. First, just a few words on the Conscious Mind. The primary job of the Conscious Mind is to act as a sort of filter or gatekeeper. The Conscious Mind handles and processes incoming information. The Conscious Mind accepts or rejects information, depending on whether or not it finds the information of any worth. The Conscious Mind is a kind of sentry guard to the doors of the Unconscious Mind. If the information is found to be important, then it is allowed access to the Unconscious Mind. If the information is rejected, for whatever reason, then it is halted and not allowed into the Unconscious Mind. That is a prime function of the Conscious Mind. It literally spends all of its days as a sort of traffic cop directing this and that towards or away from the Unconscious Mind. It is always making value judgments in our daily lives. The Conscious Mind is also the part of our Mind which never seems to shut the hell up. I emphasize this fact because everyone has an active mind, with thoughts running to and fro at lightning speed, bouncing from one subject to the other, apparently with no purpose whatsoever. Have you ever noticed how, during the day, your thoughts just seem to run amuck? Sometimes I refer to this as the monkey mind. It seems that the Conscious Mind, with all of its thousands of seemingly random thoughts just never stops this frenzy of activity until one falls asleep. It can drive some people a little crazy sometimes. In any event, just part of what the Conscious Mind does is pass information to the Unconscious Mind to be stored along with all of the other memories of the Unconscious Mind. UNCONSCIOUS Then there is the Unconscious Mind. What an amazing piece of work this is. The list of things which the Unconscious Mind is tasked with is incredible, if not for the number, then for the content. Among some of these functions, the Unconscious Mind is the home of all memory and emotions. It can repress both memories and emotions, if necessary, for years, until we are ready to deal with them. The Unconscious Mind completely takes care of our bodies for us, while we are entirely unaware. Activities such as growth of the body, healing injuries, maintenance of the body, cellular division, digestion, assimilation of nutrients, elimination of toxins, etc. are performed without our conscious awareness. The list goes on and on. The Unconscious takes care of all these and more while we busy ourselves with other things. Just think if you had to tell your body how to digest your food for hours each day!! (better to give up eating) In this respect, the
34
Unconscious is a kind of internal parent. It takes care of everything which we do not take care of ourselves. Quite literally everything that goes on inside us that we are not aware of, is controlled by the Unconscious. The world of modern computer technology is truly incredible. Computers are amazing machines. Besides crunching numbers and making decisions, computers primarily run programs. Simply program a computer to do something which it is capable of doing, and it will do it. So simpleprogram it, and run the program. There is a direct analogy between the Unconscious Mind and our modern computer technology. The computer simply does what it is told to do, following orders like a mindless robot of sorts. Well, guess what? The Unconscious is very much a kind of computer. This Unconscious computer has an unlimited memory bank, capable of storing absolutely anything which is fed into it, be it pictures, sounds, faces, emotions, places, etc. The Unconscious can store it all. The Unconscious can also run programs, just like computers can. The Unconscious never forgets its memories, just as a computer never forgets whats in its memory banks (until the hard drive crashes). But there is a significant difference between a modern computer program and an Unconscious program. This difference is the time it takes to make a program stick in the memory of the Unconscious Mind. If a modern computer is programmed to perform a certain function, the program is stored in the memory and the computer will not forget the program until it is specifically told to do so. Until then, the program can be run again and again with no problem whatsoever. With the Unconscious computer, however, it is little different. While the Unconscious can remember anything, it does not remember a program for a great length of time unless the program is repeated continually or constantly reinforced somehow. In a sense, you must re-program the exact same program again and again before you can be assured that it will remain in the Unconscious memory bank for any huge length of time. For an example of this, imagine a musician who learns how to play one particular song. He will practice and practice the song repeatedly until he is able to play it with very little effort, without thinking about it, as he might say. But, eventually, as time goes by, he stops playing the song altogether, perhaps because the song is no longer popular and his audience no longer wants to hear it. Years may pass without ever playing the old song until, during one concert, he may get a request for that old song which he has not performed for years. It may just so happen that he cannot remember how to play it anymore, and cannot fulfill the request. This happens time and time again to some musicians. The reason for this is due to the characteristics of the Unconscious. Look at the example again. When the musician first learned how to play the song (writing the program), he had to practice it again and again just to remember how to play it. Lets say that he had to program his Unconscious repeatedly before it would finally stick, and he could completely remember
35
Jason Blanchard
how to play the whole song. With that done, it was no problem to keep playing the song since his Unconscious had finally accepted and remembered the program after so much repetition of the same program (practicing the song). In fact, it was very easy to play it with little effort involved. But after many years of not re-running the program (playing the song), the program was slowly forgotten over time. And hence, the musician, after years of never playing the song (repeating the program), now cant even remember how to play it, even though at one time it was so easy that he could perform it unconsciously. The biggest problem with this programming however, is that the Unconscious does not care about the content of the program in its memory. The program can be helpful or harmful. The Unconscious will run whatever program is written into its memory. It is up to the Conscious Mind, the traffic cop, to determine what to allow into the Unconscious Mind. In this way the Conscious Mind can be compared to a computer programmer. If the Conscious Mind is not wary enough, it may allow some harmful information to be allowed access into the Unconscious Mind, and possibly creating a harmful program to be remembered within the Unconscious Mind. If this happens, then the person who is remembering the harmful program may exhibit disturbing or destructive behavior. This is a direct cause of most mental illnessbad programming. Since the time we are born, our Unconscious Minds are being programmed constantly. Various people or events in our environments influence us to such a great extant, that we develop patterns of behavior which are directly a result of our Unconscious programming. We may pick up certain types of helpful or destructive behavior from our parents, siblings, and friends as we grow. These patterns of behavior get reinforced each time it is repeated. Before long, one may find that he is just like my parents in many ways. This occurs because our Conscious Minds, when we are young, are not developed enough to notice when a bad program is trying to make its way into our Unconscious Minds. And so, often the bad program will get past our Conscious Mind and lodge itself into the Unconscious if the program gets reinforced again and again over time. The end result of a life of bad programming? Sometimes it is a visit to a therapist or a psychologist. Sometimes the result is what we call insanity. Sometimes the result is slow self-destruction, or a quick suicide, all because of a bad program which passed our Conscious unchecked. Part of the job of a metal health professional (therapists, psychologists, etc.) is to help their patients to discover the harmful past programming that lies within their Unconscious memory, and help them rewrite the program in order to halt some current unhealthy activity in their lives. It is both fascinating and difficult work for the professional to delve into their patients Unconsciousness and correct and heal past trauma. One tool which a mental health professional can use to help the person discover their Unconscious bad programming is hypnosis. I will not delve into
36
the complex world of mental illness or mental healing here. But this precursory discussion of the Mind was necessary before introducing the next link in our main discussionthat link is the incredible, fascinating and even miraculous world of hypnosis. Stay with me. We will soon discover and prove how the Mind can create Physical change. SUMMARY First, God creates. Humans possess both a Mind and an Imagination. The Imagination is limitless. The Mind, coupled with the Imagination, can generate any frequency of Vibration. The Mind, utilizing the tool of Imagination, creates frequencies of Vibration. The Mind and the Imagination also control Vibration, changing it and manipulating it at will. Thoughts are things. The Mind creates. The Mind can be divided into two main partsthe Conscious and the Unconscious. ###
37
Jason Blanchard
CHAPTER 7 HYPNOSIS
Hypnosis. It is practically impossible to find a definition of hypnosis without running across phrases such as altered state of consciousness and susceptible, or open to suggestion. In fact, most every modern reference text in existence describes hypnosis in exactly such a wayan altered state of consciousness in which the hypnotized subject is susceptible to suggestion. Without getting too technical, hypnosis is not quite a sleepful state, nor is it a state of wakefulness. Hypnosis, as it were, would be somewhere in between being awake and being asleep. While most people have not been hypnotized, most are somewhat familiar with the effects of hypnosis, even if only by rumor. No doubt, most have heard of some of the more comical things hypnotized people do during demonstrations. Some professional hypnotists make a career of entertaining audiences by hypnotizing members of the audience into imagining themselves in all types of crazy situations. Sometimes the hypnotized subject is made to think that he or she is actually standing nude in front of the rest of the audience. Or maybe the subjects will imagine themselves to be dogs, and start barking. I had personally witnessed such hilarious events performed in front of my eyes when a professional hypnotist visited my high school. He selected over a dozen fellow students and began the process of hypnotizing them. The subjects were asked to relax their bodies and breathe deeply and rhythmically. The subjects followed the hypnotists commands, and slowly, over several minutes, each of the subjects were made to, in a sense, put their bodies to sleep, while still remaining mentally alert, listening to the hypnotist. Eventually, they were led into a deep state of hypnosis. Then the fun began. The hypnotist then suggested the subjects do all manner of ridiculous things on stage while the rest of us were falling out of our seats laughing. I remember sitting there amazed as the hypnotist suggested to his subjects that they first imagine they were in a freezing meat locker, and then out in a blazing hot desert. We all laughed as the subjects began shaking violently due to cold chill which only they could feel, and then cheering on the subjects when they next began trying to take off their clothes due to the sudden appearance of an invisible heat. Of course, the hypnotist stopped anyone from completely disrobing in front of the assembly, thrashing our young, lustful hopes for a tantalizing glimpse of forbidden flesh. These demonstrations were absolutely amazing to me. When I spoke to some of these hypnotized students later, they plainly stated that indeed, they really did fully imagine themselves in all of the situations which the hypnotist
38
suggested to them. To them, it all seemed as real as reality, even though they were merely suggested to imagine these things. The incredible power of the state of hypnosis was really revealed when the hypnotist selected a cheerleader and put her into a very deep trance. After doing so, he suggested to her that her muscles would tense with such force that she would think her body to be as strong as steel. Her body became more and more rigid as the hypnotist continually suggested to her to tense harder and harder. Then, with the help of two assistants, they placed the now rigid cheerleaders body across two folding chairs, one under her shoulders, the other under her legs. She remained as straight as a board as this was done. After even further suggestions, the hypnotist then climbed up a third chair and then stood, unaided, on top of the girls body!! Her body did not bend at all, even though she was supporting both her own weight and the weight of the hypnotist across two spaced chairs with nothing but her tense muscles. She really did behave as though she was a rigid steel plate. Needless to say, all of us students in the audience, as we used to say back then, freaked out. Demonstrations like these certainly prove the incredible power of the imagination, and the power of the mind. But exactly how can the mind create such incredible phenomenon? The answer lies in what is perhaps the most amazing and powerful function of the Unconscious Mindthe power to create. YOUR OWN PRIVATE CREATOR In addition to what we have already examined of the Unconscious Mind, there is another characteristic which cannot be overlooked. The Unconscious Mind always listens to what your Conscious Mind is saying. Not only that, but the Unconscious Mind is always following the orders that it is given by your Conscious Mind. In other words, the Unconscious Mind, like a soldier following orders, is always trying to do what you tell it to do. It is always trying to manifest or make real whatever your Conscious Mind says. It is a major function of the Unconscious Mind to create whatever it is told to create. This is perhaps the greatest secret of the Mind, the Unconscious Mind in particular. The Unconscious Mind creates. We have already proven that Human beings possesses a Spark of Divinity, generally called a Soul, or Spirit. This part of the Human being is linked to the Mind, since it is composed of Spirit/Energy. This Spirit/Energy is identical to the Spirit of God. This Spirit we generally call God is the Supreme Creator of the Universe. God creates. Since we, as humans, possess a Spirit identical in essence to God, then, by Law, we must also be able to create. And create, we do. Proof #2 that You are gods. Where is the proof that the Unconscious Mind creates? Well, the proof is constantly there, but few of us ever notice. What we need is an immediate
39
Jason Blanchard
experiment to prove the creative power of the mind. So follow along with the following experiments yourself and prove to yourself that your Unconscious Mind creates. All you need do is just use your Imagination. Completely visualize the following with all of your ability and concentration. First, imagine someone you love very much, a lover, either past or present, or imagine someone you would love to love. Imagine the persons loving face smiling at you. Imagine your lovers eyes staring deep into yours. Imagine your lovers soft voice in your ears. Imagine the lovers hand touching your face. Imagine engaging in a warm embrace, feeling your lovers arms wrap around you, pressing your warm bodies together. Imagine you are now both engaged in a passionate kiss. You may take this involving fantasy to its logical conclusion if you wish, for I am not trying to practice my skills at writing romance novels. But here is the point. Right now, notice how you feel. Are you now in possession of a most amorous sensation all over your body? In other words, are you horny? Are you hot and bothered? If you really used your imagination well, then you are surely feeling something. Well, just where do you suppose the feeling came from? It was not there a moment ago. And now it is all over you. What happened? Your Conscious Mind was occupied with the visualization, the image of being with the lover of your choice for a short time. And your Unconscious Mind listened to what was going on in the Conscious Mind and tried to create the experience itself to such a degree, that you soon experienced the feelings and sensations associated with what you were merely imagining in your Conscious Mind. As stated in the previous chapter, The Mind, utilizing the tool of Imagination, creates. And, as just stated, the Unconscious Mind not only listens to the Conscious Mind, but it also tries to create what is going on in the Conscious Mind. How about another experiment? Lets use our imagination to visualize something really disgusting, like roadkill!! Oh, yeah!! Putrid, fetid, oozing, seeping, rotting mass of smelly, odoriferous decaying guts!! Lumpy pile of slimy worm-infested, creepy crawly carnivorous arthropod devouring, stinking up the highway, smelling to high heaven, dead animal!! Completely visualize this awful, decaying mass of flesh, exposed to the merciless elements both day and night. The once living body is now a mess of barely distinguishable fur, flesh, bones and muscles being slowly consumed by voluminous maggots. The foul mass is surrounded by a swarm of flies, who are constantly feeding on the carcass and laying eggs into the decomposing tissue, which turn into more maggots and flies. Oh, so beautiful, isnt it? Notice how you feel after having imagined such a lovely sight. Are you ready to vomit yet? Feel like heaving? Praying to Ralph? Buying a Buick? Did you puke already? Well, in any event, take notice that just a moment ago, you did not feel like this. But now you may feel ready to blow chunks. Now
40
the Conscious Mind, along with the Imagination, is occupied with certain sickening thoughts, and the Unconscious Mind, as always, is listening, and trying to create the reality so vividly for you that you already react to the sight by getting physically ill. Once again, the Mind, utilizing the tool of Imagination, creates. Remember the analogy of the two technicians, one who tunes in to a particular vibration or frequency, and the other technician whose job it is to create the frequency which is tuned. In the case of the imaginary lover, the Conscious Mind tuned into the experience of being with a desired lover, and the Unconscious Mind created the reality so well within you, that the associated feelings and sensations of being with your favorite lover appeared. In the case of the roadkill, the Conscious mind tuned into the particular experience of an image of a dead, rotting animal, and the Unconscious Mind created that reality within you to such an extant that ill feelings surfaced within you. THE BIG SECRET OF THE UNCONSCIOUS Its not real. Its just in your mind.some idiot But the question remains as to why would you feel turned on by just imagining being with your favorite lover, and why would you feel sick just imagining roadkill? After all, it was just imaginary images. It was not real in the conventional sense. If it was only in your mind, why would any feelings of love or sickness appear for just a fantasy of the imagination? Heres why. The Unconscious Mind does not know the difference between the Imagination and what we call Physical reality. From the perspective of the Unconscious Mind, what we call reality and the Imagination are IDENTICAL. The Unconscious Mind simply does not know that there is a difference between things we experience with our senses and things which exist only in our Imagination. As far as the Unconscious Mind is concerned, they are exactly the same. Remember the hypnotized students I mentioned earlier. When I talked to them about their experiences, they told me that what they were merely imagining through the suggestions of the hypnotist seemed as real as reality. Can you guess why? As just stated above, the Unconscious Mind does not know the difference between what is only a product of Imagination and what we call reality. PLACEBO EFFECT One shining example of the inability of the Unconscious Mind to distinguish reality from imagination is found in the placebo effect. A placebo is used in the medical world. It is a pill containing an inert substance, usually sugar, which is
41
Jason Blanchard
administered to patients in experiments to determine the effects of new drugs. These experiments are called blind tests, because the patients do not know if the pill they have been given was a new experimental drug or a placebo. This is done to observe the effects of the new drug. But placebos are also given, in some cases, to people with incurable diseases, in hopes of inducing the placebo effectan improvement in the patients condition. In placebo tests performed decades ago, over onethird (over 33%) of the patients showed an improvement in their medical condition. Keep in mind that a placebo is nothing but an inert substance, and is not a drug of any kind. As of yet, the medical community has been ineffective in providing an effective explanation as to why the placebo can help any patients at all. The best medical theory offered for the placebo effect is that the patients improvement has been related to the patients faith in a cure, thus affecting the brain into releasing its natural opiate, called endorphins. This theory comes close, but does not quite get a cigar. The secret of the placebo effect lies within the Mind, and its inner workings which we have been examining. Here is how a placebo can have any positive effect on incurable disease. The patient is told that he is taking a drug which will greatly improve his condition (i.e.he is told a lie). This automatically sets up, within the patient the idea that he will get better by taking this mysterious pill. This is what the Conscious Mind thinks. The patient expects to get better, and so the thought of getting well enters the patients Mind at all times of day and night. The patients Conscious Mind will then use the Imagination to visualize being in the state health again. The Unconscious Mind, ever listening to the dialogues of the Conscious Mind, and also trying to create a reality out of our thoughts and Imagination, will soon start to affect the body in such a way that the patient will literally get better, and show a marked medical improvement. As long as the Conscious thoughts of the patient concern the idea of becoming more healthy, then the Unconscious Mind will continue to create the state of wellness which is in the patients Imagination. And thusly, the patient really does achieve some better state of health. Now despite this, one may wonder why is it that the patients Unconscious merely improved the health, instead of curing the incurable disease. That last phrase may not seem to make sensecuring the incurable disease. One may think that since a disease is regarded as incurable, then logically, it cannot be cured. Nothing could be more illogical. Confused? Remember the Law of Opposites. By the Law of Opposites, since the disease exists, there must also exist a cure for the disease. It is just as impossible to have a disease with no possible cure, as it is impossible to have a cure with no disease. In short, every disease has a cure. And the Unconscious Mind, the Spiritual part of the Human, is perfectly capable of curing the incurable. Sound impossible? Too bad. It is a Scientific Truth. For the benefit of the religious minded, even Jesus
42
agrees with this Scientific Truth. If you are interested, check out what Jesus said about what is possible... But with God everything is possible. But possible.Matthew 19:26 Since the Unconscious is also the Spiritual part of the Human, the part which is identical to Gods Spirit, then God is within the Human being. Since God is already within the Human being, then with God (which is within), anything is possible. So, why did our placebo patient fail to realize a cure? All too often, in cases like these, the sick patients Unconscious has been heavily programmed to think that he will never be cured because his doctor has diagnosed an incurable disease, and thus, the patient already thinks a cure is impossible. So, even the placebo effect will only go so far in improving the condition because the patient has already been programmed deeply with the idea that his condition is incurable. Hence, the placebo effect will only help some little, but never effect a total cure because of the pre-existence of a harmful program which says, My disease is incurable. See how it works? The patients Unconscious Mind was told previously that the he had an incurable disease. He constantly thought about this day and night, reinforcing the program continually. And so the Unconscious Mind created that realitythe inability to cure an incurable disease. And thus, the placebo only helps, but does not cure. A DIFFERENT KIND OF MEDICINE Despite this, there have been, and continues to be, more and more people who have cured diseases which have been labeled incurable. We rarely hear of these occurrences in the media, but these cures do happen. Over the years, I have stumbled across a small number of cases in which people stricken with diseases such as cancer or AIDS, have successfully beaten the diseases and cured themselves by their own efforts. The major part of the curing process always involved some dynamic change in the lives of the patients. This usually consisted of altering a previously unhealthy lifestyle, and utilizing some kind of alternative treatments like the consumption of purely natural foods, herbs, and, more often than anything else, the use of some kind of Energetic or Spiritual tool to effect the healing, tools such as hypnosis, or meditation. In recent times, one well known actor, who was diagnosed with cancer, described on a national television talk show how every day during meditation, he would intensely imagine and visualize a golden colored healing light swirling through his body, healing him of his cancer. And it worked. He cured himself of cancer, one of the worst killer diseases in our modern society. He knows
43
Jason Blanchard
that he effected this cure himself, with his Mind, his Imagination, and his firm conviction that, indeed, he was defeating the disease. In this case, the actors Unconscious Mind created the reality of already being healed. And thusly, the actor healed himself of cancer. Now thats quite an act!! CONCRETE, PHYSICAL CHANGE Effecting a miracle cure of a disease by the utilization of the Imagination and the Mind is incredible, to be sure. But we must not overlook something here. Please note that in the case of the actor curing his own cancer, the actors Mind effected a Physical change. This cannot be ignored at all. In the previous chapter, we showed how the Mind and the Imagination can generate high frequencies of Energy, which are visible to the Imagination. But here, however, we have proof that the Mind and the Imagination can cause Physical change. Now we have proof that the Spiritual/Energetical part of the Human can also generate slower frequency Vibrations, those of the Physical or Material world. The Human being is capable, when utilizing the Mind and the Imagination, of changing and controlling the Vibration, which is God. This is not surprising, since the Vibration is not only All there Is, but Vibration is also what we Humans are composed of, both Body and Spirit. SUMMARY Hypnosis is an altered state of consciousness in which the hypnotized subject is susceptible to suggestion. Humans, owning a Spirit like that of the Spirit of God, possess the ability to create, just as God creates. The Unconscious Mind creates. The Unconscious Mind always listens to what the Conscious Mind is saying. The Unconscious Mind is always following the orders that it is given by the Conscious Mind. The Unconscious Mind will create whatever it is told to create. The Mind, utilizing the tool of Imagination, creates. The Unconscious Mind does not know the difference between the Imagination and what we call Physical reality. From the perspective of the Unconscious Mind, both experiences we call reality and the Imagination are IDENTICAL. The utilization of the Mind and the Imagination can cause Physical change. ###
44
CHAPTER 8 MEDITATION & HYPNOSIS

I introduced something new in the last chaptermeditation. Meditation is of the utmost importance to our discussion here, and it is time to learn about it. Before beginning an exposition on Meditation, one important point must be made here and now. Since there is a part of God within us all, a Spiritual spark of Divinity, then does it not make sense that because the Human possesses this part of God, it would make perfect sense for both God and Jesus to call mere Humans, gods? Think about it. If we each have our own little part of the big God within us, then are we not, in a sense, little gods? Proof #3 that You are gods. FROM PERSONAL EXPERIENCE What comes to mind when thinking of Meditation? Most people instantly think of someone sitting crosslegged on the floor for great lengths of time, attempting to commune with God and Spirit. Well,...who am I to argue with the Truth? Lets examine the Science of Meditation. Meditation is really a simple thing, once it is understood. Meditation is definitely a Science, and it can be fully explained scientifically, in all its aspects, uses, and effects. It is a Science which has not been generally accepted by mainstream science. But this non-acceptance occurs with every new branch of Science anyway. Even the fascinating multi-disciplined science of archaeology was considered nothing more than a rich mans hobby just a hundred years ago. Today, it is one of the most respected and valuable of fields. I personally found archaeology so fascinating, that I once considered it as a career. In any case, only recently has some of the scientific community started to study and research the Science of Meditation and anything related to it. And their research is revealing things completely unexpected, and to some scientists, unexplainable. This comes as no surprise to me, for I know that Mediation is a way to both study and experience Spirit, and the function of Spirit within us. After years of meditation and studying some of the various ways and methods in which it can be employed, I have proven to myself that Meditation is, among other things, an excellent way to study, know, and understand the Spirit within me. This Spirit, of course, is the Spirit of God, which is in all of us. If one wants to Truly begin to understand God, then there is no better place to start than within. Let me explain what is meant by this.
45
Jason Blanchard
KNOW THYSELF Meditation is, perhaps above all else, a Tool. It is not so much a Physical tool, but rather, meditation is a Scientific method which is applied within the Mind. It is a special tool which is utilized within the Spiritual realm. Meditation is the primary tool which the Spiritual Scientist uses to examine the Vibration, which is God. Since the Spirit of God is present within the Human (which we have proven before), then by examining and exploring all of the various frequencies of the Vibration which are within the Spiritual part of the Human, the Spiritual Scientist can come to know God personally without ever having to look outside of himself. This notion of looking within oneself to discover God is nothing new. Dont make the mistake of thinking this is some new type of fad which will disappear in time. The concept of searching for God inside of oneself is ancient, and it is Truth. As a friend of mine is fond of saying, There is nothing new, except that which has been forgotten. Every Human possesses a Spirit which is within. This Spirit is identical to the Spirit of God. If one wishes to search for God, then he/she does not need to look very far, and certainly there is no need to look outside of oneselfGod is within. There is an old Spiritual axiom which says that if you want to know God, then first, you must Know Thyself. It is unnecessary to look outside of yourself in your attempt to know, understand and comprehend anything about God. In Truth, from a Scientific perspective, searching for God outside of oneself is downright inefficient. All you need do is look within. ...And meditation is a perfect way, and the most efficient way to look within oneself, and explore the God-given Spirit you possess. THE PROCESS Sit Still. Stop thinking. Shut up. Get out!instructions for Yoga meditation by the Victorian era English occultist, Aleister Crowley Sit down. Sit still. Shut up. Go away.the famous Indian Yogi Paramahansa Yogananda quotes the same clever Englishman I refer to Meditation as a Science because there is a definite scientific method to meditation which becomes apparent when one studies meditation for some time. The Science of Yoga, which is perhaps the greatest gift India has ever given the world, is an extremely vast science, to say the least. Sometimes, when I examine the Science of Yoga, I realize that, from one perspective, it is a very detailed system which explains seemingly every single detail of both the Human body and the Spiritual world. I also see the Science of Yoga as a Spiritual system with near endless ways to meditate, and near endless things to discover
46
utilizing meditation. There are so many methods which can be used in the search for God, that it is almost ridiculous. But for our purposes here, we can understand Meditation if we approach it and explain it in the simplest way. In a typical meditation, the body is, in a sense, put to sleep, while the meditators Mind is kept awake. The meditator will assume an asana, which means sitting or lying in a particular posture which will allow the body to rest and remain still during the meditation. Usually, just sitting cross-legged on a small pillow will suffice. Also the meditator will keep the spine straight, but without tensing the back muscles, which would not allow the body to relax during the meditation. After getting comfortable in a desirable position, the meditator will then begin the process of relaxation, usually by breathing very deeply and slowly, all the while keeping the body still and relaxed. After some minutes of this, the attentive meditator will notice that her body is not only motionless, but she may notice that her body feels like it is practically not there anymore. There will be a significant reduction of the normal awareness of her own body, as if the brain is not paying attention to the body anymore. This ignoring of the body is a normal occurrence during mediation. Since the meditator is trying to completely relax the body, the Mind makes this so, following orders as it always does. And so, our meditator begins to notice that her attention is becoming less and less associated with her body as her body relaxes more and more. Soon, our meditator will cease to even notice her body at all as she enters an even deeper state of meditation. Her attention will completely internalize. She will not pay attention to anything outside of herself anymore. Her sole focus will be within from now on. This is the desirable meditative state which every meditator desiresan altered state of consciousness in which all attention is focused on the inward reality. In this deep, altered state of consciousness, the meditator has direct access to the Inner plane of MindUnconscious SpiritGod. There is a little known instruction for meditation hidden away in the Bible of all places. Psalm 46:10 actually gives the simplest instruction one can possibly give for meditationBe silent, and know that I am God. In older translations, the verse states to Be still. Either way the meaning is very simple. As stated earlier, Sit down. Sit still. Shut up. Go away. Focus your attention on relaxing and calming yourself and then you will know God to be within you. At the beginning of this chapter, I stated that most people think meditation involves sitting cross-legged on the floor and attempting to commune with God. In essence, this is the Truth. If you ask people who meditate, they will often tell you that the reasons they meditate are to quiet the Mind, to center themselves, to contact Spirit, to learn about Spirit, to talk to God, to understand God, etc. All of this is Scientifically accurate. Considering all we have learned and covered so far, this should make sense to the reader.
47
Jason Blanchard
We have already proven that the Spirit is within the Human being. The Spirit which is within the Human being is identical to the Spirit of God. Since these two Spirits are essentially the same, then the frequency of these Spirits Vibration are also identical. And since the frequency is the same, then it is Scientifically possible to contact and communicate with the Spirit of God through the use of the Inner Spirit of the Human. This type of communication is possible because of the principles of radio communication. Two-way radios must be tuned to the same frequency in order to communicate with each other. And so it is with the Spiritual plane as well. If the frequency is tuned right, then communication is possible. And just how do we do such a thing? How do we directly access the Spiritual, Inner plane? In order to access the Spiritual, which is analogous to the Unconscious Mind, we must become, in a sense, unconscious, without losing waking consciousness. This is not as strange as it sounds. In fact, we have already examined two ways in which this can be done. Any guesses? Hypnosis and Meditation. Remember, both Hypnosis and Meditation were each described in similar fashion, as putting the body to sleep while keeping the Mind alert and awake. How else could a hypnotized subject even listen to suggestions while asleep? How else could the meditator even attempt to access Spirit while asleep? During the altered state of consciousness, which is achieved in both Hypnosis and Meditation, the individual has direct access to Unconscious SpiritGod. From this Truth, one could deduce that Hypnosis and Meditation are very much related. In my experience, I have found that they are two different names for one and the same thing. What makes this so? How is this possible? The answer lies in the phenomenon of Brain Waves. WAVY BRAINS Brain Waves are literally what the name impliesa cyclic wave action within the brain. Specifically, the waves we are concerned with are electrical in nature. In other words, Brain Waves are frequencies of electrical Vibrations which occur in the brain. And here we have Vibrations again. As stated in the first chapter, All is Vibration. Brain Waves, being Vibrations, are categorized according to their (what else?) frequency. Brain waves have been used in sleep research for years to help study the sleep process. This particular field of study has helped sleep researchers both learn of, and identify, the various stages of sleep, by the particular brain wave frequency of each stage. In rare scientific studies, brain waves have been measured during both Hypnosis and Meditation. The brain wave frequencies of both deep hypnosis and of deep meditation are the same frequencies. The altered state of consciousness which is achievable in both
48
hypnosis and meditation are one and the same experience, because they both exhibit the same brain wave frequencies. The Truth that Hypnosis and Meditation are, in essence, the same comes as no surprise when one examines just the method used to achieve the altered state of consciousness. In each process, there are similarities. First the subject begins to relax the body. This is easily achieved with some deep, rhythmic breathing. As this continues, the subject will notice that the body is becoming more and more relaxed. The body will relax so much that it will appear as if the body is not there, as far as the subjects awareness is concerned. The body will behave as if it is asleep. The subject continues to progress closer and closer towards the altered state of consciousness, in which there is direct access to the Spirit/Unconscious part of the Human. What is achieved is essentially the same in either case. Whether or not the subject will be guided into meditation or hypnosis, or accomplish it on their own with no coaching makes no difference at all. What is different is primarily the name. The end result is always the altered state of consciousness. The subjects attention will always be focused inward in either case. The subject will always be working with, communicating with, contacting, or just accessing the Inner Reality which is within each of us. The Brain Wave frequencies involved in each case are the same. And now for the frequencies involved. With brain waves, the greater the number of the frequency, the more awake, alert and conscious you are, whereas a low numbered frequency corresponds to the altered state which we have been discussing. In order of decreasing wakefulness, the names of the different waves are as followsBeta, Alpha, Theta, and Delta. Beta waves, the waves of waking, alert consciousness, are the highest, and begin at 13 cycles per second, extending upwards into faster frequencies. Alpha waves range from 8 to 12 cycles per second. The lower Theta waves range from 7 to 3 cycles per second. The lowest, Delta, extend from about 3 cycles per second on downward into lower number frequencies, even frequencies which are less than 1 cycle per second. This particular wave, the Delta wave is the very deep state we have been discussing for so long now. Something else concerning these waves which is of importance to our discussion is the subject of the voltage involved with each wave. Electricity is measured with both volts and amps. If we were talking about water coming out of a garden hose, we say that there is a certain amount of water, called volume, which is being pushed out of the hose with a certain amount of force, which we call pressure. Measuring Electricity is similar. The voltage is the amount of electrical potential (the amount or volume of water), and the amp is the intensity (the force or pressure) of the electrical current. In the case of our various Brain Wave frequencies, the voltage of waking consciousness, Beta waves, is very low. As we descend into the slower waves of consciousness, from Beta down through Alpha, Theta, and Delta, the voltage
49
Jason Blanchard
increases. When we reach the Delta, we have the highest voltage associated with each cycle of the frequency. In other words, when in a Beta state of waking, alert consciousness, whatever electrical activity is present within the brain is of a low voltage. But when in a deep Delta wave state of either Hypnosis or Meditation, the electrical activity in the brain is of a much higher voltage. What is going on here? What exactly is this electrical activity within us? Why is there so much more voltage when we are in an altered state of consciousness, while we are in touch with our Spirit/Unconscious? Can you guess before you read the following answer? Once again, we are dealing with the Energetical/Spiritual part of the Human being which is within all of us. Look at it logically. If we are using a method or process (either Hypnosis or Meditation) to gain access to our Spirit, which is the Energetical part of the Human, then it logically follows that once we have efficient access to that Energetical part of us, then we also have efficient access to the Energy which composes that very Energetical/Spiritual part of us. Think about it. Remember that the Spirit or Soul is composed of Energy (which is Vibration). When we contact the Spirit in Hypnosis or Meditation, we are concerned with Energy of the Mind/Spirit/Unconscious only, since the Body, which is Physical, is being, in a sense, ignored. We are dealing solely with Energy. This Energy of the Mind/Spirit manifests itself within the brain as Electricity. Electricity is Energy after all. During deep altered states, there is a greater amount of voltage within the brain than in waking, alert consciousness. This increase in Energetic voltage activity is a direct result of gaining efficient access to the Energetic part of us. This is direct proof that during altered states of consciousness, we are definitely in touch with something within us, which is Energetical in naturethe Human Spirit, the part of us which is like the Spirit of God. Proof #4 that You are gods. You may have noticed that I used the word efficient in this chapter a few times. This is a careful choice of words. When I say that Meditation is an efficient way to access or get in direct contact with Spirit, this is not to say that there is no Spiritual activity during waking consciousness. Quite the contrary. Note that the electrical activity, specifically the Voltage during waking consciousness is still there in small amounts. The voltage does not disappear during waking consciousness, it just diminishes some. This means that during the waking hours of the day, your Spirit is still functioning within you, but you are not communing with it such an intimate fashion as you would if you were meditating. Remember from an earlier chapter that the Unconscious is the part of you which takes care of everything you are not aware of. This means that the Spirit/Unconscious is active within you even when you dont notice it. The constant electrical activity within your brain is proof of this. If there is no electrical activity in the brain, this indicates the absence of Spirit, and hence the person concerned is dead. Even legal cases have used the
50
absence of these brain waves as evidence of death when the concerned person is in a coma, and no other evidence of death can be ascertained. No brain waves equals no Spirit in the body which equals no Life, which means Death. Death will be dealt with in another chapter. Considering all that has been discussed so far, certain questions may arise concerning Meditation. What happens if one communes with God, the Inner Spirit, for any great length of time? What is the result, if any, of consistent Meditation and communing with Spirit on a daily basis? What is the effect on the Unconscious if one repeatedly Meditates, in effect, programming the Unconscious every day? What is the result of exposing oneself to these Vibrations of the Inner Spirit? The fascinating answers to these questions are precisely what we shall examine in the next chapter. SUMMARY The best way to understand God is to contact the Spirit within us. Since Spirit is within, and since this Spirit is identical to the Spirit of God, there is no better way to personally know God than by going within. Meditation is a perfect method, and the most efficient way to go within, and explore your God given Spirit. The altered state of consciousness which is achieved in Hypnosis and Meditation are the same. It is a result of slow frequency Brain Waves, which are identical in both Hypnosis and Meditation. Therefore, Hypnosis and Meditation are essentially just two different names for the same thing. Communication with God/Spirit is possible because the Human being possesses a Spirit which is like the Spirit of God. The most efficient way to do this is to enter an altered state of consciousness, which can be done in Meditation. ###
51
Jason Blanchard
CHAPTER 9 EFFECTS OF MEDITATION

A SHORT NOTE In this chapter, and others, I may not always seem to speak in the pure scientific fashion I have used thus far. Much of what I say in this chapter and others may seem more mystical than Scientific. But, what I say is still Scientific Spiritual Truth nonetheless, and all of it can be proven in a Scientific way, but it is only provable to the individual, by his own efforts. When I speak of the effects of Meditation, and of the supreme end result of one who unites with Spirit during Meditation regularly, I am speaking from my own personal experience, and from the experiences of those who came before me. None of what you are going to read here is new. Much of it may sound high-minded, even holy, in a sense, but it is attainable by all Human beings who put forth the effort to prove it to themselves. And therein lies the point which must be remembered, especially with this chapter. The reader who thinks that what he/she reads here is outrageous, impossible, or fantasy must ultimately realize that some things in life can only be proven to the individual who makes the concerned effort to find out for him/herself by personal experience. In the field of Spirituality (as with any field), little can be gained by theory alone. There must be application, or else the theory is practically useless. If the reader wants proof for what was written so far, or what will be written in the rest of the book, then the reader must make the effort to find out personally for him/herself. To put it bluntly, get off your dead ass and on your dying feet! If you want proof, then be your own personal laboratory, and experiment with your own Self, with your own Spirit. You have nothing to lose, and Everything to gain. WHATS IN IT FOR ME? So, we have proven that the Inner Godly Spirit of the Human being can be reached in a very effective and efficient way utilizing the tool of Meditation. One may ask, But what can be gained from contacting my Spirit?. Truly, what can be gained from communing with God, with Spirit, is much more than one may be inclined to think is even possible. Since we are dealing with Vibrations here, and since All is Vibration, then by contacting Spirit through Meditation, one can gain Everythingliterally. Limitless possibilities arise from a close union with God through Meditation. Everything can be explored. Everything can be learned. Everything can be understood. Everything can be comprehended.
52
Everything can be experienced. Everything can be gained. Anything one can imagine can be realized with Spirit, with God. The greatest thing to be gained from any kind of union with God is, God of course!! And what is God? God isnay, God?Sri Yukteswar, in Autobiography of a Yogi I know I am speaking in a non-scientific way, and using grandiose language here, and I really dont wish to confuse the reader. But the above statements are Truths which I have learned from my years of studying Spirit, practicing Meditation and uniting with my own Spirit through Meditation. The statements are generalizations, to be sure. To make a list of everything which can be gained from union with God is, without exaggeration, impossible. I am forced to make generalizations. In the end, God is what can be gained from a union with God. After all, what more is there? What better generalization can I possibly offer, than to say that if you unite with God, then God is what you gain. Though I had already studied Spirituality for some years, learning about it in theory, my own personal relationship with my Inner Spirit began the very moment I decided to meditate for the first time. As mentioned in the first autobiographical chapter, that first experience changed me forever. I still remember the feeling which lasted for three days, of being happy for no particular reason. Nothing in my life had ever affected me that way. Back then, I was hardly able to explain what had really happened to me. I just knew that a short meditation one night produced profound, unexplainable happiness for three wonderful, unforgettable days. But now, knowing what I know of Meditation and its effects on the Spirit or Soul, the Mind, the emotions and the physiology of the body, I can explain to myself the effects of Meditation in a Scientific way (what else could satisfy me?). The secret to understanding the effects of Meditation is in the definition of Meditation itself. As I would define it, from years of experience, Meditation is a tool above all else. As mentioned in the previous chapter, this particular tool is not a Physical tool, but is one which is applied within the Inner world of the Mind, of the Spirit. The tool of Meditation is specifically designed to help enter the Inner Spiritual world to explore and investigate the Vibration. And remember that the Vibration exists literally Everywhere and is in Everything, including the Human being. Meditation is a scientific tool which is used to investigate and explore the Vibration, which is God. Meditation is communing with the Vibe of God. In Truth, Meditation is a union. In fact, the word Yoga actually means union. The ancient Science of Yoga is actually the Science of UnionUnion with Spirit, with God. Amazing isnt it? During all of those years of searching for answers to my questions about Spiritual matters, there already existed a Spiritual Science waiting for me to find it. And if you remember the
53
Jason Blanchard
autobiography, Yoga literally found me, in the form of a magazine which I did not order. Well, as they say, God works in mysterious ways. WHAT IS ENLIGHTENMENT? This is your brain. This is your brain on God,...any questions? God Meditation is a Scientific process to unite with God in a very effective and personal way. Uniting with God, with ones Inner Spirit in this direct manner has its effects on the individual. Being something of an extremist, it is not so unusual for me to explore things to their limits. When I learned of and practiced Meditation, Yoga, and various other Spiritual practices, and experienced the wonderful effects it had on my life, I naturally wanted to know exactly what was the ultimate purpose to all of this. What would be the end result if I immersed myself in Spirituality, practiced Yoga meditation, plus any other methods of meditation, on a continual basis? What would happen if I, or anyone else, would make Meditation, uniting with Spirit, etc., a habitual part of life, even a major part of life? What would be the supreme effect, the end result of all of this communing with God? The answer, I learned, has owned a multitude of different names in different cultures in different times. Nirvana, Illumination, Bliss, Nothingness, Quintessence, Perfection. Perhaps the most common name for this end result of pursuing Spirituality and uniting with God is Enlightenment. What is Enlightenment? Just look at the word itself. En-light-en-ment. The key word within the word is Light. To lighten means to illuminate, to shed light onto something. Now the prefix en refers to something within. To enlighten means to illuminate or educate within, or from within. Combine enlighten and the suffix ment, and you get the following meaning. Enlightenment is a state of being, or a state of consciousness in which you have received Spiritual illumination, instruction, and education from within. To be Enlightened is to come into possession of a special kind of education, which comes from within. It is a Spiritual education, a Spiritual learning, which we are concerned with here. And this Spiritual education, this Inner Illumination, comes from within. Notice again the key word in EnlightenmentLight. What is Light? Light is a form of Energy. And Energy is just one polar manifestation of (all together now) Vibration. So, Light is Vibration. And this Vibration is the omnipresent manifestation of the Universal Spirit, or God. And this means? Light is of God. Since Enlightenment refers to an inner lightening, then Enlightenment means to receive an education from the Inner Spirit, from God. Wow!! Well now, how can we receive an education from the Inner Spirit? Well, it would help if we could contact it in some way. And we have already discussed two ways to contact the Inner SpiritHypnosis and Meditation. (For brevitys sake, I shall only speak of Meditation from here on.) Put this all together so far,
54
and we arrive at the conclusion that Meditation, the Scientific method of effectively communing with the Inner Spirit, is also the way to Enlighten oneself with Everything your God-given Spirit has to offer. Remember, I stated before that Everything could be gained from a union with God. WHAT CAN BE GAINED? So, what exactly is the state of Enlightenment, Illumination, Nirvana, etc.? What is it like to live in that state of mind? What does it mean to be Spiritually Illuminated, to have the Knowledge of God? Well, let me just say right here and now, that the indisputably best way to know what Enlightenment is, is to experience it for yourself. When I think about it now, I think it is more difficult to explain something like Enlightenment, than it is to actually accomplish the thing itself. How does one explain a certain thing to someone who has no clue what that thing is? Describe a rainbow to a blind man, will you? Describe music to a deaf man? How do you really describe the taste of salt? These things must be experienced in order to really know them. Describe God to one who is ignorant of God? Do you understand the difficulty? Personally, I like to speak of Enlightenment as Spiritual Perfection. I think the word enlightenment has been so overused within some circles in our modern times, that it has lost its meaning to the general public, if it had any meaning to begin with. Most people have no idea what Enlightenment really refers to. Most people dont even have a clue that Enlightenment really refers to anything Spiritual. But it does. Perhaps that is why I like to use the terms Spiritual Perfection. What I have come to learn during my years of studying and practicing Spirituality is precisely what all of the most ancient Spiritual teachings declare is the Truth. And this is that the Human being is the microcosm within the macrocosm. The means that the Human being is the smaller universe living within a much bigger, identical universe. The tiny Universe, which is the Human being, reflects the bigger Universe, which is God. For the religious minded, remember the Bible states that Humans are created in the image of God. Notice the similarity? If we are created in the image of God, then we must reflect God in some waya microcosm within the macrocosm. Here, the Bible merely repeats an ancient Spiritual Truth. Another ancient Spiritual axiom states, That which is above is like that which is below. That which is below is like that which is above. Sometimes this is shortened to read, As above, so below. As below, so above. Once again, this has the same basic meaning as the first saying. What is seen in the big world is also seen in the small world. For example, on a large scale, we see planets flying in orbit around stars. On the incredibly small atomic scale, we see electrons flying in orbit around the nucleus of the atom. A high C on a piano is the same
55
Jason Blanchard
note as a low C, just a different octave, but they are the same note in essence. As above, so below. This is a Spiritual Law that is evident to one who looks for it. The point of this is that the Human being reflects God within him/her-self. This statement is easy to understand. We have already proven the existence of the Spirit within the Human being, and this Human Spirit is identical, in essence, to the Spirit of God. If one reflects God, then it is easy to see why one would be called enlightened, since they reflect the Light of Spirit of God within themselves. Meditation is an unequaled way to begin to reflect Gods Spirit from within yourself. Taking even a casual look at the state of the world today, it is evident that few people are reflecting the Spirit of God within themselves. It is not exaggeration to state that if more people were busy communing with the Inner Spirit, then the world would definitely be a much better place to live. The Truth is, if everyone on the planet would just spend even five lousy minutes a day contacting their Inner Spirits through Meditation, the entire world would change for the better so rapidly, it would make our collective heads spin. The ancient dream of Utopia would literally be so close, we could feel it. MEDITATION...IN THE BIBLE?? I was immensely surprised to find the very word meditation in the Bible. During my entire life, I have never heard anyone who claims the Bible as their guide even mention Meditation as a Spiritual tool. In fact, the mere idea of meditating has always been treated with both ignorance and disrespect by every religious person I have ever known. Nevertheless, a few of the scriptures actually use the word meditation several times. Solely for the benefit of those religious minded readers who might think unfavorably of Meditation, please consider these Bible verses from Psalms with my own emphasis added. 27:4The one thing I ask of the LORDthe thing I seek mostis to live in the house of the LORD all the days of my life, delighting in the LORDs perfections and meditating in his Temple. 48:9O god, we meditate on your unfailing love as we worship in your Temple. 63:6I lie awake thinking of you, meditating on you through the night. 119:23Even princes sit and speak against me, but I will meditate on your principles. 119:27Help me understand the meaning of your commandments, and I will mediate on your wonderful miracles.
56
119:48I honor and love your commands. I meditate on your principles. And again in the 52nd verse: I meditate on your age-old laws; O LORD, they comfort me. And again in verse 117: Sustain me, and I will be saved; then I will meditate on your principles continually. Even Joshua is told to meditate in the opening chapter of his book in the Old TestamentStudy this Book of the Law continually. Meditate on it day and night so you may be sure to obey all that is written in it. Only then will you succeed. REAL SPECIAL EFFECTS Communing with God, with Spirit, directly through the use of Meditation will transform one in many ways. This is to be expected. It is a fact of Life that whatever company you keep will influence you somehow. If you constantly spend time with criminals, you will be influenced by them, and quite possibly become a criminal one day. Conversely, if you spend plenty of time in the company of the Vibrations of the Spirit of God by meditating, then one day you will inevitably become more godly in one way or another. This is precisely what happens to one who begins meditating. Dont be fooled. Uniting with the Inner Spirit of God has its effects on the individual. Remember my first encounter? Just 15 minutes in the presence of my own Spirit and I felt so happy and joyous that I could not wipe the freaking smile off my face for three days. Most people cant even generate such long lasting profound happiness with an entire night of great sex. I understand now what I did not know then. Among other things, one of the overwhelming qualities of God is Joy. Uniting with God is uniting with Joy, so obviously, the experience is Joyous. What I had tapped into that night left me feeling great Joy for three days. It was the first time I experienced such Joy, and it was not the last. (I have devoted an entire future chapter to this Joy of God which effortlessly permeated my whole being for one fantastic weekend.) What happened to me during those three days after my first meditation was simply an after effect of only a few minutes of meditation. And what an after effect it was. Are there other effects of Union with Spirit? Yes. More than can be counted, much less imagined. But rather than attempt to list any of them, I have to generalize here, so I can make the point and move on with the purpose of the book. In general, I would have to say that the principle effects of communing with God, of uniting with ones Inner Spirit is that, slowly and steadily, with continued contact through Meditation, the Human being slowly refines his/her character, dispels every negative aspect of their personality, adopts more and more, all of the finer qualities of God/Spirit, and in time, begins to perfect his/her
57
Jason Blanchard
Spirit to such a degree that he/she perfectly reflects God through the Inner Spirit. In short, the Human being slowly reaches the Enlightened state, a perfected Spiritual state, and is filled with the Light of God, which shows in their Inner Spirit. In the process of this striving for God within, all manner of effects may occur in the individual. As I mentioned in the autobiographical chapter, there were some physical effects, such as an improvement of health, stabilization of emotions, an end to my occasional depressions, and even unintended weight loss. But there were also some unexpected effects which some would probably describe as extrasensory, metaphysical, etc. Among these are Intuition, which I define as an ability to know things that I would not know by ordinary means. Other effects include occasional glimpses of the future, and the ability to literally converse directly with God and my Spirit Guide, from which I can get information or guidance when I need it. If the reader thinks these abilities sound like some kind of psychic powers, then so be it. The name given to the abilities does not matter much to me. In this country, the word psychic is greeted with ridicule and distrust, thanks in part to the proliferation of psychic phone lines, fortune telling, etc., some of which have been run by pretenders who are only out to make a buck. Not everyone who performs these services is a fake. But in the eyes of the public, it only takes one phony psychic captured in the act, to give every other genuine psychic a bad reputation, regardless of the reality of their various abilities. Many people are born with these Spiritual powers and use them to help people. Call it psychic powers if you willthese Spiritual abilities and powers are all too real for those who have them, regardless of what you call it. In the Science of Yoga, these powers and abilities of the Spirit are called Siddhis. These Siddhis are powers and abilities granted by the Spirit of God to the one who is seeking God within him/herself. To understand why these powers and abilities are even granted in the first place, it should be remembered that the one who seeks to contact God daily through Meditation will gradually resemble God more and more with the use of Meditation. It is only natural that as one approaches the Perfection of the Spirit through union with God, then the powers and abilities of the Universal Spirit of God would appear within the Spirit of the Human being. It is a by-product of sorts, and those who dedicate their lives to steadily Enlightening their Inner Spirit with the Light of God naturally develop the powers and abilities of God. AH, LOVE... The most incredible effect of Union with Spirit is Love. With continued and extensive Meditation or union with the Inner Spirit of God, the Human comes to
58
learn more and more of the principle quality of GodLove. All of the greatest Spiritual philosophies and teachings of all time agree with this Truth. God is, if nothing else, Love itself. It is obvious that Humans are capable of Love. This is no surprise at all. Since the Human reflects God within, then naturally, the quality of Love must also be found in God (As above, so below. As below, so above.). God is within the Human. God is Love. Humans Love. Humans are Love. In meditation, the Human comes into very close contact with his/her Inner Spirit, with God. The meditator is exposed to the Vibrations of God during Meditation. Included with this exposure is the Vibration of Love. In Meditation, the Human unites with Spirit, God, and Love. What is the long term effect of long daily exposures to these grand Vibrations? What happens to the Human being who meditates for a certain time each day, on a continual basis? Let us remember the workings of the Unconscious Mind. Remember that the Unconscious Mind can be programmed over time with repeated programming sessions. Put one and one together. Remember that the Unconscious Mind, the creator within, is being utilized during Meditation. If one meditates daily and unites with Spirit, repeatedly exposing the Unconscious Mind to Spirit, God, and Love, then over time, the Unconscious Mind will soon make Spirit, God, and Love a part of the meditator. The Unconscious Mind will remember this program because of constant programming (meditating). The meditators Unconscious Mind will soon create that which he/she is programming through meditation. In other words, the meditator will become more and more like what he/she is exposing him/herself toSpirit, God, and Love. These characteristics are precisely what the meditator will begin to embody within. With repeated union and contact with the Inner Spirit of God, the Human being will reflect Spirit, God, and LOVE from within. And right here, we must break for a new chapter to examine Love and Emotions. When the Emotion of Love is combined with the powers of the Mind, it will finally be seen how anyone can perform miracles. SUMMARY Everything can be gained by union with the Inner Spirit of God. If you unite with God, then God is what you gain. Meditation is a union with God. Enlightenment is the end result of daily Meditative Union with the Inner Spirit of God. Enlightenment means to be Illuminated, Spiritually educated from within. This education comes from the Inner Spirit, from God. As above, so below. The Human being is the microcosm within the macrocosm. The Human being reflects God within. Meditation is a wonderful way to reflect Gods Spirit from within.
59
Jason Blanchard
Uniting with the Inner Spirit of God has its effects. These effects are incredibly numerous. The principle effect of Union with God is to become Enlightened, to perfect the Spirit of the individual, to be filled with the Light of God. Those who dedicate their lives to steadily Enlightening their Inner Spirit with the Light of God naturally develop the powers and abilities of God. In Meditation, the Human unites with Spirit, God, and Love. By daily Meditation, the meditator exposes his Unconscious Mind to Spirit, God, and Love. By repeated meditation, the Unconscious Mind creates the reality of Spirit, God, and Love within. By this, the Human being will reflect Spirit, God, and Love within. ###
60
CHAPTER 10 LOVE & EMOTION

Ah, Love!! It is not so far fetched to say that Love is the most popular subject in all of history. And so it should be, I suppose. After all, Love is the Ultimate that we humans can strive for. Love is, whether we know it or not, what we are all looking for. We all want Love, every one of us. So many of us think we know what Love is, but precious few of us really do. If more of us really knew what Love really is, the world would be a vastly different place. The fact is, most of us have no idea of the True nature of Love. Love has been truly difficult for us to comprehend, thanks to the continued perpetuance of a Loveless world in which all of us have been raised. We have formulated our ideas of what Love is from being raised in our mostly dysfunctional families in mostly dysfunctional environments in a mostly dysfunctional world. And hence, most of us are mostly dysfunctional ourselves, leading mostly dysfunctional lives in a mostly dysfunctional world filled mostly, with even more mostly dysfunctional people also leading mostly dysfunctional lives. Ridiculous, isnt it? Such is the effect of a lack of Love. How to remedy this sad situation? Well, Duh!!...With Love of course!! Anyone can learn about Love, experience Love, feel Love, and live Love, if they so choose. And who better to teach us about Love than the One that is Love? God is Love. How to experience this Love of God, this Love which is God? Meditation. The Truth that God can be experienced as Love is nothing new. All of the greatest Spiritual leaders throughout all of history have been saying this for thousands of years. Each of them experienced this Love for themselves by their own efforts at Union with God within. For the religious minded, the Bible also happens to concur with the Truth that God is Love. Check out 1John 4:8 and also 4:16. Both verses contain the exact same statement, God is Love. Obtaining some kind of objective, physical proof for the subjective, non physical Spiritual world is not so easy for our modern Science. Even the best laboratories with the best sensing and detecting equipment cannot provide as much proof of a Spiritual existence as the Human can provide for him/herself through personal experimentation by exploring the Inner realms. By repeated Union with the Inner Spirit, the meditator will soon realize various effects on the body, mind and emotions. The meditator, with persistent practice, will soon notice an overall improvement in every aspect of life. The very character of the individual will change for the better. By repeated exposure to the Energies of the Inner Spirit, the Unconscious Mind will begin to remember the experience of meditation as though it were another program for it to run. The
61
Jason Blanchard
Unconscious Mind will create this experience of contacting the Inner Spirit, with all of its Love, in our Physical reality. With the Unconscious Mind creating the experience of Love in our lives, the meditator then begins to manifest and embody this Love in a real, tangible way. The meditator will, in a sense, become a vessel filled with Love, feeling Love, living with Love in the heart. Experience proves all of this to the individual who makes the effort to experiment for him/herself. Now, since it is True that the Human can embody Love within, then it is also True that the Human also embodies God within. God is Love, remember? Since the Human can embody God within, then once again, what do we have? Proof #5 that You are gods. The Scientific proof of all of this is in the effort, in the personal experimentation and experience. As said before, there is nothing to lose, and Everything to gain from Union with Inner Spirit. Just imagine the whole world meditating and experiencing Spirit, God and Love within themselves. Ah,...what a dream that is. Thanks to the normal actions of the Unconscious Mind, whatever we repeatedly do for any great length of time becomes second nature. It becomes so much a part of who we are, and so ingrained within us, that we may forget the fact that at one time, that thing which is now part of us had to be learned, practiced, and experienced first. The same applies to the act of meditating and experiencing the effects of Meditation. Over time, it becomes a normal part of our lives. Uniting with our Inner Spirit, contacting God, and experiencing Love becomes ingrained in us. We carry the Love we feel in Meditation over into our conscious waking awareness, and express it in the Physical world, in a tangible way. This is an absolutely natural process of the Human Mind to experience something within and then project it without. Just as one may sit in a movie theater, watch a joyful movie, and then carry that joy into ones life outside the theater, so it is with Meditation. Remember, the Unconscious Mind does not know the difference between what we call Physical reality and something which is experienced within the Mind or Imagination. As far as the Unconscious Mind is concerned, the experience of Spirit, God and Love which is accessible through Meditation, is just as real as if God physically appeared in front of the meditator and gave the meditator a Loving embrace. To the Unconscious Mind, the experience of the Love is the same. And, the Unconscious Mind, being the creator that it is, will create this experience of Love on its own, if it is repeatedly exposed to the Love of God in Meditation. NAME THAT EMOTION The effect of this, of course, is that the consistent meditator will soon embody the Spiritual in a more concrete way, in the Physical world. Not only
62
will there be an effect of more Love within, but also there will be more Spiritual/Energetical activity. Love, which comes from Spirit, is an Energy. Love is, as often defined, an Emotion. Scientifically speaking, I have no argument with this definition. In fact, viewing Love as an Emotion will help us understand how the Human can perform miracles. Lets examine Emotions. What exactly is Emotion? Before defining it Scientifically, take a look at how people describe Emotions. By doing so, it will be easy to see precisely what Emotions are. In many cases, the feelings of emotions are described with words of action which particularly denote a movement of some sort. For example, we say that the emotion of Love is a rush, or that we feel swept away. Both terms describe a movement. We also say that we are awash in an ocean of Love, or that we feel Love flowing through us. Conversely, when we are angry, someone might warn us not to let our anger fly out of control. They may tell us to get a hold of ourselves. Once again, we have words which describe movement of some kind. Is this some coincidence? Absolutely not!! In Truth, there is no such thing as coincidence. Words describe emotion as some type of movement or motion because Emotion really is a motion of something. And that something is Energy (which is still a Vibration). Emotion is Energy in Motion. Energyin motion. E-motion. Emotion. Well, look at that. The definition of Emotion is written right there in the word itself. When you feel an Emotion, what you are feeling is a rush or a flow of Energy. When the Energy of Emotion flows through us, we feel it within our bodies, our nerves, our skin, with every fiber of our being. Also, we know that the more intense the Emotion, the more we feel it within us. The feeling of this Emotional Energy becomes more and more easily felt in our Physical body as the intensity of the Emotion increases. But did you know there is a simple Scientific explanation for why we feel intense Emotions in a more Physical way? (If the reader hasnt discerned it by now, there is a Scientific explanation for Everything.) The secret of why we can feel Emotions, especially intense Emotions, in a Physical way is based (once again) on the equation E=mc . Lets recap here. Remember earlier that we examined the nature of the Universe and discovered that firstly, All is Vibration. Then we learned that depending on the frequency of the Vibration concerned, Vibration would manifest as one of the polar opposites, Matter or Energy. A fast frequency Vibration produces what we call Energy. A slow frequency Vibration produces what we call Matter. Keep this in mind. So we just discovered that Emotion is an Energy in motion. This Energy of Emotion flows through us, which we feel in our Physical bodies. Something else must be mentioned here. It is known that Emotional Energy has a tendency to stay within us for a while. Even after the catalyst (which caused the Emotion)
63
2
Jason Blanchard
disappears, the Emotional Energy tends to stay with us for some time. For example, an Emotion of happiness may arise within us and stay with us for a very long time, sometimes becoming more intense before it may eventually fade away. But something must be understood herethe only place the Emotional Energy can stay is within the limited space of our bodies. So what happens when extremely intense Emotions arise and stay within that limited space? When tremendous amounts of Energy get trapped, in a sense, within our bodies, we say that we feel them very severely, as though we are filled up with the Emotion. Greater intensity makes the Emotional Energy easier to feel Physically. But why? When a huge amount of Energy is trapped within a relatively small space, such as happens with intense Emotions filling up the Physical body, then the Emotional Energy, which is normally a high frequency Vibration, gets condensed within the small space of our bodies, and the frequency of the Vibration slows down. The actual frequency of the Emotional Energy slows down as more and more Energy is crammed within us. And what happens when the frequency of Vibration slows down from a high frequency Energetic state? The Vibration becomes less Energetical and more Physical. Remember the example of the spinning wheel. As frequency increases, the Vibration manifests more and more as Energy. The opposite of that is True. As frequency decreases, the Vibration manifests more and more as Matter (Physical). So what do we have with these tremendous Physical feelings of very intense Energetic Emotions? We have a huge amount of Vibration (manifesting as Energy) being compressed into a relatively small space (the body), the effect of which is a reduction in the frequency of the Vibration, which makes the Vibration manifest in a slightly more Physical state. Remember the spinning wheel again. Remember that there is sort of middle ground between the Energy state and the Matter state, in which the wheel was translucent, exhibiting both the properties of being Energy and Matter at the same time. Well, that is analogous to what is happening here with intense Emotions. When the Emotions get squeezed into the small space of the body, the frequency of the Vibration slows down a little, and we feel as though the Emotion is more concrete, more real. These words, concrete and real, refer to what we call Physical reality. Even the very words themselves hint at the Materializing effect of compressing Vibration into a relatively small space. And now we arrive at the final step to understanding and creating miracles. THE FINAL INGREDIENT Lets go back a bit and recall what we learned of the Imagination and the Mind again. Remember that the Imagination is a sort of tuner, and the Mind, particularly the Unconscious Mind, is the creator of what is in the Imagination.
64
The Imagination works within the realm of Spirit/Energy. Anything which is imagined exists within the plane of Spirit/Energy. Also, whatever is in the Imagination is heard by the ever-listening Unconscious Mind, which then attempts to manifest or create what is in the Imagination. Thoughts are things. Remember the Unconscious Mind attempts to create what we think. The Unconscious Mind organizes Vibration to create what is in the Imagination. If we think of Energetical things such as colors or emotions, the Unconscious Mind does not have much trouble creating the Energy patterns we see in our Imagination because the Unconscious Mind is already working in the Energetical/Spiritual realm. But what if the Imagination is occupied with some Physical or Material thing? Can we cause a major Physical change to occur in conformity with the will of the Imagination? After all, isnt a dramatic Physical change of some kind always considered a real miracle? For example, if one Imagines a sick or diseased part of the body as being healed, will the Unconscious Mind attempt to make this so? Can the Unconscious Mind also manipulate Physical Matter? YES!! Lets use that very example. Lets say we use our Imagination to imagine a currently sick part of our body as being healthy right now. The Unconscious Mind will attempt to do precisely thatheal the sick body part. In Truth, all the Unconscious Mind is doing is attempting to manifest or create the reality of a currently healed body part. The Unconscious Mind does not care if the body part is currently sick, it is just manifesting what is in the Imagination, which is the image of health. And so, the Unconscious Mind sets to work creating the reality of the healthy body part. But this is a Physical operation. We need the result to 2 be Physical, not Energetic. Remember the equation E=mc . All is Vibration, to be sure, but the equation tells us that there is a huge amount of Energy compressed, as it were, in Matter. So, if we wish to see a Material, Physical result in our healing, then we need Energy, and plenty of it. And how can we generate huge amounts of Energy, and compress it so much, that it is very intense, easily felt, and concrete, nearly Physical? With Emotion!! Energy in motion. Now, what Emotion is recognized Universally as the most Supreme of all? Love. Continuing with our healing experiment, if we add the Emotion of Love also to our Imagination, then we feel a tremendous increase in Energy. Now the Unconscious Mind has huge amounts of Energy (Vibration) with which to carry out its work of manifesting and generating the state of health. If one uses the Imagination to visualize compressing and squeezing the Energy of Love, which is filling up the body, directly into the sick body part, while still imagining that body part as already healed and healthy, then the Unconscious Mind will follow the orders of the Imagination. The result will be more and more Energy (Vibration) being packed and compressed into a tiny spacethe sick body part.
65
Jason Blanchard
Not only that, but the Energy (Vibration) will also carry a certain kind of frequency pattern with it, directly to the sick body part. That specific pattern, given by the Imagination, is that of health. So the Energy (Vibration) which is being compressed into that specific space carries a message, a certain pattern, which resembles a healthy body part. As more and more Energy (Vibration) is compressed, the frequency of the Vibration begins to slow down more and more. With continued pumping and compressing of the Vibration provided by the Emotion of Love into the afflicted body part, the frequency slows down so much that the Vibration, which was just a moment ago manifesting as an Energetic pattern of health, now manifests as a Physical pattern of health. The once afflicted body part is now Physically healed. Lo and behold,...a miracle!! YOU ARE GODS! So, finally, we have the Scientific secret of miracles. Miracles are a combination of all of the secrets of Vibration, Energy, Matter, Imagination, Mind, Meditation, God, Love, and Emotion. Here is the actual process of manifesting miracles, a miracle manifestation formulaImagination + Mind + God-Love (Emotion) = a miracle. The Imagination creates the pattern, the Mind manifests the pattern, and Love supplies the necessary amount of Vibration to manifest what is in the Imagination. Seen another way, the Imagination is the architectural designer, the Mind is the construction worker, and God is the supplier of all the necessary building materials. Any given pattern + a pattern builder + a supply of building materials = the manifestation, materialization, and creation of the original pattern into concrete Physical reality,...a miracle. Imagination + Mind + God-Love (Emotion) = a miracle. What is possible with the application of this formula? Truthfully, Everything is possible. For the religious minded reader, I provide this Bible quote, which concurs with this Truth. But with God everything is possible. Matthew 19:26 HOW MUCH DOES IT TAKE? The question of amounts arises here. Precisely how much energy, or more accurately, how much Vibration is needed to manifest or materialize Physical 2 Matter? The answer is provided by the equation E=mc . But I will not get into the deep mathematics of it. All that need be said is that which was repeated before. There is a tremendous amount of Energy trapped in Matter, or seen
66
another way, it takes a huge amount of compressed Energy to create Matter. But of course, each of these is nothing but Vibration. So, let it suffice to say that it takes plenty of Vibration to manifest Physical Matter. But this is not the obstacle that it might seem to be. Remember, All is Vibration. And this Omnipresent Vibration is the direct manifestation of God Itself. Also remember that God is within the Human being. Therefore, the Human being has direct access to all of the Vibration that is needed to manifest or materialize anything. God has a limitless supply of what we need. In light of such Truth, the question of how much Energy (Vibration) is needed to manifest Matter is really pointless. What does it matter if one needs gigantic amounts of energy to do something? Thanks to the Inner Spirit of God, the Human being has access to vast quantities of Vibration which cannot even be imagined. THEN WHY CANT I DO IT? Well, something is obviously missing here. Why is it that more people dont perform miracles if they have a Spirit within which gives access to God? Good question. Why is it that only Masters such as Apollonius of Tyana, Jesus, Buddha, Krishna, etc. have been able to perform miracles? Another good question. What is it that people have to do in order to be able to have such apparent unlimited access to Spiritual power, like the Masters of all time? Better question. The answer? That is in the next chapter. SUMMARY God is Love, experienced through Meditation. The Human being embodies this Love within. This Love is God, hence, the Human being can embody God within. Through repeated Meditation, and the normal function of the Unconscious Mind, this Love of God becomes a natural part of the Human being. Emotion is Energy in motion. E-motion. Intense Emotions are easily felt Physically. Intense Emotions compress huge amounts of Energy within the body. This has the effect of slowing down the frequency of the Emotional Vibration, making it more Physical, and easily felt. The miracle manifestation formula is: Imagination + Mind + God (Love, Emotion) = miracle. It takes tremendous amounts of compressed Vibration to manifest or materialize Physical Matter. Thanks to the Human beings connection to God through the Inner Spirit, the Human has access to the limitless supply of Vibration in the Universe. ###
67
Jason Blanchard
CHAPTER 11 MASTER OF LOVE

So, how is it that the Spiritual Masters of all history have been able to perform miracles? By now, the reader has the Scientific information detailing the process involved in performing miracles. With this detailed information, the reader will be able to understand what was once a mystery. That is what this book has been leading up to at this point. A knowledge and understanding of the actual Scientific process of miracles and Spiritual powers is what I desired to know when I was very young. And now the reader has information on the basics of the Spiritual Science in hand. But a simple knowledge of the Scientific process of Spirit is not enough. After all, what exactly gives one the authority, the ability, the power to do such things? Why is it that the majority of people cannot perform dramatic miracles as easily as the Spiritual Masters? The answer comes back to the individuals personal connection to the Inner Spirit within. As mentioned before, Spiritual abilities and powers are a kind of by-product of ones Union with God. As one unites with the Inner Spirit within, the Spiritual abilities surface, one by one, over time. Whosoever busies him/herself with the goal of Union with the Inner Spirit of God will, in time, come into possession of abilities and powers which most people would call miraculous. But for the one who is busy Uniting with Spirit, it soon becomes apparent that the so called miraculous powers are really just normal and natural abilities of the Spirit, perfectly explainable by Science. Union with God grants access to the limitless powers of the Inner Spirit. And the closer and more intimate the Union, the more access will the individual have to the Limitless Power of Spirit. So then, why is it that most people are not able to easily perform miracles, even though they have an Inner Spirit within which gives access to God? Simple. Most people are not concerned with Uniting with their Inner Spirits. Of all the people you know, how many of them meditate? Do you meditate? Where there is a lack of Union with Spirit, there is a lack of Spiritual power and ability. In short, if you dont attempt to Unite with Inner Spirit, then dont expect any great amount of Spiritual power or abilitydont expect to be able to perform dramatic miracles. If you have a very limited personal connection to your own Inner Spirit, then you will also have a very limited amount of personal Spiritual power, so little in fact, that you may question whether or not it is even there. So, what is it that people have to do in order to be able to have such unlimited access to Spiritual power, like the Spiritual Masters of all time? In order to have access to such incredible miraculous power, one must first make the effort to establish Union with the Spirit of God within. As stated before,
68
Get off your dead ass, and on your dying feet! There is no way around this. In order to be like your own favorite Spiritual Master, you yourself must do as they did in order to get where they have been. You must, as they did, make the effort to establish a closer Union with the Inner Spirit of God. The Masters set the example with their very lives. You must follow in their footsteps if you want to be like them. You want Limitless Spiritual Power? Establish a Limitless Union with your Inner Spirit. This is the ring pass not. The effort cannot be avoided, and no one can do it for you. EVEN ME? All of the Spiritual Masters of all time, such as Apollonius of Tyana, Jesus, Buddha, Krishna, etc. have one thing in common. All of these Masters, plus innumerable others all throughout history, have done, in essence, the same thing with their lives. They have United themselves to God through their Inner Spirit. They accomplished something special which gave them those abilities and powers. They have made the effort to contact God through Meditation, and succeeded in establishing such an incredible Union with Spirit, that they are no longer separable from that Union. The connection is so complete and runs so deep, that nothing can break it. Seen from another angle, it can be said that a Spiritual Master has so deeply programmed him/herself, that the program within their Unconscious Mind is permanent. This is only one way of looking at it. Spiritual Masters are Enlightened. They have completely filled up their Spirits with the Knowledge, Wisdom, and Light of God. They have achieved Union with the Inner Spirit of God. This feat is accomplished primarily through the indispensable tool of Meditation. Something so extraordinary as Enlightenment or Illumination does not happen overnight to be sure. It takes time, as anything else does. Rome was not built in a day. But, it is not impossible. In Truth, nothing is impossible. What each and every Spiritual Master has accomplished is also possible for anyone. Every Spiritual Master urged his/her followers to follow in their footsteps because each Master knew what you are reading here now. Anyone can do what any Spiritual Master has done, and even more, if the individual so desires it. Even Jesus told his disciples that anyone could do more than he ever did. Think about it. When just one person does something extraordinary, something which was considered impossible, then everyone else now knows for certain that it can be done. Once, athletes could not run a mile in less than four minutes. Nowadays, if you cant do this, there is no point in competing in the Olympics. Even some powerlifters are now lifting 500 pounds or more over their heads, when this was once impossible. Both of these accomplishments are astounding. They are Physical accomplishments. But what of Spiritual accomplishments? Given what you have read so far in this book, and the
69
Jason Blanchard
important point just made, do you honestly think that you cannot also do what Apollonius did? Or Jesus? Or Buddha? Or any Spiritual Master throughout all of Human history? Oh, please!! What they did first, they practically beg you to do also. Look hereAnyone can do the impossible thing, because, in Truth, nothing is impossible. WHAT TO DO Spiritual Masters have acquired their immense power thanks to diligent, continuous, personal effort at Uniting with the Inner Spirit. The amount of effort applied to ones Enlightenment is directly proportional to the speed of progress towards full Enlightenment. With little effort applied, the progress can stretch into decades. With total dedication and effort, it may only take a few short years. It is up to the individual. The Key here is Love. How much do you desire to have the Love of God within you? How desperately do you wish to change yourself for the better, thus changing the world too? The thing all Spiritual Masters have in common is Love. The Love within every Master is the Love of God. This Love is Godthey are One and the Same. God is Love. Love is the best amplifier. Include Love in whatever you are doing, and it takes on a whole new meaning. Apply Love to sex, and nearly everyone will tell you it is better than just sex without Love. Get the idea? Apply Love to your efforts at Union with God and you will succeed very quickly and efficiently. Love is the one thing which God cannot resist. God is Love after all. Applying Love to your efforts at Uniting with the Spirit of God within is like inviting God over to your house with a phone call, only to find out that God is already inside your house on the upstairs extension line. That is how fast Spirit works. Love is the attraction, and it works at the speed of light. This speed, which is a direct result of Love, is something which Spiritual Masters are aware of. It is recorded throughout history that Spiritual Masters usually perform miracles in just a few moments of time. This speed of manifestation is normal for a Master. Most people would not even consider any occurrence a miracle unless it happened very quickly. And Masters have the ability to effect fast dramatic, changesmiracles. Their secret? Love!! What else? Remember the lesson in the last chapter. Imagination + Mind + God (Love, Emotion) = miracle. We discussed how the Vibration needed to manifest what is in the Imagination is readily available from the power of Emotion, which is Energy (Vibration) in motion. Even though it takes tremendous amounts of Energy (Vibration) to manifest into a state of Physical Matter, all of the Energy (Vibration) is available from God in the form of the Emotion of Love. The single best and most efficient way of drawing in that much Vibrational Energy is to use the Emotion of Love. And remember, God is Love. So how is it that the
70
Spiritual Masters can affect miracles in the Physical world? How can they attract so much Vibration into themselves? Remember, the Spiritual Masters are Enlightened. They are in Union with the Inner Spirit of God. They have embodied God, which is Love, within themselves. They have the Vibration of Love within their Spirits. Now since they are United in such a close way to God, then it is, in effect, very easy for them to be able to attract the necessary amount of Vibration needed to materialize or manifest something into the Physical world. Spiritual Masters are in Union with God, Love. When a Master wishes to manifest or materialize something, he/she utilizes the Limitless power and strength of Love to generate the necessary amount of Vibration needed to manifest what is in his/her Imagination. Lets look at an example. GET OFF YOUR ASS, MY SON Lets imagine a man has been confined to a wheelchair for many years because of a severed spinal cord. He has lost the use of his legs and cannot walk. Now enter the Spiritual Master into the picture. The Master, who is filled with the Love of God, sees the man in the wheelchair, has compassion for him, and wishes to heal him so he can use his legs again. So, the Master uses the formula. Imagination + Mind + God (Love, Emotion) = Miracle. First, the Master imagines, as clearly as possible, and with total concentration, the mans spinal cord as already being healed. He visualizes this with complete accuracy, and total concentration until it is firmly within his minds eye. When this is done, the Masters Mind is now ready to actually create what is in his Imagination. The Master, still with the firm image of a healthy, whole, and connected spinal cord in his Imagination, then adds the final ingredient to the formula. The Master now adds God to the mix by feeling with all possible intensity, the Emotion of Love. Immediately, the Master is now filled with an overwhelming sensation of tangible Love. This is easy for the Master to do, since he is already in Union with God, which is Love. So now the Master has an image within his Mind. His Mind is ready to manifest the image. And all the Vibration that is needed for the task is now available in the form of Love (which is a Vibration, after all). Put it all together, and possibly throw in an act of will in the form of a simple verbal command from the Master, which is sent directly to the cells of the mans spinal cord. The Master may say, Be healed. (or get off your ass?) And what happens? The cells of the mans currently severed spinal cord now come under the influence of the Masters use of the miracle manifestation formula Imagination + Mind + God (Love, Emotion) = miracle. Immediately, the image within the Masters Imagination begins to manifest into Physical reality. The tremendous amount of Vibration which the Master has
71
Jason Blanchard
accumulated within himself through the use of Love, now begins to cram itself into the exact spot along the mans spinal cord where the gap is located, exactly following the instructions of the Masters Imagination. The Vibration now concentrated within the gap along the spinal cord begins to decrease its rate of frequency. The Vibration soon begins to slowly materialize into Physical Matter, specifically that of a healthy, whole, unbroken spinal cord, which is the image in the Masters Imagination. With further slowing of frequency, the now Materialized Vibration literally takes on the form of new spinal cord cells, filling in the gap, and making the cord whole again. The spinal cord, once cut in half, is now reconnected and whole. The man in the wheelchair can now feel and move his legs again!! And he slowly gets up from the chair, more than likely shouting, Its a miracle!. See how it works? The process is so simple. And who said Science was difficult? Who said that Gods miracles were a mystery? ACTION AT A DISTANCE The attentive reader may have noticed something different about this scenario and the one given in the last chapter. In the last chapter, the healing took place within the body of the person who was using the miracle manifestation formula. This person was concerned only with effecting a change within his own body. This time, however, the healing took place outside of the body of the miracle worker. I purposely waited until this point to introduce the following Truth. The creative ability of the Human Imagination, and the Mind are not limited to the confined space of the Human beings body. Remember, both the Imagination and Mind function within the Energetical/Spiritual realm, which is not limited by time or space. The sphere of influence of the Human Imagination and the Mind are Limitless. The Mind will manifest what is in the Imagination regardless of whether or not the Imagination is concerned with causing change within the body, or outside of the body. The Human being can cause change outside of his/her body. Such is the reason that a Spiritual Master can cause changes in the outside world. Witness the example of Jesus calming the storm while at sea in a boat. The sphere of influence of his Imagination, Mind, and Spirit was so vast, thanks to his Union with his Inner Spirit, that he could even stop a raging storm which threatened the small boat which he and his disciples were on. There is more than one way of performing any particular miracle, but Jesus may have realized this particular one by simply imagining a calm sky. Miracles dont always have to be so grand as healings, weather control, or raising the dead. Apollonius of Tyana once performed a miracle in which he cleared a town of a plague of nagging insects. Not quite so dramatic as raising
72
the dead, but a miracle nonetheless, and quite useful as far as the town was concerned. All manner of amazing, strange, and sometimes, even ridiculous events occur due to the influence of a Spiritual Master. If someone would compile every single story of every single miraculous event in recorded history, it would definitely be a very engaging read, and no doubt, a book of unimaginable, if not impossible, size. THINK OF THIS AS ONLY THE FIRST PARAGRAPH OF CHAPTER ONE OF THE BIGGEST BOOK YOU HAVE EVER SEEN Thus far in this book, I have explained only a small portion of what I have learned from my years of study of the Spiritual Science and also from my personal experience in exploring the Spiritual realm. Even so, I have accomplished the main thrust of what I wanted to do with this book. I have explained, step by step, what was needed to help the non-scientist understand the Scientific process behind miracles and Spiritual phenomenon. If the reader is wondering if there is still more to this Science of the Spirit which can be learned, I can answer that question this way: Hell Yes!! What I have written about here was a very condensed textbook, of sorts, with one sole purposeto explain the Spiritual Science, at least as far as miracles are concerned. On the subject of Spiritual Science, I must mention something here. We have examined some Universal Laws in the previous chapters, but I wish the reader to know that these do not represent the only Universal Laws in existence, not even close. However, the number of Universal Laws is definitely finite. They are not endless. Still along these lines, while there is a definite number of Universal Laws which govern the Universe, the ways in which these Laws can be applied are literally endless. For example, look at Electricity. It is not a very complex phenomenon at all, with only a certain number of laws governing its behavior, and yet look at all of the thousands of ways in which we have applied electricity just in this century. It boggles the mind when you think about it. Similarly, in the Spiritual Science, there are also a definite set number of Laws, but the ways in which they can be applied are endless. It is the endless ways which these Laws are applied which make our Universe a place of such endless complexity and diversity, and yet all this diversity is based on, and governed by, a relatively small number of Laws. There are so many ways in which even only a handful of the Laws can be applied that it literally boggles the mind. Such is the limitless grandeur of the Universe. OUR JOURNEY ENDS, OR DOES IT...? But we are not finished yet. In the remaining chapters, I wish to submit to the reader some more information of interest, and some other Spiritual Truths. I
73
Jason Blanchard
will also include some personal experiences, including one particularly powerful (dare I say, miraculous) experience, which should have left me dead. I include these experiences to hopefully give the reader some idea of just how powerful and engaging the Inner Spirit can be. It is my hope that the reader will not only have learned something amazing thus far, but will also be tempted to explore their own Inner Spirit within. Everyones Spiritual experience is different. Of that, there is no doubt. My own experience thus far has been remarkable, and I still feel like I have only scratched the surface. Should you be tempted to embark on your own Spiritual Journey of Meditation, study, and Self realization, and come to understand your own place in the Universe, then rest assured that the Journey will be something you will not forget. All of the worlds Spiritual teachings and philosophies place emphasis on the Journey of the individual Seeker, and not so much the Destination. The Destination, after all, is the same for everyone. The Destination is God. And God is within us. The only difference is how each of us will get therethe Journey. Well, as far as Spiritual Journeys are concerned, I am personally familiar with one. And that is the Path of the Hermit. ###
74
CHAPTER 12 THE LONELY PATH OF THE HERMIT

God looks down from heaven on the entire human race; he looks to see if there is even one with real understanding, one who seeks for God.Psalm 14:2 and 53:2 This psalm from the Bible is not divine romantic poetryit is the Truth. God is looking for just one who seeks for God. Even though I dont care much for the Bible, this verse does hold special meaning for me personally. It applies to my own life and to my ongoing endeavor to know God. Ever since I first started looking for Truth, I quickly noticed that I was essentially alone in my quest. Literally, for years, I had hoped to find just one person who understood me, and shared my passion for the Ultimate Goal. After years of searching, I have found so few others besides me who share my interest in Spiritual Perfection, that I can count them on one hand and still have fingers left over. This is rather disturbing and depressing, if you think about it. This means that precious few people are Truly looking for God. In India, a yogi is one who is devoted to Union with Godremember, Yoga literally means union. There is a saying in India which illustrates this rarity of individuals who search for God: Out of 1000 people, only one is a yogi. Out of 1000 yogis, only one knows God. Do the mathOne who Truly knows God is indeed one in a million! God does not command or order us to take an interest in matters Spiritual, which is why so very few people in the world ever even attempt to really know God. God does not force us to look for God, hence, this is why God looks for just one. Like I said, the psalm is not poetry, it is Truth. If you think that finding one person who Truly seeks for God is hard, try finding one who already knows God. It is indeed difficult to find just one person who Truly knows God (one in a million, remember?). This does not mean that there are none in the world who are Spiritually Perfected, Illuminated, Enlightened, etc. I know they are out there. I know precious few by name and have even communicated with fewer of them, but I do not know them personally, as though they lived next door to me. But this fact is not so terrible. I have learned that in this lifetime, I do not need to find a local Enlightened Teacher in the flesh to help me, and so, I do not look. What I have learned, and what I know, is that there is no better Teacher than God, and since God is within, the Best Teacher is not far away. Despite knowing God is inside of me, and listening to the Teacher within, I still yearn sometimes to know of others who are on the same path as me. When I say path, I refer to the particular way in which one goes about his/her search for God, for Spiritual Perfection. There are different ways to find God. Some
75
Jason Blanchard
(like some well known saints) do it through embodying virtues like humility, compassion, etc., but for me, my particular path is the path of a Hermit. I have decided to write a few words about the Hermits Path simply because it is, as I have discovered, the loneliest path of all. There are many more Hermits out there besides me, but we rarely find each other. I myself, have found only one other Hermit besides me. At the risk of sounding too whiny, I must say that is very difficult to convey to the reader just how solitary and lonely this path is. I imagine it is comparable to finding someone who can read and correctly interpret ancient Sumerian clay tablets and Egyptian hieroglyphicsa rare breed of people indeed. But in this case, I am not concerned with difficult ancient languages, but with the most difficult and ancient quest of All Timeseeking for God. And this rarity of Spiritually inclined people is emotionally upsetting at times. Curses upon this human need to feel a sense of belonging!! In any case, I wish to say a few words about Hermits strictly for the benefit of any other Hermits out there who also desire to know they are not alone in their quest. I do not intend to describe in supreme detail every last point of interest concerning Hermits. As I said, I only wish to touch on the subject for the benefit of other Hermits. Those of you who are Hermits will likely recognize yourself in the words that follow. Those of you who are not Hermits will simply learn of a certain kind of person which you may never have known to exist, or perhaps you may come to better understand a Hermit you already know in your life. THE HERMIT So what are the characteristics of a Hermit? Perhaps, above all else, a Hermit is a sort of renunciate, one who simply rejects the ways of the world and society in general. A Hermit has an inner burning desire to know God. It is something of an all consuming passion. A Hermit will do anything to find God, even if he has to live a very austere, and ascetic life, which happens quite often. Hermits know that the world which we perceive around us is, at best, a Grand Illusion, and not at all real. He knows there is more to life than just being born, dying, and all the stuff that comes in between. So he often rejects quite a number of such accepted conventions of society as marriage, career, producing children, accumulating wealth and possessions, etc. The Hermit feels that these human customs and traditions of the common people will not aid him in his Goal, and so he renounces his need for them all. He knows that the ways of the Spiritually blind population cannot help him in his Quest for Perfection since the population obviously has not found God. So why do exactly what everyone else is doing? He will at one point in his life, flat out reject many things most people accept as normal. Even the word itself, hermit, speaks of his nature. He is reclusive, of course. He prefers to live alone, preferably far away from society, if at all
76
possible. It is not unusual for him to wish to find a monastery of some sort, or even a cave, depending on his geographic location. Living in such isolated conditions can aid his efforts to find God, because there are less distractions of normal society. But living alone is not always the case with a Hermit. Sometimes it is just a natural desire on his part. Due to circumstances, he may very well live with a large family, but you can rest assured that he will have a small personal space somewhere in or around the house (or even outside the house) where he can be alone, if only in his mind. The Hermit prefers this time alone, to be with himself, his thoughts, to meditate, and to commune with God. All of these characteristics may seem strange or even extreme to some, but there is a method to this seeming madness. The Hermit behaves this way because he is seeking God. God is the Ultimate Goal of the Hermit. In the Hermits viewpoint, nothing is as important as seeking God. A Hermit rejects practically everything which cannot help him in this Spiritual Quest. Because of this, he will naturally be different from the rest of society, sometimes even thought of as a madman for not getting with the system and conforming to the ways of society. He will be a genuine stranger in a strange land. Given this austere lifestyle, it is easy to see why this is a lonely way to find God. But for a Hermit it is a perfectly natural way to live, and he would not have it any other way. Often a Hermit cant easily understand why the rest of the world does not join him in seeking God. Though the whole world may think him insane, to a Hermit, the whole world seems crazy for not conforming to his lifestyle, and choosing to find God. This fact above all else, this general lack of genuine interest in God on behalf of the population, is what really makes him feel lonely. He sincerely wishes that everyone would join him on the Quest. If that were to happen, he would not feel so alone because he would share a common link with everyone else, and he would likely remain a somewhat more active part of society, instead of totally forsaking it outright. But, given the way things are, a Hermit must do what he must to accomplish the Goal of finding God. In order for a Hermit to even hope to attain his Goal, he must have total Confidence in God, and trust his Intuition. A Hermit must have incredible strength and fortitude. He must be brave, utterly fearless about the future and incredibly persistent in his efforts. He cannot afford to let any obstacle deter him from his path. He must never give up or he will lose the prizeGod. It is understandable why there are so few Hermits or God-seeking people in the world. The above mentioned traits which a Hermit must possess are found in few people. Some people give up on their personal dreams because of adversities so insignificant as a papercut or a hangnail. The Seeker must resemble the image of a modern superhero to finally win the Great Prize of Enlightenment. Not the easiest thing to do, to be sure. But it is not impossiblenothing is impossible, after all.
77
Jason Blanchard
PERSONALLY, ITS PERSONAL As I stated above, the Hermits path is my chosen way to find God. This way is perfectly natural for me, and I understand it well. Throughout my whole life, I have been, to say the least, different. I have always been the odd man out, the black sheep, and (sigh) the freak. I could never find anyone who was really like me. I know that everyone is unique, of course, but I mean that I was always vastly different from everyone else. And this uniqueness really seemed to explode in my face when I dropped the dogma and doctrine of my religion and began an earnest search for God. My personality changed dramatically. Although I was already a quiet introvert by nature, this characteristic became more extreme as I soon began living and behaving like (can you guess?) a Hermit. I really began keeping to myself in major ways. I rarely spoke to anyone about anything at all. I still remember a long period during this time when I would literally not speak for days on end, only to interrupt the vocal abstinence with an outburst of less than 25 words. Before long, my throat muscles would tire after speaking for only a few minutes, assuming I had to speak that long for whatever reason. It may seem ridiculous to not speak like this, and maintain such silence, but what did I have to say to anyone? Every time I opened my mouth about anything I was studying at the time, I would get strange looks or hear unkind remarks. No one I spoke to seemed interested in finding God like I was, so why even talk to them? Most people were (and still are) only interested in shooting their mouths off about pointless and frivolous things, and (the worst of all) gossiping about other people. I soon grew tired of this disturbing disinterest in Spirituality in other people, so I rarely spoke to anyone about my newfound interest in Spiritual things. I retreated into my own little world inside my head, my own little Hermit cave, where I could ponder the mysteries of God, Spirit and the Universe in solitude and silence. Comprehending God and Spirit became an all consuming passion in those days. Practically everything else was of little importance in my mind. As a result, I rejected many things in the world around me. I just did not care to waste time with frivolous and trivial things which would not help me in my Spiritual Quest. I spent tremendous amounts of time with my head buried in any book which might provide some answers to my many questions. I also spent nearly the same amount of time utterly and completely lost in my own thoughts, sometimes marveling at a sudden comprehension, sometimes theorizing about the possibilities in this Universe, or wondering about what inconceivable discoveries lay ahead of me, but always, always I was endlessly searching. Being as I was the only person I knew who was actually daring to ask questions about Spirit and God, instead of just listening to what some priest was saying, it was not long before my solitary quest caused me to become lonely
78
unspeakably lonely. There I was, doing my best to find God while living in a Hell on earth, and there was no one to personally guide me on my self chosen journey except myself. Everywhere I looked, I saw Evil, and it made me retreat deeper into my little cave. And the more I did so, the lonelier I became. Tears were not too uncommon in those dreary days of despair. As odd as it may sound, the only thing which eased the terrible lonesomeness was the Journey itself. Each new discovery, no matter how seemingly insignificant, was a reason to rejoice. Every new bit of understanding meant that I was one step closer to the Goal I so desperately sought. And these small steps were invigorating enough to counterbalance the sadness of my ever-present isolation from an otherwise Evil world. Each new bit of understanding gave me energy to persevere through the desperation caused by the relentless Evil of the world, energy to continue at least as far as the next bit of knowledge was discovered. And then the cycle would repeat all over again, and with each repetition, one step at a time, I came nearer to the Goal. Going for the Onesong title by Yes And so it goes. Always there is the striving for the Goal, the Journey itself, and for a Hermit, there is, if nothing else, great Joy in that Journey, in Going for the One. A Hermit knows where he is going, he knows he is steadily moving towards God, which is the Goal after all. The Journey towards God ends only with the Realization of God Within...and then the Real Journey really begins. It must be understood that once Self Realization is attained, everything does not simply come to an end, but rather, literally Everything in the whole Universe is opened to the one who now Realizes his One-ness with God. The real Journey does not end with the final Realization of God, it begins. Attaining Self Realization of God is like being given a special Key with which you can explore and enjoy absolutely everything in Gods Universe. It is as though you are given a permanent room in your masters house, along with exclusive permission to use your masters entire house at your own discretion. This house is the Universe, both the one within, and the one without. Remember the ancient axiom, As above, so below. As below, so above. The Universe of God is reflected within you, within your Inner Spirit. Such is the real Kingdom of God. I have nothing more to add on the subject of Hermits, except for the following. One night, after learning of the existence of just one more Godseeking Hermit out there besides me, I was suddenly inspired to write a poem about the difficult path of the Hermit. Writing the poem was a healing experience for me, and a great emotional release because for so long, no one understood me until suddenly I found another one like me. Just learning of the existence of one other Hermit besides me was satisfying beyond words.
79
Jason Blanchard
I include here the poem I composed in the hope that if you, the reader, are a Hermit too, then you will know that you are not alone. And you will also know that someone out there understands you. God bless the Hermits, wherever they may be. The Hermit by Jason Blanchard in the dark night of ignorance walks a Hermit searching for a Kingdom ever persistent, using great fortitude guided only by intuition and wisdom the Hermit walks alone and yet does not his Friend is not seen but is there the Hermit climbs a treacherous Mountain where few have gone and fewer wish to dare all he can see is what is before him all he knows is what is behind all he wants is what he cant yet see all he wants is to not be blind the cares of the world are all but a memory now he has no need for such things anymore foolish dreams played out before humankind good and evil keeping score yes, those days are gone now never to return leaving behind the fires of earthly hell he seeks a fire that does not burn climbing an obscure path in the night of which most will only speak he strains his eyes upward but still he cannot see the peak but this does not deter him for he knows the summit is above for his Friend tells him so and this Friend he does Love
80
many obstacles lie ahead but many now lie in the rear he long ago banished pains of failure a Hermit does not fear ever plodding along through the unforgiving night till at last the Goal can be seen a distant dim Light drawing closer to the Source with each step he draws near his eyes never waver from the Light he holds so dear the path becomes brighter the way becomes clear a human form Lights the darkness his Friend, so dear! as he approaches the figure the Light glows brighter burning with a radiance that outshines any fire arriving at last to his Goal his Journey ends in this long secret place he looks up at this long secret Friend behold, the Hermit sees his own face! his eyes wide, a look of surprise at what he can now see You are not what I expected You to be! My dearest Hermit so long for Me you have sought so many times you overcame barriers so many inner battles you fought.
81
Jason Blanchard
Just what did you expect to see when at last you would arrive? Some glorious godly figure, foolish fantasies which men contrive? I have never been found in any book on a shelf. Dearest Hermit, dont you see? What you seek is Your Self! It is God I have sought not the god of mans lies but the God of Love and Truth which hides behind my eyes. At last I have found You but You are not what I expected to see. Never did I think the God I looked for was waiting within me. Let me proclaim to the world what I now know is True, to all God-seeking people God is inside of you!! No longer look outside yourself to find the God you look for. Cast your gaze inward and look for a Star. Listen to your Inner Voice and knock upon the door. Listen to the inner OM, it sounds like an oceans roar! Never quit your quest let it burn you to the core, or else remain ignorant and live upon the earth forever more!
82
behold the hermits story and remember it well what the Hermit has said to you all below climb your own Mountain, from wherever you dwell and the Light of your Spirit, with Gods Love, will glow.
83
Jason Blanchard
CHAPTER 13 THE TWO WAYS

Yes, there are two paths you can go by, but in the long run, theres still time to change the road youre on.lyrics from Stairway to Heaven by Led Zeppelin Such simple lyrics from one of the most popular songs in history. And yet most people just sing along, while never even hearing just what the words are saying. This short phrase from this beautiful song is referring to the two paths, the two choices, the Two Ways in which we can live our livesthe ways of Love and Fear. There are two paths which we can choose at every single moment of our livesthe path of Love and the path of Fear. And that is it. There is nothing else to choose from. There are only two ways to classify the way each and every one of us choose to liveliving in Love or living in Fear. Absolutely everything we do in our lives at any given moment can be classified by two descriptions acting out of Love or acting out of Fear. Throughout all our lives, at any given time whatsoever, in any situation, the way we react to the situation, the way we live our lives can be narrowed down to only two possible choices which we can choose fromLove or Fear. It has always been this way and always shall be this way. Life is a constant choice between the two paths of Love and Fear. The road of Love is narrow and difficult; the road of Fear is wide and easy. For the religious minded, remember that Christ spoke of this in the gospels? Here, in Matthew 7:13-14. You can enter Gods Kingdom only through the narrow gate (Love). The way that leads to destruction (Fear) is broad, and its gate is wide for the many who choose the easy way (Fear). But the gateway to life (Love) is small, and the road is narrow, and only a few ever find it. Yes, Jesus knew about this Love/Fear stuff in detail. (gee, which path do you think he chose?) Hopefully, with a description of this subject, the reader can also come to know what Jesus knew, what Apollonius knew, what Buddha knew, and what all the saints and sages and holy people of all time also knewthat there is naught but Two Ways to choose fromthe way of Love, and the way of Fear. Let it be known right here and nowthe path of Love is the only Way to Spiritual Perfection, to Divine Illumination.
84
MULTIPLE PERSONALITY Theres a war inside my head!lyrics from Sweating Bullets, by Megadeth Inside of all of us, there are, in a sense, two beings, if you will, which are attempting to control our lives. Both of these beings are trying to get us to choose their path. The first being is what I will call the True You or True Self (TS for short), responsible for the path of Love. The second I will call the Ego or Selfish Self (SS for short), responsible for the path of Fear. THE WAY OF LOVE AND THE TRUE SELF All you need is Love. Love is all you need.the Beatles What is the True Self, or TS? The True Self is the part of us which does not know Fear, but only Love, the Love of God. The TS is the part of us which may be compared to our Soul. The TS can also be likened to the Inner Child, or Inner Self, to use terms which are popular these days. The TS is directly connected to God and to Love. The TS does not know anything else actually. Anything which is of God and of Love (which are One and the same, remember) is also of the TS. The TS trusts God, and trusts Love. It is that part of us which is always ready to be Loving, compassionate, kind, and helpful at all times, because these qualities (and more) are its very nature. The TS is the part of us which is in Love with Life, is always Joyous, and is always in Awe at the Wonder of the Universe. The TS is the part of us which upholds and treasures freedom and tolerance, and embraces the concept of live and let live. Does all of this sound totally awesome to you? It does to me. The True Self is the True You which is waiting for you to discover It. The TS knows exactly how to create a heaven on earth (and in your life), if only you allow it to do so. We can allow the TS to make our lives wonderful by doing one thingconsistently choosing Love instead of Fear. By constantly choosing to act out of Love in every situation in our lives, we allow the True Self to perform its function in our lives. There is only one thing which can stop the True Self from operating in our lifechoosing to act out of Fear. The TS does not experience Fear, it is foreign to its Nature. The True Self hears only the call of Love. It responds only to Love. The True Self does not hear the call of Fear. Fear is a Vibration which resonates with the other being within usthe Ego or the Selfish Self. THE WAY OF FEAR & THE SELFISH SELF Fear is the path to the dark side. Fear leads to anger. Anger leads to hate. Hate leads to suffering.Yoda, Star Wars Episode 1: The Phantom Menace The Selfish Self is the exact opposite of the True Self. Fear is the best and only friend of the Selfish Self. The actions of the Selfish Self, or SS, are
85
Jason Blanchard
responsible for everything that we despise in ourselves and in others. It is directly responsible for all the pain and suffering in our lives. All of the Evil in the world is the direct result of people choosing Fear instead of Love, and then acting out of that Fear in the form of Evil doings. All the Evil in the world is created this wayby first choosing Fear. Fear is the thing which limits us all. The SS specializes in limiting us, and our actions. That is the very function of Fearto cause limitations and failure right from the very start. The SS stops us in our tracks every time we listen to the call of Fear. And the SS always hears the call of Fear. In fact, the SS is even responsible for sowing the seeds of Fear in our heads, hoping that we listen. The SS is the part of us which keeps us from realizing our dreams and hopes, and keeps us from fulfilling our wishes. The SS is responsible for giving us every excuse to not progress, not move forward and not evolve as Spiritual beings. The Selfish Self is the antithesis of the True Self. The SS is an entity created by Fear and sustained by Fear. It lives in Fear and seeks to continue feeding itself negative Vibrations by enticing us to choose Fear. Choosing Fear is the best way to perpetuate the dominance of the Selfish Self within us. Choosing Love and acting in Loving ways is the only means by which the Selfish Self can be overcome. The SS cannot be killed, since it is a part of us. But the SS can be made into a servant of the Divine Spiritual Will. But this is not the easiest thing to do. After all, the SS has but one objectiveto keep itself alive by feeding itself on the Fear it entices you to choose. And it will do anything to keep you from doing otherwise. THE HIGHWAY TO HELL Im on the Highway to Hell, and Im going down.lyrics from Highway to Hell by AC/DC The only thing we have to fear is Fear itself.US President Franklin Roosevelt It disturbs me to even think about writing this particular chapter, since it concerns Fear, the Selfish Self, and all the Hell they can create in our lives. But a discussion is necessary. I have had great difficulty just beginning at all. Fear does not sit well with me anymore. And writing about it does not appeal to me. These days, I always make the effort to choose Love in my life. But there was a time when I did not know what choosing Love meant. I literally had no clue at all. My whole life was run by Fear and my Selfish Self and I was oblivious to the fact that this was even happening. I look back on those days, and I am amazed that I ever survived, especially during my depression, when suicide was literally a near-constant thought. It was the Will of God that I should make it through the personal hell which I unwittingly created with the help of my Selfish Self.
86
Now, that I have survived the nonsense of my early life, I have come to better understand and comprehend the nature of Love, by the grace of God, by choosing Love, and by using the Science of Meditation. My life is incredibly calm and serene now, even in the midst of trouble, which used to turn my world upside down. My Selfish Self still tries to get me to choose Fear, in ever increasingly refined ways, too. It simply refuses to give up easily to Divine Will and become a willing servant. But I persist each day because I know that one day, it will finally yield and, in a sense, die. This death is considered, in every Spiritual philosophical teaching, the last hurdle, just before full Enlightenment occurs. Once this dark side of the Human being is killed, then the Light of God can fully Illuminate the Spirit. So we must discuss the Selfish Self and Fear and how they function in our lives. As mentioned earlier, the SS lives off of the negative energy, the Vibration of Fear. It can only survive if you choose Fear, thereby allowing the SS to live off the Fear you chose. It is an entity which was created in Fear, lives in Fear and it is that part of you which is afraid of dying. In Truth, the True Self is not afraid to dieit knows death is an illusion, just a transformation into another existence. But the SS is afraid to die, and it will do anything to keep itself from dying. It will do anything to keep itself alive. And this means that it will entice you to choose Fear in every situation possible. It knows all of your weaknesses and will use them against you without a second thought. It will literally create (you are gods, remember?and gods create, even if they dont know they do.) opportunities and situations for you to ignore Love by making the choice of Fear look tempting, easy, even perfectly sane and logical. And it is so easy to be fooled by something which knows you so well. The SS is a master of getting you to look outside of yourself, instead of inward. And when one looks outside, following the dictates of the SS, then literally, all Hell breaks loose. The person who is ruled by the SS not only creates a living Hell for him/herself, but can also be utterly blind and completely oblivious to the Hell which he/she creates for the rest of us. Fear and listening to the Selfish Self are the causes of all the misery in the world. And all of us know this by first hand experience. Follow me for a while, down the Highway to Hell. Just use your Imagination for a few moments. Trust me, this will not be difficult, because, whether you know it or not, all of you have been down this road, and I would dare to say that damned near all of you are still on it. CANT YOU SEE YOURE KILLING ME? Imagine being forced nearly all the time. Imagine being forced to do something which you do not want to do. Imagine being forced against your will to become something which you simply are not. Imagine that other people are constantly trying to mold you into what they think you should be. Imagine you
87
Jason Blanchard
are constantly being harassed to quit your dreams and become like everyone else in the world, who also have no dreams. Imagine being forced and pressured so much, so often, and with such aggressive intensity that you would rather die than go on living. Imagine that those who have power over you rarely, if ever, give you a choice to do what pleases you, and that the choices they eventually give you (if they do) are so unpleasant that they are better left ungiven. Imagine that there are people in your life whose sole mission seems to be nothing less than controlling your life. Imagine being forced out of the only home you have ever known for no other reason than that you were merely attempting to do your own thing. Imagine that nearly all you have known is Fear, control, depression, and utter hopelessness. Imagine that you are repeatedly exposed to an onslaught of Fear, control, stupidity, jealousy, anger, hate, envy, threats, etc. In other words, imagine a general lack of Love in your life. Tell me...Was it so hard to imagine any of this? Has any of this happened to you? Have any of these situations applied to you? Do they still apply? I am sure that absolutely all of you reading this can say yes to at least one of these questions. (If you dare to say no, then please, please, give me directions to this Utopia in which you live!!) As for the rest of us who still live in Hell, take heart, for we are all in the same boat, so to speak. At the very least, you can all take comfort in that you are not alone. In case you were wondering, yes, all of those unpleasant images and situations have applied to me. (Do you really think I would want to imagine this shit for fun?) This living hell was literally a part of my life, practically my whole life at some points. Thankfully it is mostly in my past now, and with the help and Grace of God, I have managed to survive in one piece. I always did my best to choose wisely as to how to react to those unpleasant circumstances. There are still some trying times of course, but they are not so dreadful as they once seemed, once again, thanks to Divine Providence, and my close connection to It. All of these situations were caused by people in my life who consistently choose to listen to Fear, thereby allowing their Ego or Selfish Self to both run and ruin their lives, not to mention running and ruining others lives as well, including mine. Remember, Fear feeds the Selfish Self. Anger and Force are its weapons of defense. Distrust is its reason for using Force. The SS needs Fear to live, distrusts anyone or anything (because Trust is of God and the Way of Love), and it uses Force to get what it wantsmore fuel in the form of Fear. And the SS does not care who it hurts in the process of keeping itself alive.
88
CHOICES, CHOICES, CHOICES You must choose, but choose wisely.the old knight, Indiana Jones and the Last Crusade Here are three rather graphic examples of situations with choices to make. In each, you imagine you are an authority figure, a parent, teacher, and a priest. Just follow along, and notice what you would choose to do as the stories unfold. A DREAM DATE Mr. Sandman, bring me a dream.the Chordettes All right, lets first imagine you are a parent. Lets say your daughter asks you for permission to go on a date this weekend. Your choice as a parent is simply yes or no. She tells you that her new love interest is named Chris. Your daughter is rather excited about her new love interest. They have been friends ever since Chris recently transferred to her school. Your daughter has been on dates before. There have never been any previous problems, and you dont see any reason not to let her go, so you give your permission. This makes your little girl very happy of course. And so, Friday finally arrives, and your daughters date comes calling. Surprise!! Chris is a girl!! Well, you never expected this. Your daughter never mentioned this, but then again, you didnt askyou just assumed Chris was a boy. Now, remember, you have already given your permission earlier in the week. Your daughter could have easily sneaked behind your back and secretly dated Chris anyway, but she didnt. Instead, your daughter has chosen not to lie to herself, or to you, about who and what she really is. So now, standing in front of you is something you never expecteda teenage girl, who obviously shares a certain similar characteristic as your daughter. But does it even matter that your little girl prefers little girls? How do you react? What do you do? Do you stick by your earlier decision of giving permission? Or do you suddenly take back the permission you granted and lock up your daughter in her room for life? How would you react? No matter how you look at it, there are only two choices, or two ways to go about this. Act out of Love, allow your True Self to come through, accept your daughter as she is, and allow her the freedom to live her life, no matter if you consider her behavior a deviant lifestyle, or a perfectly normal lifestyle, albeit a not-so-common one. Or you can act out of Fear, allow your Selfish Self to run your life, and refuse to let your daughter go anywhere with Chris, and forbid her to ever see that freak again. Your choice will indicate whether your True Self or your Selfish Self is controlling you. Choose carefully. Your decision will affect not only whether you allow your TS or SS to control your life, but it will also greatly affect your
89
Jason Blanchard
daughters mental and emotional health, possibly for the rest of her life. Your decision may determine whether or not your daughter will need to visit a therapist in the years to come, because she thinks that there is something wrong with herall because you let your Fear and your SS stop her from making what you thought, in your finite wisdom, was a mistake. One unwise decision may be a direct influence on your daughters eventual decision to commit suicide. Sound extreme? Sound unbelievable? Too badshit happens. And in this case, one foolish decision can make you the origin of the feces, or one wise decision can make you the most beloved parent in history. Choose wisely. What would God, the Perfect Parent, do? Let me enlighten you. God would do exactly what God always does with youallow you the freedom to do anything you want. God always does this at all times in all situations in every conceivable circumstance. As long as you dont have any major Karma (more on that in the Chapter on Karma) which prevents you from doing certain things, then you can rest assured that God does not forbid you to do whatever you want. God allowsperiod!! Do you want to be like the Perfect Parent? Or will you do what your Fear and your Selfish Self tempt you to do? Two decisions. Two Waysone requiring total Love and allowance of Freedom, offering the greatest opportunity for happiness and growth; the other Way, based in Fear, which limits freedom and happiness, and offers the greatest possibility for catastrophic consequences in the long run. Which Self do you listen to? Which of the Two Ways do you go? What choice do you make? BE TRUE TO YOUR SCHOOL We dont need no education.lyrics from Another Brick in the Wall Pt. 2 by Pink Floyd Imagine you are a teacher in our nations school system. There is an English language fair coming in a few weeks, and you decide to give your students an assignment for the fairwrite a paper on what they think is the greatest problem with our society. Surprise!! Among the many papers your students turn in, is one whose subject is a relentless, inflammatory attack on the entire school system. The paper is filled with accusations against every single level of the whole educational system. One complaint after another. One allegation after another. One criticism after another. No section of the educational system is left untouched. No level of administration is left unscrutinized. This kid really did his homework. You think that this paper, though disturbing in tone, is absolutely brilliant. And most importantly, since you are a teacher with many years of experience in the inner workings of the system, you know that every word in this paper is the Truth.
90
But, in your mind, there is a problemthe English fair papers for this assignment are being judged by the members of the School Board, the top administrators in your section of the state. Fear!! You think to yourself, The judges who will read this paper are the highest officials in the system, the very bosses of my own boss. What will they think if they read this? Fear and Worry creep into your mind. You Worry about losing your job for allowing such a paper to be entered into the fair. You Fear that the welfare of your school might be in jeopardy. You Fear that the reputation of the very system which employs you might be insulted. This fair is open to the publicwhat will the public think if they read this? The students parents? Oh, what a quandary!! Or so you think. Is there really a problem here? Or is the problem within you? Who are you listening to? Your Selfish Self, or your True Self? What are they each saying to you? Your Selfish Self fills you with Fear and Worry about this predicament. Your SS tells you that you will lose your job if you allow this paper. It says you will suffer endlessly in the days to come at the hands of other teachers and the school principal who will surely condemn your foolish actions. The SS also tells you that this sniveling, whining student should shut the hell up and graciously accept the education the system is giving him for free. After all, he was insulting his elders with this paper. How dare he? Children should be seen and not heard!! Even though you know the system could be better, you simply dont want to rock the boat and, in your selfishly self-centered Selfish Selfs selfishness, you will be damned before you let some uneducated kid ruin your life with one accusational paper. In short, the SS says No way!! Such is the two cents of the Selfish Self. Your True Self, on the other hand, has no problem with the materialafter all, the paper is filled with Truth and you know it. Your TS wants you to turn in the paper as an official entry into the fair to be judged. Your TS knows that this Truth will be read specifically by those people who most need to hear itthe leaders of the system. Only they will be able to effect the changes necessary to better the schools. Your TS tells you to allow the student the freedom to express his disgust with an educational system which is supposedly serving his need for an education. This student is keenly aware that the system is not functioning efficiently, and its efforts at teaching him are failing, as are some of his classmates. Your TS knows all of this. It tells you to act out of Love, allow the student his right to free speech, and enter the paper to be judged in the English fair. Which Self do you listen to? Which of the Two Ways do you go? What choice do you make?
91
Jason Blanchard
PRACTICE WHAT YOU PREACH Practice what you preach!!lyrics from Practice What You Preach by Testament God bless those Pagans.Homer Simpson Ready for one more? Imagine you are a priest. You are much respected by your flock. During your sermons, the congregation hangs on your every word. You preach among other things, the message that Jesus preached and exemplified with his life, that of Love, kindness, and tolerance. Everything is just fine until one day a member of the church comes to your door to inform you that she is changing her religion. She is a teenage girl, a daughter of one of your church members. You have known this teenage girl for a few years. You ask her why she is changing her religion. She says that she has been privately studying your current religion for some time now and is feeling uncomfortable about it. She states that she feels that the religion of your church does not respect women, and likely never has. She further expresses herself by saying that the church and its religion seem to view women as second-class beings. She also asserts that she has been researching the history of the religion and has learned that this negative opinion towards women is nothing new. It is centuries old, she says, and she learned that at one point in the churchs history, the top theologians of the time actually debated whether or not women even had souls, and determined that, indeed, women were soul-less. You are stunned that this young woman is saying this. The Truth is you also know about these unpleasant facts when you studied to be a priest. It was required of you to learn the history of the church, and so you know that everything she is saying is the Truthyou just never expected her to find out. All of these findings are disturbing her deeply. She tells you that she no longer wishes to be connected to a religion which has such a long history of offense towards her particular half the population. This is all rather abrupt and shockingyou never expected this. You ask her what religion, if any, she is now considering. She answers you that she wishes to join a nature-based religion, extremely ancient in origin, which worships outdoors, respects and celebrates the earth and its life-sustaining qualities, and most, importantly, views women as the equals of men. The overall motto of this religion, she says, is simply to do as you will with your life, as long as you dont set out to intentionally harm anyone in the process. She declares that everyone in this religion is accepted into the religion as they are, and allowed to grow, evolve, and discover themselves in an atmosphere of kindness, tolerance and Love. At the very least, this young woman has the courtesy to inform you that she will not be attending your church anymoresomething she is not at all required to do. Once again, only Two Ways, two choices.
92
Your Selfish Self is going berserk in light of this announcement, and begins its assault of Fear and Worry. This teenager has just offended you and everything you have learned and believed. How dare this mere girl say such terrible things against the long tradition of your religion and its church? So what if women have not been treated equally? Your Selfish Self quickly reminds you that your Bible declares that God created man first, and woman was created not directly from God, but from the body of the man. That is why men have been so dominant for so long!! It has been ordained that way since the very beginning. And Jesus, the central figure of the religion, was a man, just like you. Women played no part in any of these historical events. That is why only men are priests. Your SS immediately tells you that if word of this gets out, the embarrassment will be tremendous. You Fear that everyone in your church will discover that you lost one of your young female members to a religion that sounds like some kind of wacky paganism. You Worry that other members will lose faith in your ability to tend to your flock. Oh, God, what will your fellow priests think? And what about the girls parents? Will they ever forgive you for not saving their daughters soul? Would they leave the church too, disgusted with you? You cant allow this to happen!! Your SS demands that you to start giving any excuse to this young feminist know-it-all to keep her right here where she belongs. After all, you studied the ways of God, not her. What does she know? Your SS begins throwing a barrage of reasons, excuses and even threats of damnation, for you to give to this faithless foolanything to make her stay in your church, and keep things the way they are. Your True Self, on the other hand, is delighted for this young woman. Your TS knows that she is a Spiritual do-it-yourself-er, and is happy for her. It applauds her efforts at learning the history of her religion, and informing herself of the Truth. Your TS says to allow her the freedom to do as she desires, to follow her heart and make her life happy, no matter what actions that entails. Your TS tells you to act out of Love, and allow her the freedom to live her life. It urges you to tolerate her decision and wish her well. Your True Self also reminds you that the man, Jesus, of which you speak in your church, preached Love, kindness and tolerance. Your TS implores you to practice what you preach. In short, your TS wants to say to her, You go, girl!! Follow your heart!! Follow your bliss!! Which Self do you listen to? Which of the Two Ways do you go? What choice do you make? WHAT IF? Interesting scenarios, huh? Trust me, it happens all the time. Choices abound in life. You will encounter situations in your life concerning career, marriage, children, where you live, whether or not to buy a satellite dish, a car, or
93
Jason Blanchard
a Playboy magazine. The choices are endless. All manner of situations are presented to you throughout your life, situations which offer Spiritual growth, and evolution. Sometimes the choices we must make seem very weighty and significant, and other times, they seem like minor matters. But no decisions are ever trivial or totally without consequences. Sometimes, in our lives, the smallest choice we make can have tremendously long-lasting effects. Even the smallest verbal comment may turn someones life around, for better or worse, depending on the comment. Just Imagine if someone had chosen to tell the young painter, Adolf Hitler, that his works of art were genius, instead of keeping the comment to him/herself. Just a quick word or two of praise, thats all. If that had happened, then 20th century history just might have recorded the wonderful career of a quiet and brilliant artist, whose trademark was a stupid-looking mustache. Think about it.IT COULD HAVE HAPPENED. One kind word to someone just might prevent a future World War. Nothing we do, no choice we make, is ever without its consequences. For the Love of God, CHOOSE WISELY!! Freedom comes when you learn to let go.lyrics from The Power of Goodbye, by Madonna There are Two Ways in lifeThe Way of Love and the Way of Fear. Every choice you make determines whether you are listening to your True Self, or your Selfish Self. Your choices are a dead giveaway in revealing if you live your life in Love or Fear. Living in Love is incredibly easy, though it may seem difficult at times to make this Choice. But really, how much effort does it take to live in Love and allow your True Self to make your life blissful? How much effort does it take to let go and let God? Letting go takes very little effort indeedsimply release your Fear which is holding you. Letting go is easy. Why not Trust God with your life, your happiness? Do you honestly believe you can control everything around you, in order to make your own life better? Oh, please!! That is the Selfish Self talking. In Truth, you cannot control everything around you and there is no need to do so. God is in charge of all things. God does not want you to have to worry about controlling everything. God takes care of things so you can enjoy your life and follow your dreams and your hearts desire. There is a Spiritual Axiom which states that if you concern yourself with God and Inner Spirit firstly, then everything else in your life will take care of itself. In other words, take care of Number One (God, the Inner Spirit) and Number One (God, the Inner Spirit) will take care of you. The notion that you must control your entire environment is a trap of the Selfish Self. Cant you see? The Selfish Self wants you to focus on controlling the outside, because if you focus on the inside, you may just wind up listening to the True Self, listening to Love, and Trusting God. Fear makes us dis-Trust God
94
and Love, makes us repress our True Self. The Selfish Self demands to have control of that which it cannot control anywaythe outside world. The SS seeks to rule the outside world because it knows that if you focus your attention on the outside world, then the inside world (where it lives) will not be threatened. Clever little thing, isnt it? Stop looking outside of yourselves!! Stop trying to control what cannot be controlled. Focus your attention inward, and listen to your True Self when it talks to you. Trust God, Trust Love, Trust your SELF. ###
95
Jason Blanchard
CHAPTER 14 A BRUTALLY TRUTHFUL EXAMINATION OF EVIL, AS TOLD BY EVIL ITSELF

The fool who persists in his ways, becomes a wise man indeed. I am going to step out of the way for one chapter, and let Evil speak its mind in fiery, unrestrained, Truthful commentary. CALLING ALL IDIOTS, MORONS, AND GENERALLY STUPID PEOPLE Hear me, Oh, stupid and ignorant humans!! And I am talking to every damned one of you!! Lend me your ear and I, Evil Itself, Lord of All Evil, Master of the Low and Dense Vibrations, will Enlighten you as to the True Cause of All Evil. I tell you Now, that ever since the very Beginning, and unto the very End, the True Cause of All Evil was, is, and always shall be...You, yourselves!! Surprised? Well, join the club. Pitiful few of you fools ever learn this Truth, this Absolute Truth. But as for the rest of you who are so shocked (and I am sure All of you are) to learn that You are the True Cause of All Evil, Ive got some things to tell your ignorant asses. So sit down, shut up and listen hard (or read carefully) for once in your miserable lives and you may just learn something. And if you do happen to learn something, then with any luck, you dumb humans may just screw up and do something ingenious, like create a perfect, peaceful, paradise or something (heaven forbid!!). I, Evil will now give you a brief, but blatantly brilliant discourse on the Nature of Evil, by answering the what, who, when, why, where, and how of Evil, since you are all so fond of asking these questions, but never bother to get off your dead asses and on your dying feet to attempt to find the answers. So, since you dumb-asses are already sitting on your dumb asses...read on, and hear what Evil has to say. Are you listening? WHAT EVIL IS So what the Hell is Evil anyway? Evil is what I am. Pure Evil. Where Evil exists, there am I, because Evil is Me. Evil is My businessand thanks to all of you fools, business is good. And, since I am such an expert on Evil (it is My one and only job description) My definition of Evil is thisthat which is called Evil is nothing more than the opposite of that which is called Good. Simple enough. Were you expecting something profound? Good and Evil are nothing but
96
opposites of exactly the same thing. They are polar opposites, and cannot exist separately. But if this definition is not good enough for you, then in more human terms, you may define Evil as that which counteracts, balances, or limits the presence of Good. Really, that is about as simple and effective a definition as I can provide. I could also say the same about GoodGood is that which counteracts, balances or limits the presence of Evil. Thats simple enough, isnt it? Good and Evil exist simultaneously. They cannot exist apart from one another. Without one, how would you know about the other? Hey, if it werent for Me, how in Hell would you even know what Good is? Exposure to Evil is what makes you all want to be better people. I let you know what Good is by vividly displaying what Good is notEvil!! I am your Dark Teacher. Remember, there can be no Light without Darkness. It is utterly impossible to eradicate Me from existence, so dont even try. I am protected by Universal Law, and your lousy, lowly courts cannot supersede the Giver of Universal Law. So there!! But, dont freak out and throw in the towel just yet. There is hope for you still. You see, though you may live in an Evil-filled world, you yourself dont have to be Evil, even though Evil is a part of you always. Confused? Just read on, and pay attention just as carefully as you pay your bills. WHO IS EVIL You see My presence in the world and it makes you ill, and you complain of the Evil in the world. You see people hurting each other in ever increasingly ingenious ways nearly every day. And yet, what do you do to stop the presence of Evil in your world? Obviously, not enough. Evil lurks in your world still. I am doing my job all over your planet, overseeing all Evil activities. I do my job very well, and there is plenty of work for Me to do. And I am required to do my work. After all, you provided all the employment for Me. You yourself are responsible for the Evil in your world. Whats that you say? Not me? Well, oh, so sorry to burst your comfortable little ignorant bubble, but Evil is present on your world because It can only live in you, and you are responsible for creating It. Remember what one of your Spiritual Masters said some 2000 years ago, If you are not with me, you are against me. Shall I put it another way? If you do not somehow, in some way, actively serve the Light, then you are, at least in some indirect way, serving the Darkness, if only out of your nonparticipation in the Light. I, Evil, am active in your world for one reason and one reason only you are stupid enough to let Me be here. Surprise!! Did you know that? All of the Evil which plagues your world is Caused by You because you allow my presence in the first place. Think about it!! God gave you a brainSo use the Goddamn thing!! Think for once, and you will know this is True. There are two sayings on your planet which illustrate what I am telling you fools. The first saying comes from the Eastern mind. If we dont change direction, we will end
97
Jason Blanchard
up where we are going. The second saying comes from the Western mind. All that is needed for Evil to triumph is for good people to do nothing against it. Two sayings from two sides of the globe. And yet, One meaning. You and you alone are responsible for the Evil in your world by simply allowing its presence to go unchecked. Evil can only exist inside of you, in your minds and hearts. And when it finds a home there, then you are only one small step away from creating Evil, manifesting Evil in your world. This is where I come in, of course. WHEN So exactly when does Evil come into the world? Once you are stupid enough, ignorant enough, and simply not vigilant enough to stop the presence of Evil at its very inception within yourselves, then you have already opened the door for Me to come in and urge you with all My power to Physically manifest this Evil spark within you into a blazing firestorm of Hell right on your Earth. Surprise!! Hell is not some place to go to after you die (I would know of such a place if it really existed), Hell is a place you stupid, ignorant fools create in Physical reality when you are idiotic enough to let Evil exist, firstly, in your minds and hearts, and then secondly, to let this mere conception of Evil manifest into your world which then causes all kinds of suffering. Since I am Evil and hence, know all about Evil (I know Myself...can you say the same of yourself?), I will enlighten you. Evil exists when you allow it to exist. Period. You humans are gods. One of your Spiritual Masters said so right to your faceswerent you even listening? Gods create. Since you are gods, what you envision, you can create. What you imagine, you create. Do you think that all those buildings in your cities just popped up out of nowhere? Of course not. Someone had to imagine the building in question and then do what was necessary to manifest it. And so it goes with architecture. What about Evil? Is Evil what you are building? Think about it!! Evil cannot possibly exist until someone first imagines itwhen someone thinks Evil thoughts. WHY Evil of all sorts plague your world. All of you have suffered the effects of Evil deeds and actions and even Evil thoughts at one time or another. And, for centuries, you foolish humans have been asking questions about this Evil which pervades your worldwhy Evil exists, why it persists, etc., etc. You just keep droning on and on like broken records, asking the same questions again and again, yet so few of you ever bother to really look for the answers to these questions. And even fewer of you ever really discover the answers. And that is not a good track record at all. In fact, it is downright lousy. Arent you
98
embarrassed by now? How many eons of time have you buffoons been here on Earth now? And in all that time, it seems like only one in a million of you ever seem to learn the Cause of All Evil. You fools have such limited sight!! Always looking in the wrong place!! Every single time you witness something you call Evil, the first thing you do is place blame. And who or what do you blame? Anyone or anything but yourself, of course!! So quick to look for the why of Evil, and even quicker to make the same dumb mistake over and over again always looking outside of yourselves for the Cause of Evil. Just what the Hell are you looking for when you look around for someone or something else to blame for Evil? You never look at your own damned selves!! Always playing the blame game. Blame your family, friends, co-workers, employers, politicians, rock n roll music, homosexuals, teenagers, or even the girl scouts, but never yourself!! Why blame myself, you ask? Why not, I say!! For practically your whole existence on this planet, you have blamed anything and anyone other than yourselves for causing Evil in your world, whether it be the imaginary bogey man, your imaginary Devil, or your President for absolutely everything you call Evil. Always pointing your fingers, blaming those assholes. Well, I am here to tell all of you assholes where to stick your damned fingers. Why has Evil been so prevalent on your world? Because you have looked for its Cause in the wrong place. So where is Evil exactly? Read on. WHERE Look here. I said it before. Evil starts with You. Only You are capable of Evil. Evil exists only in You. You are the where of Evil. Evil needs a Physical body to begin manifesting Physical action in the Physical world. Look around you. Do you think there would be so much Evil if absolutely none of you humans were here? Would there be any war? Would there be any hate? How about intolerance, bigotry, slavery, revenge, genocide, oppression, prejudice, discrimination, injustice, etc., etc. Would there actually be any of this sort of Evil if you humans werent here? Of course not!! There would be nothing but animals and plants populating the Earth. And do they treat each other the way you treat your fellow humans? Oh sure, animals may fight with each other sometimes, and do their best to survive, but do they intentionally treat each other that way? Of course not!! Do they intentionally plan and organize violent military campaigns against other animals simply because they dont like the color of their fur? Or is an animals behavior just what you happen to call survival instinct? Are you not more than this? Were you not created by God in the Divine Image of God, to be Divine gods? Are you not more than the Goddamn animals?!?! Didnt that Spiritual Master you have called the Son of God also ask you the same question? Wake the Hell up!! How long are you going to behave like animals? How long are you going to allow Me to live in your hearts
99
Jason Blanchard
and minds? Idiots!! Such Fools!! If you wont take any advice from the Pure and Holy Spiritual People from all ages, then you might as well listen to Me, Evil itself. Now that you know the what, who, when, why, and where of Evil, read on very carefully and learn how you yourselves manifest every last damn shred of Evil in your little self-created Hell-on-Earth. HOW All right now. Lets recap. The what of EvilEvil is the polar opposite of Good. The who of Evilyou yourselves are Evil. The when of Evilprecisely when you think in Evil ways. The why of Evilbecause you look for Evil outside of yourselves instead of looking inside. The where of EvilEvil is within you; it can only exist in you. So how does this all come together? Let us begin at the beginning. I, Evil do not exist in your world until you choose to allow Me to exist here. Yes, that is right, you choose to let Evil exist. In all Truth, you invite Me here. You provide the opportunities for Me. How could I resist an invitation? You invite Evil into your hearts and minds all the time, you just never notice. And I never refuse such an invitation. If only you dummies would keep your guard up against Evil thoughts, then you would not cause so much trouble for yourselves and others. Here is an example. When, during your day to day activities, you happen to think of something which is not becoming of such gods as you are, in other wordswhen you think Evil thoughts, then you have invited Me to make home in your brain. That is all it takes!! One Evil thought, and I am in the door. When was the last time you asked Me to come into your life? Answerthe last time you had an Evil thought!! The last time you thought about how much you hated someone you know or someone you dont even know (you idiots!!), I was there. The last time you merely fancied an unkind thought about anyone or anything at all, I showed up. I know you all quite well by now, since all of you have had some unloving or hateful thoughts about someone, or something for nearly all of your lives. I know what makes you all tick by now. Once you allow Me inside of you, I know exactly how to make you continue thinking Evil thoughts. That is the only way I can survive in your worldto convince you, using all my abilities and powers, to keep thinking Evil thoughts, which keeps me hanging around. And hopefully, with enough persistence, I can convince you to actually act out what you are thinking. This is My job, you understandto somehow convince you to manifest Me in the Physical world. I cant help myself, you see. And you are so ignorant and so oblivious to My presence, that you dont even know I am there until it is too latewhen you have already manifested or acted out your Evil thoughts. (Besides rarely bothering to think in the first place, you dummies sometimes actually think that something cannot possibly exist until you finally
100
notice its Physical presence.) And then you fools look at what you yourself did, and (all together now) blame someone else. Dont you talking monkeys ever take responsibility for your own actions? Hey, I had a tough childhood. But my job is so stressful. And one of my favorites: The devil made me do it. Geez, what bullshit!! I dont know who is more moronic, the people who think up these pathetic excuses, or those who actually believe such absurdity. Dont you buffoons ever learn? One Evil thought is how it can all begin, which can then be manifested or created in the form of the smallest personal insult to the biggest nuclear conflagration. Yes, I know how to push every last one of your buttons and make you go ballistic (pun intended). Instead of maintaining constant vigilance against the tiniest Evil thought, you let your minds run wild like a bunch of insane monkeys, affected by everything you can see, hear, feel, experience, etc. And because of this lack of alertness on your part, at some point during the day, invariably, you happen to think Evil thoughts. And guess Who shows up when that happens? Lesson to be learned: Keep a watch out for any Evil thought popping up in your mind, because that is all it takes for Evil to appear. You talking monkeys could learn so much from those three wise monkeyssee no Evil, hear no Evil, speak no Evil. Evil does not exist until you choose to give It your time, energy and attention. DO NOT entertain Evil in your thoughts, and I will not appear in your thoughts. Thinking Evil thoughts is not the only way to invite Evil into your lives. There is another way to let Me into your world which deserves explanation invite me into your heart. This path is more insidious than the first (thinking of Evil) and difficult to control, once the process has begun. And to some extent, the two different methods are connected. But here is how emotions can start a firestorm of Evil. All I really need here is for you to begin feeling Evil emotions about anything which excites these Evil emotions. What arouses your Evil feelings of selfishness, jealousy, vengeance, hate, etc.? Whatever it is, as it applies to you, once you are exposed to your catalyst and you react with Evil emotions, I am there. And, if you are not mindful of your reactions, you could end up re-acting in the most horrific ways. Emotions are so powerful. They are literally energy (e) in motion, e-motion. And once fired, they are hard for most humans to control, much to my delight. Have you ever tried to extinguish a fire fed by explosive chemicals or highly flammable fuel? You get the idea. Such is the same with emotions, whether they be good or bad. Once the energy of e-motions is moving, it is nearly impossible to stop. Once excited, it is terribly easy for you to re-act to your emotions and manifest Evil into the Physical world. And so you humans screw up once again, only this time, instead of your brain losing control of its thoughts, your emotional heart bypasses the logical control of your brain, and thus you re-act in foolish ways. Instead of elevating yourselves to a level in
101
Jason Blanchard
which absolutely nothing can even cause Evil e-motional outbursts, you foolishly let various things in life upset you and cause all kinds of havoc and mayhem, disturbing your equilibrium. Lesson to be learnedyou simply must learn to stabilize your e-motional selves so that absolutely nothing can arouse Evil emotional feelings. (May I suggest meditation?) Otherwise, guess whos coming to dinner? IN SUMMARY You are gods. So said some guy so many years ago, which so many people swear by, but obviously, still dont listen to, much less understand. Jesus, why dont you people act like the gods you are? Dont you human-gods ever learn? Nearly all of you have been so stupid for so long. Here is an accurate definition of stupiditydoing the same thing over and over, and expecting a different result. Thus far, in your evolution (term used loosely, to be sure), damn near all of you still fit this definition of stupidity. Evil exists because you are not vigilant enough to stop It once It has first appeared. Think about thisif no one had Evil thoughts, no one would take the next step and do Evil things. And think about thisif nothing could arouse Evil emotions, then no one would react in Evil ways. Sometimes, the answers are so simple, arent they? I am not surprised if you are surprised to learn such simple Truth about Evil. So few of you ever think in the first place, that damn near anything will surprise you. But there have been those in your history who did think. There have been those who did get off their dead asses and on their dying feet, and learned the Truth. There have been those who did get off their dead feet, sat on their dying asses, and Meditated. There have been those few Enlightened Ones who did learn by their own efforts about the Cause of All Evil, not to mention so much more than you can possibly imagine. And almost without fail, every single time these precious few Illuminated human-gods spoke out against what the rest of you were doing wrong, your re-action was almost always the sameyou murdered them!! Repeatedly, throughout your history, you have thoughtlessly and heartlessly murdered the only ones capable of teaching you the Truth. Saints, sages, holy people, even the one you called the Son of Godyou have murdered them all for speaking the Truth. The Truth they spoke sparked your Evil thoughts and ignited your Evil emotions, because you let Me convince you in any way possible not to listen to their Truth. The Truth they spoke about Me threatened My very existence. These Enlightened Ones were motivated by Love, by God, which are One and the Same. God is Love, remember? These Beloved Ones of God threatened My existence by telling all of you the Truth about Evil, about Me. Obviously, I did a good job convincing you not to listen, since you murdered practically every one of them who tried to spread Light amidst the Darkness you yourselves created.
102
So why am I now telling you all this? Why would I speak the Truth about what I do, and stand to lose My grip on so many of you? Because God wants you to know the Truth, and if you will not listen to the Truth spoken by your Holy Ones, then maybe, just maybe, you will listen to the Truth about Me if it is spoken by Me!! Who knows Me better than Me? Who knows My effect on you better than the Evil One who is responsible for these effects in the first place? And if that doesnt work, then there Truly is no hope for you. So what do I have to lose? Even if you happen to listen to My teachings here, and defeat My presence in yourselves, I will still exist!! I am protected by Universal Law, remember? All you need do for your own benefit, and everyone elses also, is to keep Me from taking hold of you. That is all you have to do to create a Heaven on Earthjust keep Me from working through you. What do you have to lose if you listen to My little speech here? You stand to looseprejudice, discrimination, intolerance, bigotry, selfishness, revenge, slavery, violence, war, genocide, oppression, injustice, torture,...you get the idea? Arent you idiots tired of this shit by now? Wake up and smell the sewer of your own creation!! You are the origin of the feces!! If you do not listen to the Truth and learn the Truth, then you do not deserve the Love of God and the Light of God which the Truth brings. If you do not listen to God, then you do not deserve God. If you do not listen to the discourse spoken by Good, then will you listen to the same discourse spoken by Evil? The Truth is the same either way. Will you now listen? Hear me, Oh, stupid and ignorant humans!! I, Evil Itself, Lord of All Evil, Master of the Low and Dense Vibrations, have Now Enlightened you as to the True Cause of All Evil. I have told you Now, that ever since the very Beginning, and unto the very End, the True Cause of All Evil was, is, and always shall be...You, yourselves!!...you idiots. ###
103
Jason Blanchard
CHAPTER 15 TRANSFORMATION, BEGINNINGS, ENDINGS & THE IMPERMANENCE OF ALL THINGS

Change we must, as surely time does.lyrics from Nous Sommes Du Soleil, by Yes Changes arent permanent, but Change is.lyrics from Tom Sawyer, by Rush Nothing lasts forever. It is a Universal Truth. And I can accept this Fact. Truly, there is no permanence to anything in our lives. (If I had a dollar for every burned-out light bulb I have ever changed in my life...) All things pop into existence, stay for a while, and then terminate their tenure here in the Universe. Even our Universe will not last forever. I think most of us have heard of the Big Bang theory. It states that our known Universe began with a huge explosion, and has expanded outwards ever since, which would explain why all the galaxies in our Universe are moving away from each other. Because of insufficient data, scientists are still divided in opinion on whether our Universe will keep expanding, or will cease expansion and result in a Big Crunch, meaning that the Universe will shrink back into whatever the hell it was...and then, the cycle begins again with another Big Bang. Please, dont lose sleep over this. If the Big Crunch does happen, it wont be in your lifetime,...at least not this one. BIRTH...DEATHAS DIFFERENT AS NIGHT AND DAY? The Impermanence of All Things is a Universal Truth. Absolutely everything comes into existence, stays for a while, and then ceases to exist. To say it another way, everything is born, lives and dies. God knows that is true with us humans. Seems we dont have enough time to do a damned thing before we check off the planet. But at least we get to come back through the Cycle of Reincarnation (more on that in the chapter on Reincarnation). The Cycle of Reincarnation reminds me of the similarities between Birth and Death. I can hear you now... Similarities?!?,...What have you been smoking? Trust me. ENTER, STAGE RIGHT Breathe in the air.lyrics from Breathe, by Pink Floyd No matter what experiences we have throughout our lives, no matter how varied they are from everyone elses, there is at least one experience we all sharewe all experienced birth. This fact will hold True until someone, somewhere, grows a full-sized baby in a test tube, or clones a human in a Pitre dish. But I wont hold my breath for that. All of us were born. Have you ever
104
wondered just what the Birth experience is like, from the babys perspective? Use your Imagination again, and get ready for a wild ride. Ah...another day in the womb.Homer Simpson All right. So there you are, so snugly and warm, suspended in the amniotic fluid, inside of your mommys tummy, curled up in a fetal position, just enjoying the total sense of peace that you have known for so long. Then, one fine day, you notice that something is not right. It is harder to get the oxygen you need. Now you are experiencing something foreign to youpain. This sucks!! And as if that were not bad enough, you also notice suddenly that the walls seem as if they are collapsing in on you!! Ahhhh!! What the hell is this? More pain!! First, it became hard to breathe, now the walls are closing in. To hell with this!! You dont like this at all. Its time to evacuate this joint!! It was a pleasant stay, but under the current circumstances, anywhere but here would be a nice place to go to, you figure. Just as you think this, you see a light slowly growing from one particular direction in this previously dark chamber. You turn towards this light. Hopefully, it is a way out. You notice a sort of tunnel forming as the light source grows before you. You continue to turn towards the light, wanting to leave this currently disagreeable environment. You then feel a sense of movement towards the light, slowly at first, then a little quicker, all the while this light is getting brighter, and incredibly intense. The light is so bright and overpowering, that it hurts your eyes, and it is only getting brighter. What is this light?, you keep thinking. Where am I going? I never knew there was something beyond this world I have known. Despite this uncertainty, you continue to move through this tunnel of light. The sense of movement in the tunnel is faster and faster, and the light grows brighter and brighter. Then, abruptly, the tunnel ends, and you find yourself in alien surroundings, awash in a massive field of blinding light, so bright it hurts your eyes. Your senses are assaulted with new sensations. So much light here!! You have never seen such light before. How could light of such intensity even exist? You squint your tiny eyes in a vain effort to shield yourself. And you think to yourselfWhere am I? What is this place? You hear sounds, but not distant and muffled like before. These sounds are incredibly loud, clear and piercing. It hurts your little ears. By now, you have taken your first breath, and because of the unfamiliarity and discomfort of the new sensations you are experiencing, this first breath then comes out of you in a very loud way. And even the sound of your own voice is strange, and it is also very loud. So much pain here in this irritatingly loud, physically uncomfortable place. What is this place? Where have I come to?
105
Jason Blanchard
It feels different here. It is not warm, inviting, and relaxing like it was a few moments ago. It feels colder, things feel heavier, including you, and you find it impossible to move. You feel so uncomfortable here. Where am I? Then you notice something which seems to ease all the pain into this new traumatic existence. You feel something warm wrapping around your body, which feels so much more comfortable than the cold clammy sensation you were just exposed to. You also hear a sound which is somehow familiar. It sounds like a louder and clearer version of that pleasant sound you have been hearing for so long now. This sound had always been pleasing and soothing to you before, and though this sound is more vibrant and sharper now, its very familiar tone pleases your ears, and comforts you even more. You open your eyes slowly, wincing from the intense light all around you, and you see something which grabs your attention. Whatever it is, you respond to ita bi-symmetrical shape, which seems to be the source of the comforting sound you now hear. This image you now see also seems to be responsible for the comforting warmth you feel. What could that image be? It is so much bigger than you, so incredible looking, and yet it makes you feel so comfortable. Am I a part of this thing I now see? Did I actually come from this figure? Could this be the reason why its visual form, sound and physical warmth feel so wonderful, so familiar? And then you notice something incredible, something which totally grabs your attention. You feel, with your entire being, as though you are being filled with an Energy, a wonderful, tremendous, fantastic Vibration you cant even understand. This Energy seems to be coming from the form you are now seeing. You dont know exactly what this Energy is, but it makes you feel welcomed, cherished, adored. This amazing Energy fills you with a sense of peace, serenity, harmony, and total bliss. This Energy makes you feel just like you did before this whole ordeal began. This Energy makes you feel Loved. You never knew that Love is what you were feeling for so long before this wild ride began. You now realize that during those days in the warm, silent darkness, you were always surrounded with this Energy, this Love. This Love floods your whole being, permeates your very Soul. There is no escaping this Energy coming from this being in front of youand why would you want to? Now you feel absolutely wonderful. The comfort you are now experiencing induces you to stop reacting vocally. You can also breathe easily now. Everything is fine again. Whatever the hell just happened is now over, thankfully. Now in the presence of this being holding you, you feel like yourself againhappy, warm, relaxed, peaceful, and Loved. Now the wild ride is over, and all is well again. You realize where you are, where you have come toSurely, I have come Home.
106
EXIT, STAGE LEFT This is the end.lyrics from The End, by the Doors No matter what experiences we have throughout our lives, no matter how varied they are from everyone elses, there is another experience we will all sharewe will all experience death. This fact will hold True even if, through a deep connection to God, one achieves physical immortality. Though physical immortality may seem impossible, it has, in fact, already been accomplished by Humans on this planet, both in the past and currently in the present. I know some simply will not believe such a thing, but belief is inconsequential when the Truth is concerned. With God, anything is possible,...remember? But as you may guess, physical immortality is a rare thing indeed, but the reason for that is plain. In order for one to even have the possibility of physical immortality, one must first connect with God completely; one must achieve Enlightenment, or Illumination first. And there simply arent many Illuminated and Enlightened humans walking around these days, hence, not many immortals, or miracle workers, and so on. Nevertheless, even those who manage to achieve physical immortality will still die one day. But they know that death is not the end, just as the experience of a babys birth is not the end of life as the baby knows it, but is the beginning of a new life in a new existence, a world previously unknown to the baby. All of us will die, but death is only the end of being trapped in a gross, physical body. Death is a release from the pain of living in the Physical world. Have you ever heard of the Near Death Experience? Have you ever experienced it? Precious few ever do catch a glimpse of life after death. Recently, my father disclosed to me that he had a Near Death Experience. And what little of it he did experience conformed exactly to all the other accounts of NDE I have ever heard of or read about. I couldnt help but notice the similarities between birth and death once I examined them closely. In case you never imagined that birth and death are essentially one and the same thing, then read this account of death, and then compare it to the previous account of birth. DYING TO LEAVE THIS PLACE All right. So there you are, lying on your deathbed, your Spirit still encased in a currently unhealthy body. Pain and discomfort pervade your whole being. Your years are all used up; time is no longer on your side. Your life has been one incredibly wild ride (just like your birth) and you are waiting for the inevitable now. Then, during your last hour, you notice that something is different. It is getting harder to breathe. Your breathing is becoming shallower. You feel like you are slipping away, like you are getting lighter. Then you also notice that you are floating away from your body. In fact, you see the ceiling
107
Jason Blanchard
coming closer to you, and you turn and look around you only to see your own body down on your deathbed!! What the hell is this? First, it became hard to breathe, and now you are not even in your own body anymore!! All the pain has stopped now. You feel free, finally!! The pain and hell of living is over. So this is the end... Just as you think this, you see a Light slowly growing from one particular direction in the room. You turn towards this Light. You notice a sort of tunnel forming as the Light source grows before you. You continue to turn towards the Light, leaving the known world behind you. You then feel a sense of movement towards the Light, slowly at first, then a little quicker, all the while this Light is getting brighter, and incredibly intense. The Light is bright and overpowering, and it is only getting brighter. What is this Light?, you keep thinking. Where am I going? I never knew there was something beyond this world I have known. Despite this uncertainty, you continue to move through this tunnel of Light at what seems like impossible speed. The sense of movement is faster and faster, and the Light grows brighter and brighter. Then, abruptly, the tunnel of Light ends, and you find yourself awash in a massive field of blinding and magnificent Light, more brilliant and dazzling than anything you have ever known before. And it is so beautiful!! So much Light here!! You have never seen such Light before!! How could Light of such intensity and exquisite splendor even exist? You think to yourselfWhere am I? What is this place? You hear a sound like you have never heard before. These sounds are incredibly loud, clear and indescribably beautiful. This sound is music!! It sounds like thousands of choirs all singing in unison, at the top of their lungs. It is the most gorgeous, enchanting, and truly Spiritual music you have ever heard. All the best composers in all the best musical conservatories in all the world have never composed anything like what you now hear in this place of brilliant Light. What is this place? Where have I come to? It feels different here. It is not painful anymore. There is a glorious warmth here. Warmth like you never felt before. You dont feel heavy anymore. You feel light, like you are floating on air. You feel free, freer than you have ever felt in your whole life on earth. You feel happy beyond happyabsolutely Joyous. Where am I? You then see a magnificent being in front of you. This being is filled with Light, and it welcomes you here in this new existence. You feel a connection to absolutely Everything, All Creation. You feel a connection to God itself. You feel as though you and God are One. And then you notice something incredible, something which totally grabs your attention. You feel, with your entire being, as though you are being filled with Energy, a wonderful, tremendous, fantastic Vibration you cant even understand. This Energy makes you feel welcomed, cherished, adored. This amazing Energy fills you with a sense of peace, serenity, harmony, and total
108
bliss. This Energy makes you feel like you have never felt before. This Energy floods your whole being, permeates your very Soul. This energy is Love. This Love is Godthey are One and the same. God is Love. You and God are One. You and Love are One. Now you feel just wonderful. Now in the presence of Gods Love, you feel Joyous, warm, serene, peaceful, and Loved. Now you realize where you are, where you have come to. You have come to a place filled with Light and Love. And you think to yourselfSurely, I have come Home. BIRTH AND DEATHSAME THING So, notice any similarities? Take a close look. A disturbance of ones current existence. A problem with respiration or breathing. The appearance of a light source. Moving towards the light source. The light source turns into a tunnel of light. You move towards this tunnel of light and move through the tunnel of light at a fast speed. Then the tunnel ends and there is a place of light and sound and feeling. There is someone there to greet you. And lastly, there is Love, being surrounded by Love. Birth and DeathOne and the same. So, tell me. What are the differences again? Is there really any difference? Birth and Death are two sides of the same cointhey are polar opposites. Any differences are inconsequential, but the similarities are undeniable, and too numerous to ignore. DEATH IS NOT GROSS, OUR MISUNDERSTANDING OF DEATH IS GROSS If there is one thing that depresses and disturbs me, it is having to attend a funeral. Though the first letters of funeral spell fun, funerals are anything but. As one author has written, funerals are an orgy of tears. I must agree with him wholeheartedly on this. Are funerals anything but a cry-fest? Sometimes, I could swear that some of the mourners are in competition with each other, attempting to be the first to dehydrate themselves. If what I say here seems like the thoughts of some unfeeling ingrate who misunderstands the feelings of the mourners, think again. I am empathic (the ability to sense emotions and feelings of others), so I know all too damn well what the mourners feel, and I do understand why they cry. But, because of my understanding of death, I do not feel the need to cry at funerals. It is those weeping mourners who have a serious problembesides not realizing that God is within themselves, and not understanding what life itself is all about, they misunderstand death itself. Now that is something to cry about. Perhaps if we examine death itself, and look at death for what it is, then maybe, just maybe, funerals will be more funor at
109
Jason Blanchard
least, there will be fewer tears. No, I wont describe the putrid process of decay and decomposition. Rather I will describe death from the perspective of the Spiritual Science. Seen this way, death is ridiculously simple to comprehend. DEATH 101 All is Vibration. Energy is equal to Mass. Mass is equal to Energy. In essence, both are a Vibration. The Physical world which we can sense with our vision, hearing, touch, etc., is nothing more than a Vibration, in fact, it is nothing but a mass of slow frequency vibrations. Higher frequencies produce a more etheric, transparent quality. Still higher frequencies result in our so-called invisible world, what we call the Spiritual plane of existence. But even ultra high frequencies like this are still a frequency, still a Vibration. No matter how high or low the frequency, All is Vibration. Our physical body is a slow Vibration, and our Spirit or Soul is a much higher Vibration. What we call human life may be described as the occurrence of a Spirit being encased within a bodyone collection of high frequency Vibration being embedded within (Spirit is within) a collection of lower frequency Vibration. What we call death may be described as the occurrence of a Spirit being released from within a bodyone collection of high frequency Vibration being released from within the collection of lower frequency Vibration. Its not too technical in description and is totally understandable. You, a human being, are a Spirit or Soul temporarily residing inside a physical body. It doesnt get any simpler than that. At the moment of death, your Spirit (which is what you really are) is finally released from your body (your temporary Spirit-carrier, or shell) once the mechanical process of breathing stops. The Science of Yoga teaches that breath is the function which keeps the Spirit inside the body. Breath is the tie which binds us to our body. When the breath stops, one experiences what we call death, and the Spirit is released. THE END? That undiscoverd country from whose bourne, no traveler returns.Hamlet, Shakespeare Have you noticed yet that absolutely nowhere in this exposition on death have I ever mentioned words such as destruction, obliteration, annihilation, etc.? Wondering why? Remember that All is VibrationAll Energy and Matter. Energy (high frequency Vibrations) merely changes into other frequencies of Energy. Matter (slow frequency vibrations) merely changes into other kinds of Matter. But all of these, Energies and Matter, are nothing but various frequencies
110
of Vibration. All is Vibration. This all means that your Spirit is a Vibration, a high frequency Vibe/Energy, and this Vibe/Energy cannot be killed. Your True Self, your Spirit, is a Vibration. But Spirit is something that no one destroys.lyrics from Low Spark of High Heeled Boys, by Traffic Now, remembering what you have just read here, ask yourself this following question. Do you really think that at the moment of death, that you are going to end, cease to be, or stop existing? Do I really have to tell you the answer? Remember, Vibration only changes formone Vibe/Energy changes into another Vibe/Energy. Vibration can only change frequency. You are a Vibration. You are an Energy. Energy cannot be killed. Vibration cannot be destroyed. Since you are a Vibration, You are not going anywhere!! When death comes, you will simply drop your shell (body), and exist in a higher plane of Vibration other than the slow frequency Physical plane. In short, Death is not the end. How bout not equating death with stopping?lyrics from Thank U, by Alanis Morissette Do you think the raindrop dies when it hits the ground and evaporates back into the atmosphere? It just transforms into something else. Do you think the water in your kettle dies when you heat it, and it turns into steam? It just changes form. Do you think the caterpillar dies when the butterfly emerges from the cocoon? Of course not. It just changes form, it transforms. Metamorphosis (meta = to change, to transcend, go higher or beyond; morph = form) is the proper word for the process. The caterpillar merely transcends its lowly form, and changes into a higher form, beyond what it once was. And the caterpillar undergoes this process without any fear. The caterpillar Trusts God and the process of change it will undergo. If there were any resistance at all on the part of the caterpillar, then it would surely die, with no butterfly being born. In regards to death (change), the caterpillar is without any fear. Dont fear the Reaper.Blue Oyster Cult Fear is the difference between us and the animal kingdom in regards to death. Animals do not fear death like we humans do. When it is time for the animal to die, it simply does so. The animals flow with Life. This also means flowing with Death when it is time for it. Quite another story for humans. When it is time for humans to die, we often do anything to delay the process, and prevent death from coming by any means
111
Jason Blanchard
possible. And when it inevitably does come, then those who are still living, who tried to prevent the death, immediately feel as though they have lost a battle. Death, instead of being viewed as the great transformer of all things, instead of being seen as the great releaser, is often seen as the enemy to everything we hold dear. And then those tears start flowing. For Gods sake, Death is a part of Life. It is the way God ordained it, for all things to eventually change. Our resistance to this Truth is what causes all of our suffering in regards to death. We deny death every day of our lives, practically up until the appointed hour of our very own demise. Only then do we (sometimes) accept death when it stares us in the face. This acceptance is forced on us because we have chosen Fear, instead of Love, in our lives, and have subsequently feared everything in life, especially death. Fear leads you nowhere. Fear is failure. The enemy is Fear.Mahatma Gandhi Death is not the enemy. Fear is the enemy. And Fearing Death is ridiculousit is the actions of a fool. Death is not the end. You are a Vibration. You cannot be killed. At the moment of death, your Spirit will simply be released from your body, and you will return to a more Energetic mode of existence. For the dust will return to the earth, and the spirit will return to God, who gave it. Ecclesiastes 12:7 All we are is dust in the windlyrics from Dust in the Wind, by Kansas When my father told me of his Near Death Experience, he concluded the story by saying that if what he had experienced was really what happens at the moment of death, then, as he said, Im not afraid to die. O death, where is your victory? O death, where is your sting?1Corinthians 15:55 ###
112
CHAPTER 16 CYCLES & REINCARNATION

Have you ever heard of Reincarnation? Simply defined, Reincarnation is the cyclic incarnation or embodiment of a Soul or a Spirit within different Physical bodies over time. Or, Scientifically speaking, it can be seen as the repetitive process of the re-embodiment of a cohesive high frequency Energy matrix (Spirit or Soul) within another cohesive slow frequency Matter matrix (physical body). Confused? Try this one. Your Spirit or Soul which is within your Physical body once existed in another body at some time in history, and your Spirit will again exist within another body at some time in the future. Do you know what this means? It means that You yourself were your own ancestors in history, and you yourself will be your own descendants in the future. As surely as your Spirit leaves your dead body before it is entombed in a grave, your Spirit will reentomb itself into a new body, that of a baby, at some time in the future. Sound unbelievable? Too bad!! Belief does not change the Nature of What Is. Nevertheless, according to a recent poll, 25% of Americans believe in Reincarnation. At least this is a step in the right direction. I suppose the poll results would be very different if the poll question was worded such as Do you accept Reincarnation as Truth?, but alas, a question like this would make most people pause to understand exactly what was being asked. Anyway... Reincarnation is Real. Reincarnation is Truth. Reincarnation is nothing new. Reincarnation is not some brand new discovery made by new age-ers in modern times. It is an ancient teaching, and rightly so, since it is Truth anyway. Reincarnation always has been a Fact regardless of whether or not people have recognized it as such. Of course, over time, some have realized the Truth of Reincarnation. Over 2500 years ago, the famous Greek philosophers Socrates, Aristotle, Plato, and even Pythagoras (whose name is immortalized in mathematics) all advocated the Truth of Reincarnation in early western history. And of course, the Hindus, the most prominent proponents of Reincarnation, have been teaching this Truth for literally thousands of years. But the Truth of Reincarnation is much older than the Greeks or Hindusit is as timeless as the Universe itself. It is simply a Truth which must be accepted, not believed. But this does not mean that there is no proof whatsoever. Everything which God has created gives evidence of itself in some way, somehow. THE PROOF IS IN THE PUDDING...AND THE REST OF YOUR MEAL Reincarnation is very evident in nature. Examine nature carefully and what do you discover? Nature recycles everything. This is Universal Law. Nothing
113
Jason Blanchard
is really new at all. All things are used over and over again. The animal which dies in the wilderness today will be worm food tomorrow. The family pet that is buried in the back yard will literally become a fabulous fertilizer for future flora (plants, for you non-biologists). Even the plants which used your family pets dead body to feed itself will also die and decay, becoming the building blocks for more plants. This is the natural cycle of use and re-use. Nothing in nature is really lost, it just gets re-located during its use by something else. Do you have any idea what your dinner once was before it became your dinner? There might be a single atom or molecule which was once inside a dinosaur, which is now in your carrots. The steak you ate yesterday may contain the very same atoms which once composed the brain of a Roman soldier, or even the person he killed in battle. Hell, somewhere in your body is an atom which was originally part of the body of some famous person in history. It has even been calculated that there is at least one air molecule in every breath you take, which was once expelled out of lungs of the assassinated Julius Caesar, when he uttered his last words, Etu, Brute? And the water you drink? Well, water has been recycled through the natural meteorological processes of evaporation, condensation, and precipitation for literally billions of years (remember the rain cycle in science class?). Do you have any idea how many times the water you drink has passed through the bladder of some ancestor of yours? Have you any idea what you are drinking? Have I sufficiently grossed you out yet? Did you puke yet? Speaking of puke,...well, I better not go there. But do you get the idea? Everything, even the atoms of your own body, has been, is, and will be recycled or reused in some way. The very bodies we inhabit are essentially made up of what was originally stardust (ashes to ashes, dust to dust). The atoms and molecules which make up our bodies were first forged in the furnaces of stars. And this material has already been used before coming together to form our bodies. And when the Spirit leaves the body at the moment of death, the stuff of which the body is composed, decomposes. Ever heard of this one?Old musicians never die, they decompose. We also jokingly describe the dead as pushing up daisies. This fertilizer reference is a clear indication of what I am talking about here. As disturbing and disgusting as it may seem, one day we will die and our bodies will become fodder for God-knows-what. It may seem a difficult notion to digest that our bodies will eventually be digested by something else, but this is the Way of the Universe. And besides, our bodies are not what we really are. We are Divine, Spiritual Beings, not some dense, slowly Vibrating, Physical thing. We are gods. We use bodies for a purpose, and when that purpose is fulfilled, the body is dropped to return back to the stuff it came from. Spirits or Souls are not quite recycled, but rather, Reincarnated. While the bodies the Spirit inhabits are definitely recycled, the Spirit itself moves through a
114
cycle which is composed of different stages which are: incarnating in a body, living in that body till death, release from the body at the moment of death, residing in a purely Spiritual/Energetical existence for a time (the so-called afterlife), and then Re-incarnating again into a new body. Such is the process of Reincarnation. Nothing too startling, to be sure. But The doctrine and dogma of modern western religions state that humans live only one life, death is the ultimate end, and there are no more future Physical lives awaiting us. This belief is absolutely incompatible with Universal Law. Life definitely continues. We do go on. We are Spirit, and our Spirits are essentially a Vibration, a high frequency Energy. And since Energy cannot be killed or destroyed, we are not going to end. THERES SOMETHING FAMILIAR ABOUT THAT GUY... One other point I must mention here is that the ancient Spiritual teachings state that the Cycle of Reincarnation is broken, in a sense, when the individual finally attains Oneness with the Inner Spirit, when one attains the Spiritual Perfection which every previous Spiritual Master has also attained. When this Perfection is reached, then the new Master is no longer subject to the Cycle of Reincarnation, and hence, is no longer required to reincarnate into a Physical body. The Master, now Spiritually Perfect, has the choice to return to an Earthly body, if he/she so desires, perhaps to become a Spiritual teacher, healer, prophet, etc., for the benefit of the rest of humanity, which has not attained their own Enlightenment. Such is the case with most Masterseven though it is not required of them to reincarnate anymore, their Love and compassion compel them to return again and again to help humanity. Many of the Spiritual Masters in Earths long history have reincarnated repeatedly, and owned some of the most famous names in history. This means that some of historys most famous Spiritual leaders, Scientists, philosophers, writers, artists, musicians, etc., has been the exact same Spirit which just reincarnated repeatedly through the centuries in these different bodies. This statement may sound strange to some, but it is the Truth, nonetheless. The Universe is an amazing place... REINCARNATION IS IN THE BIBLE?? I find it both stunning and patently absurd that the very religions which claim the Bible as their guide to God are the same religions which do not claim Reincarnation as Truth, even though the biblical evidence for Reincarnation is there in the verses of the book itself, albeit, sometimes not very clearly. The Bible does not proclaim Reincarnation outright, as though it were the lost eleventh commandment which Moses did not have sufficient space to write into
115
Jason Blanchard
stone. The Bible does not even use the word reincarnation. But Reincarnation is carefully alluded to in several verses, and sometimes, by no less a figure than Jesus himself. Any Bible-thumpers care to argue with their so-called Son of God? And now, I wish to show that besides having a Scientific basis, and also being a Spiritual Truth and Universal Law, Reincarnation is also hidden within the pages of the Bible. I found one really obvious reference to Reincarnation in the Old Testament which I wish to share here. It comes from the book of Malachi, the last book in the Old Testament. Mal 4:5Look, I am sending you the prophet Elijah before the great and dreadful day of the LORD arrives. Not only does this verse appear in the last book of the Old Testament, but it appears in the very last chapter, and is the next-to-last verse in the chapter itself. It is important to keep in mind that Elijah was dead when these verses were written. And yet the verse refers to a future time when God would somehow send Elijah back to the earth, and back from the dead, apparently. How could this happen if Reincarnation were not Truth? How would this happen if the Spirit or Soul of Elijah itself would not re-incarnate into a new body? And just who would that body be? Jesus himself tells us exactly which individual this Elijah-Spirit was embodying. In the New Testament, specifically the Gospel of Matthew, Jesus was talking about John the Baptist openly to the crowds. Among the things he said of John was this revealing verse. Matt 11:14And if you are willing to accept what I say, he (John the Baptist) is Elijah, the one the prophets said would come. Here, Jesus publicly proclaims that John the Baptist is not some ordinary man, but rather he is none other than Elijah, who had been dead for hundreds of years by that time. What Jesus is saying is that the indwelling Spirit currently in the body of John is the same Spirit that was in the body of Elijah hundreds of years earlier. It is obvious from this verse (and others) that Jesus knew the Truth of Reincarnation. Matt 17:11-13Jesus replied, Elijah is indeed coming first to set everything in order. But I tell you, he has already come, but he wasnt recognized, and he was badly mistreated. And soon the Son of Man will also suffer at their hands. Then the disciples realized he had been speaking of John the Baptist.
116
Once again, Jesus demonstrates his Knowledge of Reincarnation, and also that John the Baptist was indeed the reincarnated Spirit of Elijah. In addition, the last verse reveals to the attentive reader that the disciples of Jesus also knew of Reincarnation. Matt 16:13-14When Jesus came to the region of Caesarea Philippi, he asked his disciples, Who do people say that the Son of Man is? Well, they replied, some say John the Baptist, some say Elijah, and others say Jeremiah or one of the other prophets. In this verse, Jesus reveals, with only one question, that the common people also knew about Reincarnation. Think about it. Why would he ask his disciples who the people think he is, unless he was aware that the common people also knew about Reincarnation? The disciples tell him that the people think Jesus is either the recently murdered John the Baptist, or one of their ancient dead prophets. This verse clearly states that even the common people knew the Truth of Reincarnation. Mark 6:14-16Herod, Antipas, the king, soon heard about Jesus, because people everywhere were talking about him. Some were saying, This must be John the Baptist come back to life again. That is why he can do such miracles. Others thought Jesus was the ancient prophet Elijah. Still others thought he was a prophet like the other great prophets of the past. In these verses from the Gospel of Mark, we can see that Reincarnation was known to people at all levels of society, from the king on down to the commoner. Also we read that some thought Jesus was not actually one of the past prophets reborn, but rather that he was a new, modern prophet who also had powers like the ancient prophets of the past. Although it is off the subject, the last verse alone indicates that even the people knew it was possible for a mere man to ascend to God and attain Godly powers along the way. And why shouldnt it be that way? After all, Jesus told us, You are gods. But back to the point. Even the empirical king was aware of the Truth of Reincarnation. Luke 1:17He (John) will be a man with the spirit and power of Elijah, the prophet of old. Here, the author of the gospel, Luke, is quoting what an angel of the Lord said to Zechariah concerning his future son, John, who would be known as John the Baptist. The angel states very openly and candidly that John will be the Spirit of Elijah. See that? Even the angel of the Lord knew about Reincarnation. Geez, I hope so!!
117
Jason Blanchard
John 1:21Well then, who are you? they asked. Are you Elijah? The Jewish leaders sent some priests to John the Baptist to ask him plainly whether he was the Messiah, which he denied. They then asked him this question found in Johns Gospel. This indicates that the priests of the time also embraced Reincarnation, otherwise they never would have asked John such an idiotic question. The point? Even the Jewish priests of the time were aware of the Truth of Reincarnation. John 8:56-58Your ancestor Abraham rejoiced as he looked forward to my coming. He saw it and was glad. The people said, You arent even fifty years old. How can you say you have seen Abraham? Jesus answered, The truth is, I existed before Abraham was even born! Once again, Jesus is referring to a pre-existence of the Spirit, in this case, the fact that he himself existed even before the ancient patriarch Abraham was born. In fact, depending on how one interprets the both first and last sentence, it just might be possible that Jesus was actually saying that he himself was none other than Abraham, and Reincarnated, this time, as Jesus. But it is not necessary for this to be true, since it is irrelevant (though still related) to the point being made here, namely that once again, Jesus displays a knowledge of the Truth of Reincarnation. Well, what do we know so far from these Bible quotes? We know the following. Jesus, all of his disciples, the common people, the outsider king, the Jewish priests, and even one angel of the Lord obviously knew of Reincarnation and acknowledged Reincarnation as the Truth. Isnt that incredible? Thats one hell of a list!! This list includes damn near everyone living in the region at the time. This list proves that Reincarnation was common Knowledge. Please note that I have not resorted to other outside sources to create this list, or to come to this conclusion. All of these quotes came straight from the Bible itself. In other words, Reincarnation is in the Bible!! There is no need to debate the above findings. And why would one want to debate it anyway? Reincarnation is a Scientific, Spiritual Truth. It is provable, of course. But, it is not my intention to supply the reader with voluminous amounts of modern Scientific evidence to prove Reincarnation. Dont think that there isnt any evidencethere is plenty. Especially in recent years, tremendous amounts of evidence have been gathered by psychiatrists and hypnotherapists to prove the Truth of Reincarnation. If the reader bothers to look diligently enough, he/she will find many cases which simply cannot be explained without the Truth
118
of Reincarnation. It is up to the reader to search for such proof if the need arises. I have done my own research in the matter, and have already accepted the TruthReincarnation is Real.
119
Jason Blanchard
CHAPTER 17 KARMA, PAST LIVES, DESTINY

For every action, there is an equal but opposite reaction.Isaac Newton During the Age of Enlightenment, the famous English scientist Isaac Newton coined this phrase which is known to many scientists, particularly physicists. This statement is regarded as a Law of Physics, one of the three laws of conservation of energy. But this famous axiom is also a Universal Law of Spirit. This Law has tremendous effects and implications, which I will discuss here. First the scientific view. KARMA HERE, KARMA THERE, KARMA EVERYWHERE In the world of Physics, this Law of Action and Reaction occurs literally everywhere on both a small and huge scale. All around you is evidence of actions followed by reactions. Lighting a fire under your dinner (action) will cook your food (reaction). Our star, the sun, burns its gaseous fuel (action) and produces enormous heat which sustains life on our planet (reaction). You drop an ice cube in your tea (action) and the tea becomes colder (reaction). A luxury liner collides with an iceberg (action) which rips a hole in the steel (reaction) and the ship sinks. You blow air into a small rubber balloon (action) and the balloon stretches into a larger size (reaction). A hurricane generating fierce winds passes over your hometown (action) and the wind blows your house down (reaction). A small meteor falls towards the earth and hits your head (action) which cracks your skull (reaction) and you die. A small comet smashes into the earth at fantastic speed (action) causing colossal destruction (reaction) killing you in the process. These are elemental examples of the Law of Action and Reaction in the physical world. This Law of Action and Reaction may be seen in another perspective. In Truth, this Law is responsible for keeping balance in the Universe. This Law ensures that energy is not lost, but simply transformed. This makes complete sense since energy (which is simply a high frequency Vibration) cannot be killed or destroyed. The Vibration which permeates everything can never be made to simply not exist. Vibration is only transformed into another Vibration. Just because the ice cube melts into your tea does not mean that the water which composed the ice cube is killed or dead. The ice has changed form. The Vibration which was the ice cube has only changed frequency. The ice cube had a slow frequency, making it dense, but now the frequency is higher, making it less dense and more fluid, a fluid in factwater. There occurs only a change in
120
frequency of the Vibration of the atoms which compose the water which was in the form of the ice cube. Vibration is never lost. The heat of the fire which cooks your food is not lost forever. Some of the heat goes into your food. Some of the heat is released into the kitchen. Some of the heat is released into the cooking utensils. All of the heat is eventually released into the environment, but it is never killed or destroyed. Once again, Vibration just changes frequency, but is never lost. All of the Vibration that has ever existed throughout all history, is still here, completely accounted for, and never forgotten. KARMA IN THE BIBLE You will always reap what you sow!Gal 6:7 And this brings me to the Spiritual aspect of the Law of Action and Reaction. This Law is not at all limited to the Physical world. It is also a Universal Law which governs the Spiritual world. And since we humans are Spiritual beings, we are also governed by this Universal Law at all times. Have you ever heard of Karma? It is the name given to the Spiritual Law of Action and Reaction. In fact, Karma is a word meaning action. Typically, we hear people of eastern religions, especially the Hindu religion, speaking of Karma. Karma, like Reincarnation, is another Truth of God, a Universal Law. There are many ways to describe the effect of Karma on our lives. Any of these phrases sound familiar? What you give is what you get. What goes around comes around. You get exactly what you deserve. You always get whats coming to you. Everything that you do will come back to you. What goes around comes around. You will always reap what you sow. Certainly you have heard at least one of these sayings at one time or another. Did the last one ring a bell? (A church bell, perhaps?) The phrase, You will always reap what you sow. is a quote straight from the Bible. Karma? In the Bible? Well, what do you know? Something else we did not learn in Sunday school, despite this Truth being in plain view in the scriptures. I know I was stunned when I first learned that the Truth of Karma was actually in the Bible of all places. No priest I knew ever spoke of Karma. In fact, no one I knew ever did. So, after studying various religions and spiritual philosophies and learning about Karma, I was truly amazed to discover that the Law of Action and Reaction was never mentioned by religious people in the western hemisphere, even though it is written in the most famous western scripture. Instant Karmas gonna get you.lyrics from We All Shine On, by John Lennon An explanation of Karma is in order here. The Law of Karma can be explained in modern terms as a credit and debit system. Imagine your Soul is a
121
Jason Blanchard
sort of Spiritual credit card. Your credits or debits are determined solely by what you do in lifeyour actions determine your Karma (remember, the word Karma means action). Your actions determine the re-action. If you do good things in life, you will earn credits. If you do evil things in life, you will earn debits. You can look at it this wayyour actions determine the reaction in the form of a credit (good Karma), or a debit (evil Karma). And this Karma credit system is one system from which no one can ever escape. It is the nature of the Universe to balance itself. When an action is performed, a balancing reaction is created. Karma is all about balancing. All of your actions in life are tallied on this Karma credit system, and according to the type of action involved (good or evil), you will receive an appropriate reaction (a credit or debit). In other words, if you do good, good comes back to you, and if you do evil, evil is what comes back to you. You reap what you sow. You harvest what you plant. You get what you give. Always. This Karma system is a Universal Law and it does not forget anything you do. The implications of this stagger the mind. Karma is the reason why any religion or spiritual system worth its weight always implores its followers to do good instead of evil. Can you see the connection between Karma and the previous information on Vibration? Notice that Vibrations are never forgotten or lost. Vibrations are always transformed or transferred into something else. Now look at Karma. Your actions are, in essence, Vibrations which are caused by you. And since Vibrations are never lost, your actions (Vibrations) are also never lost. These actions will always balance out your actions in the form of a reaction aimed directly at you. What goes around comes around, remember? The vibes you send come back to you. Lets look at an example. Lets say that you rob and murder someone (OK, its an extreme example). This is a terrible action which creates an inevitable terrible reactionit creates bad Karma. Rest assured that the bad Karma you have created for yourself will find you one day. And just how will this bad Karma come back to you? Well, it is all too easy to think that you yourself will be robbed and murdered in like fashion. While this is possible, and it can happen, rarely does Karma come back to us in the exact same method which it was created. Sorry, but it is not always an eye for an eye and a tooth for a tooth as is written in the Old Testament. That was a human-created justice system. God works differently than what most have been led to believe. Your Karma for robbery and murder may come back to you through someone you know. Maybe your parents will lose all their money somehow and you will be forced to use all the money you robbed to help out your parents, leaving you with nothing. Or maybe your parents themselves will also get murdered, causing pain and trouble for you. Perhaps, because of your bad Karma, you will never be able to pursue the career of your choice, due to circumstances which are out of your control. Since you valued money more
122
than a human life, you will now be forced by Fate to learn from your ignorance by experiencing pain in the form of struggling to earn money the rest of your life. Perhaps in this way you will learn the futility of worshipping material things, and learn that human life is more important than a dollar. This Karma does not have to come back to you in this life however. Remember, Reincarnation is real. Karma can be stored up until the Spirit is ready to experience the return of the Karma. Karmas balancing act may take time, but rest assured, it will happen eventually. Sometimes a Spirit can possess a very heavy, evil Karma which will take more than one lifetime to balance out. Remember it is all about balance. The bad Karma for robbery and murder may come back in a future life if the Spirit is unable to balance it out this lifetime. Then, for example, in the new life, the Spirit may be born into a family which does not have much money, but does have an abundance of Love. The Spirits new parents may die very early due to some disease which could have been prevented if the family had more money for medical expenses. As a result of this, the Spirit may then decide to become a doctor who tends to the medical needs of the poor. And thusly, the Spirit who once murdered and robbed, now learns a lesson in the greater value of human life over money by saving the lives of those who have little money to begin with. See how Karma can work? Karma is the way God helps the Spirit remember the Truth of its own Divinity, by allowing us to make mistakes, and then learning from them. God, the Perfect Parent, allows us to do anything we wish with our lives, even make the most horrible of mistakes, because God will provide an opportunity to learn from our mistakes and continue our evolution. Authority figures please take notice!! Only in an environment and atmosphere of complete Freedom (like the one God grants at all times) can anyone Truly progress, learn and evolve. WHAT DID I DO TO DESERVE THIS? Oh, how many times have you asked yourself this question? How many times has something terrible happened to you, or someone you know, and it seemed like neither of you deserved it? Well, the Truth of Karma can explain the reason why some of lifes little twists and turns appear out of nowhere to unsettle us. Look at the last example concerning past life Karma and try to apply it to your present life. You, the reader, might be surprised to learn of the reasons why you are the way you are, and why you were born into your family, etc. why you live the life you are leading right now. Karma and Reincarnation are extensive subjects which I will not cover in any more detail than I already have. I was chiefly concerned with proving that Reincarnation and Karma are the Truth and are contained in the Bible. I also wished to show the Science underlying each of the subjects. The reader should
123
Jason Blanchard
know that there are many excellent books out there concerning these two fascinating and very connected topics. Most of these books explain these subjects in grand detail, even using actual cases of Reincarnation, as gathered by Reincarnation researchers. I would also like to inform any readers who are interested in learning of their own past lives (instead of reading about the lives of other people), that it is possible to learn about their own past lives through the use of either Meditation or Hypnosis, whether it be self hypnosis, or conducted by a qualified professional. In recent years, past-life regression has become more accepted as a legitimate research method in the psychological world, especially as a therapeutic tool of healing, despite the fact that many in the psychological world dont even accept past lives as Truth. Oh, well...at least you know the Truth. ###
124
CHAPTER 18 WHEN THE CIRCUS CAME TO TOWN

As I write these words, some members of my family are watching the television for a supposed miraclea vision of the virgin Mary. There are camera crews in a town in the southern U.S. filming thousands of faithful people who are on their knees, waiting for a sign. This, to say the least, disturbs me. It is a clear sign to me that those who are looking for this sign are still ignorant of the Truth that God is within them. There is no need to look for a sign outside of themselves, because in Truth, God is already inside. Lack of this Key Knowledge is the main reason behind peoples gravitation towards miraculous occurrences like this. It is a sad Truth of human beings, that when they do not know what is inside of themselves, they look elsewhere, namely outside of themselves. Time and time again, throughout our history, countless thousands (if not millions) of pilgrims have flocked to wherever the next miracle was allegedly happening. Sometimes they are temporarily satisfied with some occurrence, sometimes not. But the central theme is always the samealways looking for God, or proof of God, outside of themselves. Quote me here. Never in your life, no matter how much or how little you may find outside of yourself, will you ever be Truly satisfied in your search for God, until you finally search inside of yourself!! Throughout all your life, no matter how much or how long you search, you will never discover a more profound Truth than the fact that God lives inside of you. And that is the Absolute Truth, or as the faithful so often say, Thats the gospel truth. For practically my whole life, I have always been interested not only in Science, but also in things that were considered Spiritual, psychic, paranormal, ghostly, miraculous, occult, etc. I studied these subjects and more to such an enormous extent over the years, and learned so much of a Scientific and Spiritual nature, that I began to consider myself a sort of walking, talking encyclopedia (you are what you read, I suppose). I treasured my abilities to separate the Science from the speculation, and the Spiritual from the shit. So when a supposed miracle recently appeared in a local town, I was presented with a rare, golden opportunity to flex not only Scientific muscle, but also my Spiritual muscle as well. And sure enough, I would separate the Science from the speculation, and the Spiritual from the shit, while literally standing over a large pile of shit. Confused? Read on. The following is a detailed account of what happened when a miracle came to town. And every word of it is the absolute Truth.
125
Jason Blanchard
ITS A MIRACLE!! During the year of 1997, an alleged sign from God was seen in a nearby town. It was hailed as a miracle. This miracle took the shape of a cross of light which appeared in a bathroom window. News spread quickly all along the stretch of road which connects the neighboring towns. Everyone was talking about this cross of light. Was it real? Was it a hoax? Was it a sign from God? What was it? The local TV station conducted its investigation and turned up absolutely nothing in the way of an answer to any of these questions, which is what I expected of the media anyway. Even the big city news crew showed up and reported on the phenomenon, and again, as expected, answered absolutely nothing. Both reports focused on the sensational aspect of the whole event. They asked some of the ever-increasing numbers of onlookers what they thought about what they were seeing in the bathroom window of the tiny house. Their answers, carefully selected and edited by the news crew, did not provide any enlightening information to those who hoped for answers by watching the television. News of this miracle even spread to nearby states, and the very next day, I discovered there were people from Texas who drove hours overnight just to look at the miraclea cross of light which appeared in the state of Louisiana. Since this miracle was occurring so close to my home, and since the news reporters had predictably turned up nothing by their investigations, I decided to check it out myself. After all, I had a very broad Scientific and Spiritual education which I could use to determine if it was real, or just some natural phenomenon of light. In addition to this, having experience with supernatural phenomenon, such as haunted houses, and also being sensitive to invisible energies, I concluded that I could perform an infinitely better investigation than any news crew. I was determined to find the Truth. WHAT A CROCK OF SHIT The next day, when I drove up to the scene, there was a substantial crowd of people already there, standing in the street adjacent to the now famous house. Everyone was looking towards the bathroom window and the cross of light within it. I parked my truck along the roadside and walked towards the onlookers. As I walked down the street, while staring at the window, I finally saw what everyone had been talking about. Slowly, as I walked ever closer to the crowded place in the street, which was perpendicular to the window, offering the best view of the cross of light, I saw the cross slowly grow in one side of the window before my eyes. It was in its full glory as I approached the crowd gathered directly in front of the window, and it subsequently disappeared in reverse fashion towards the opposite side of the window when I kept walking
126
down the street until it was no longer visible. I walked back to the crowd and stared at what was there. Indeed, there was a cross of light in the small windowtwo shafts of light crossing each other, dividing the window nearly perfectly into four quadrangles. I noticed the center of the cross moved whenever I moved. No matter if I walked sideways or moved my head up and down, the center of the cross changed to follow my movements. This made me think there was a light source behind the window which was creating the cross, perhaps nothing more than the light bulb hanging from the ceiling fan inside the bathroom, a small detail I remembered from the news reports. As I continued observing the cross, and wondering what it was, I noticed that it looked somehow familiarI had seen this phenomenon of light before. Then I heard two words pop into my braindiffraction grating. I marveled at these words because I had not heard them since my high school junior year in chemistry class, years earlier. In case you dont know what a diffraction grating is, let me explain. A diffraction grating is a series of parallel and equidistant lines or grooves tightly drawn or etched onto a surface, usually a plate of glass. Sometimes there are hundreds or thousands of lines or grooves per inch. The effect produced by a diffraction grating can be seen simply by holding an old vinyl record or a modern compact disc up to a light source and observing the criss-crossing shafts of light reflecting on the record or CD as you turn the disc at various angles to the light. If you try this, notice that CDs also produce the colors of the rainbow. Some people simply call this effect of light, glare. Call it what you will, but the effect is a result of a diffraction grating. This particular behavior of the light in the window was the familiar thing I had seen before, but I wanted to be sure about it. So, I decided to take a closer look at the cross in the window from the vantage point of the yard, which I noticed a few people were doing alreadyapparently, the property owners did not mind people walking on their property to see the miracle up close. As I walked in the yard, I noticed that the grass was already quite trampled on, slowly ruining the look of the lawn. I quietly mused to myself that it would really be a shame if the owners lawn were ruined for something so simple as an effect of light caused by diffraction grating. I noticed that directly beneath the miracle window, there was a concrete slab which was elevated from the ground. Standing on this concrete slab offered the best view of the cross of light. This large slab was the cover of the owners private sewer system. Only seconds before I could get to the concrete slab however, three women had come from around the opposite side of the yard and beat me to the slab. They stepped up on the sewers concrete cover and began to pray before the bathroom window. I stopped straight away, stunned. I thought to myself, You ladies are praying to a bathroom window while standing over a shithole! (Remember, this is a true story)
127
Jason Blanchard
Nevertheless, not wanting to disturb their praying, I carefully stepped up on the slab behind them, and quietly looked over their shoulders, trying to see the window as closely as possible without standing directly between them and their precious new icon. It only took a few seconds of observation to confirm what I had suspectedit was a diffraction grating after all. The cross of light was the natural effect created by the light from a light bulb shining through the bathroom window which had been etched with a diffraction grating. The window was specially designed with this grating to prevent anyone from seeing the occupants of the bathrooma privacy feature. And the grating on the window naturally produced a cross of light, a perfectly natural effect of the diffraction grating. And so, the mystery of the miraculous cross of light was solved. With the ladies still perched over a sewer reverently adoring a natural phenomenon in a bathroom window, I quietly turned and walked away from the whole scene, which now seemed to me, utterly ridiculous. I briefly thought about announcing to the crowd of onlookers what I had discovered, but quickly dismissed the thought. I had a feeling that no one would believe me, since I was not an MIT trained physicist. Besides, I had really wanted the answers for myself (and also for my family, who wanted to know if the miracle was real or not). I remember laughing a little harder with each step I took, as I put more distance between the window and myself, until I was laughing hysterically as I drove away in my truck. AFTERMATH I expected the whole affair to go away in time, which it did, but not before causing some problems. Traffic in front of the house became an almost constant concern for the police. In fact, I learned that one policeman forced the family to turn off the bathroom light (and the miracle along with it) so he could perform more important duties as an officer of the law. Some people took pictures of the window with mixed reactions to the resulting photographs. Some saw nothing interesting in the pictures, other than two intersecting shafts of light in a window, while others literally swore they could see the Devil or the Blessed Virgin Mary or even Jesus himself. Some people were allowed into the house and swore that they felt the presence of Christ in the bathroom (Again, I am not making this up). The faithful who wanted answers waited for Sunday mass to hear from their priests about what they should think of the miracle. I heard of at least one priest who checked out the window himself and declared that there was something good and something evil about itin other words, he had no clue at all. In the main churches on Sunday, the priests conducting mass were expected to say something about the miracle. The congregations wanted answers. Was it real? Was it a hoax? What was it? The priests answered not a single one of these questions. None of the priests told anyone what they wanted to hear. My
128
Spiritual Intuition informed me that this would happen because of the situation in which the priests found themselves. I understood their precarious position completely. Real miracles are rare, and the faithful believed that they do occur from time to time. But here was a possible miracle right here in their own back yard. The mere possibility of a true miracle increased the faith of many, and the priests did not want the congregations to stop believing that God performed miracles. So, on Sunday, the priests did not tell the faithful that the cross of light was not a miracle. But neither did they say that it was a miracle. They managed, by their words to the congregations, to completely circumvent the demand for a definitive answer. What were they to do? Should they tell the congregation the Truth and risk their loss of faith in God? Or should they tell them a lie and have history record them as the priests who foolishly told their flocks to worship a bathroom window and regard a totally natural phenomenon as a true miracle? As I said, I understood their position, but I detested their actions by not providing definitive answers, which I knew they would not give anyway. I had learned later that the priests, upon investigating, discovered what I knewthat it was not a miracle at all. I considered their conduct downright insidious, deceitful and shameful for not telling the Truth to their congregations. Honestly, I never really expected them to do so anyway. Eventually, more and more people began to realize for themselves that the cross was no miracle, and as the Truth began spreading, I was soon hearing comments from people that they had seen the same phenomenon of light in a few other bathroom windows. One of my friends told me that her parents house had been having a miracle in the bathroom window for 20 years. The Truth did prevail in time, and the whole sensational story went away. But lest the reader think that this whole tale had no positive outcome, I will relate one inspiring fact which was almost overshadowed by this whole episode. Inside the little house which was receiving so much attention, there lived a young child who suffered from autism. Living with an autistic child is not easy, as any parent of autistic children can tell you, and this child was no different. But after the whole miracle story broke loose, and people began praying near the property, the childs general behavior improved. Among other things, the child began sleeping the whole night through, something which rarely happened before. When news of this sudden health improvement spread, of course, it warmed everyones heart that the child was benefiting. Some even had the presence of mind to pray specifically for the health of the child, with great results, of course (the Mind creates, remember). This, Truly was the only genuine miracle during this whole event. But the unfortunate part of this is that as everyone slowly realized there was no miracle in the window, interest declined and ultimately disappeared, and along with it, the many helpful prayers. I have no idea what happened in
129
Jason Blanchard
regards to the child after the miracle was slowly exposed as a misunderstanding of something purely natural. So there it is. This True story illustrates the fruitless results of looking for God outside of yourself. In this case, some people happened to be looking at a bathroom window, hoping for even a glimpse of something Divine. Truthfully, All is Vibration, meaning that God is in everything and is everywhere, including bathroom windows, but nowhere can God be found is such great quantity and quality than in yourself. God did not place a Spark of Divinity inside immaterial objects. Rather, that Divine spark, that Spirit is within the human being. You want to look for God? Stop looking outside of yourself. Stop looking out the window, or for that matter, at the window. Close the windows of your own eyes and look for God within, through Meditation, through the window of your Spirityou will not be disappointed. ###
130
CHAPTER 19 ITS JUST THE JOY OF IT ALL

Let me tell you another story, a True story of an experience which just happened to me only 48 short hours ago (as of writing this). It is a story of friends, of Love, of Learning, of Wisdom, and total Joy. It is a story of reuniting with one old friend, of two more friends uniting in their Love for each other through marriage, and of a fun-filled evening with old friends, in celebration of the marriage. At the same time, it is also a story of a lonely Hermits renunciation of the same worldly Love so celebrated in the marriage of his friends, of the Hermits Love for God, of his desire for God above all else, of his dedication to his Holy pursuit, and, ultimately, it is an account of a totally unexpected experience of the Ecstasy and Bliss that befell him on that same Joyous night, during the most unusual, unlikely, and ridiculous of circumstances. Happy, happy, joy, joy. Happy, happy, joy, joy!!Ren and Stimpy This entire narrative revolves around the occurrence of a wedding between two dear friends of mine, N. (groom) and S. (bride). The were to marry on a Friday night, and I had been anticipating the event all week long during my daily activities. I had been friends and schoolmates with N. nearly all our lives together. N.s brother, K., was to be the best man in the marriage ceremony. I had also been a great friend with K. for at least half as many years as his brother. All three of us are musicians. In fact, I had been K.s music theory teacher (teery teecher, as we love to mispronounce it). K. had, some months back, left our hometown to follow a job promotion that required him to live in another state, some hours away. Of course, he had to come back home to attend the wedding. He called ahead and told me when he was flying over. He came home Wednesday. We met on Thursday afternoon. We drove over to a nearby city to meet an old friend of mine, M., who served the people in his community with private Spiritual consultations. K. wanted such a consultation from M. because he was concerned with certain issues in his life. On the way there, we talked about things past and present. It simply felt so wonderful just to be with my old friend again after some months of separation. K. eventually told me what was going on in his life. Although his job was enjoyable and well paying, he felt like there was nothing else happening for him. He was lacking direction at the moment. Due in part to my teaching him, he became a tremendously talented guitar player and musician, far beyond any level of proficiency I had ever reached in my years of involvement in music. But he was not going anywhere with his great ability at the moment. He had also just
131
Jason Blanchard
ended a long relationship before moving away. And to make it worse, he was somewhat lonely in a new place with no really close friendships to speak of. I talked to him on the way to the city, allowing my Intuition, Spiritual wisdom and knowledge to surface and hopefully provide some kind of advice for my friend. I remember telling him months before, what my Intuition had told me, that the move to the new city was somehow tied to his career as a musician. Once again, Intuition repeated itself, and I told him the same as months before. Because of his current loneliness, we shared stories of our experiences with women, mostly regarding a common and peculiar occurrence we both noticed in our lives. It seemed that whenever we wanted a relationship in our lives, we never could get one no matter how badly we wanted it. But during those times in our lives when we could have cared less about such matters, inevitably, some woman would appear out of nowhere hoping for a relationship with us. We laughed at these seemingly bizarre incidents. But I understood these strange happenings and explained it to K. while on the way to see my friend M. Knowing what I knew of how Spirit functions in our lives in these cases, I tried my best to explain to K. of the marvelous way that our desires and wishes can come to us, but only when we concentrate on the outcome and not on exactly how they will occur. I also told him of how I too, had attracted women into my life during the times when I had swore off women and pursuing relationships, in favor of pursuing my Spiritual Goal of God with all my energy. I informed him that every time I gave those women my time and attention, my Spiritual Goal always suffered badly. I also told him that, just recently I had rededicated myself to this Ultimate Goal again, after having enjoyed a prolonged sort of vacation from intense Spiritual effort during that year. I had been halfexpecting another woman to pop up out of nowhere sometime soon, perhaps even at tomorrows wedding reception. I joked about this Intuition of mine, and K. and I laughed at it, but as it so happened, my little premonition was correct. My friend M., the Spiritual counselor reiterated what I had told K., with only a few other points of advice, concerning K.s near future. In fact, what both M. and I had told K. concerning his current problems was exactly the same things which K.s own analysis and Intuition had told himreason enough to listen to your own Inner Voice. From there K. and I drove to the large hall reserved for the reception to help decorate and set up the chairs and tables. The next evening was the night of the wedding. VARIOUS PROFOUND INSIGHTS REALIZED WHILE ATTENDING A WEDDING On Friday night, I arrived at the church a few minutes late, which did not concern me much, since I intended to sit out the entire ceremony in the vestibule (the rear of the church) and watch from there. There was time enough to see all
132
my friends participating in the wedding party at the reception later that evening. Besides, participating in church ceremonies was simply not my thing anymore, since I did not personally need a religion to contact God. As I patiently waited for the ceremony to end, memories of my two friends N. and S., currently kneeling at the altar, came to my mind. I quietly thought to myself about marriage itself and what drives people to unite this way. It simply was not something I was interested inI had felt for much of my life like some kind of holy person, like there was something very different about me which was behind my inability to fully understand the institution of marriage and raising a family. Upon reflection, I realized that my life was simply destined to avoid such matters. I had come to know, thanks to my ever-growing connection to God, that such a life was simply not for me. My inner desire to know God was far too great for me to consider such a major change in life, which I knew I would inevitably consider, to some extent, a distraction. (Recognize these classic traits of a Hermit?) And yet, as I sat there watching the ceremony, looking at my friends up there, I still understood why they wanted this marriage. Love makes us all follow our hearts desire. Love is the Key to it All. My friends N. and S. Loved each other, and were just following their wishes for joy and happiness in their lives by marrying each other. And I was also following my hearts deepest desire by avoiding marriage altogether and Loving God and discovering God within. As we say these days, Its all good. As I sat there, I could not help but smile and feel happy for them, and also for myself as well. In the Joy of that moment, I was completely taken with the feeling that All seemed perfect, and as it must be. And so, I waited for the ceremony to end, for the wedding party to march out of the church one by one. I simply stood motionless on the stairs which leads up to the choir loft as the bride and groom walked by, out of the church. I looked at myself and my surroundings and thought the scene I was presenting was hilariousI was dressed from head to toe in black clothes, even wearing my very long, wavy black hair down around my face. This, combined with my darkly contrasting and somewhat intense looking facial features made me laugh quietly to myself at what a sight I was presenting to everyone as they walked out of the church. I thought to myself that I must have looked like Satan himself, a figure in black, in the rear of the church, presiding over the nights ceremonies. And sure enough, when I joined the wedding party outside the front doors, one of the bridesmaids, D., who was an old friend of mine, immediately remarked, Oh, wow!! You looked just like Satan standing there! I couldnt help but laugh... CALIGULA WOULD HAVE APPROVED The entire church was vacated and everyone drove a short distance the reception hall. I drove K. there, remarking at how wonderful it was to have so
133
Jason Blanchard
many people attend the wedding. We both hoped that everyone at the reception would thoroughly enjoy themselves. Once inside, I was soon engaged in meeting old acquaintances, some of them members of the wedding party, and I felt so happy that we all had the opportunity to meet like this on such a joyous occasion. Everyone, including me, was soon engaged in drinking, eating, dancing, and reuniting with friends. The night was soon filled with an air of celebration and total Joy, and I was just flowing with the feeling, running about here and there, talking to one person after another. For a while, I must have looked like I was running around with my head was cut off, but who cared? Besides, I was already being stared at because of my looking like the black death, so there was no point in caring what anyone thought of me. I was filled with a sense of absolute happiness and celebratory spirit because two friends of mine had found Love in each other!! What other reason did I need to be happy? The night just seemed magical, pervaded with Joy. I did not realize until I was writing this story many hours later, that, indeed, the entire weekend was an experience of flowing with the Joy of God, of child-like enjoyment of Life, of total abandonment of reason in the celebration of the merry moment of Now. This carefree attitude would only grow during the night, especially during the crazy moments which were to come next. With an announcement on the PA system, the deejay announced the beginning of the money dance. I am not aware if this tradition of the money dance is performed elsewhere in the country, so if it is not, then let me describe it here. A series of slow-tempo songs is performed by a deejay or the band providing the entertainment for the reception guests. Anyone who wants to be assured a dance with either the bride or groom merely has to produce a dollar bill of any denomination and pin the bill on the clothes of the happy couple (without stabbing them, of course). In this way, one is assured a dance, albeit a short one, just long enough to offer congratulations and best wishes before the next person with money cuts in. So, the usual happened. The men danced with the bride and the women danced with the groom. The newlyweds white wedding clothes were soon covered in a lovely green apparel. I, of course, danced with my friend S., and offered her all my Love and best wishes for a long happy marriage to my friend N. Then, after I was quickly dismissed by the next guy with a buck or two, I noticed the goofiest thing happening. All the men who had served in the wedding party, and both the fathers of the newlyweds were lining up to dance with the groom!! I was bent over looking at the floor from laughing so hard. For all I know, one of the guys thought it would be hilarious to make N. feel as uncomfortable as possible by forcing him to dance with all of his male friends for money. So, what did I do? I joined the line and pulled out some more money from my wallet. Like I said, there was a carefree attitude in the room, and everyone was laughing at this sudden spurt of spontaneous stupidity. So, I
134
danced with my friend N. and offered the same Love and best wishes for his marriage. I am still not sure who was leading our dance, though... After that ditzy and disturbing display of debauchery, I soon experienced what K. and I had discussed only the day before, concerning the sudden appearance of women eager for a relationship right at the precise moment when neither of us cared to chase them anymore. But this experience was something of a test for me, as I would soon find out. Sometimes, in our lives, especially in the lives of those who actively seek God, like I was doing, there are occasional tests which are sent our way in order to determine our steadfastness and seriousness about seeking God. And what was about to happen to me was no different. Wouldnt you know it? Just when I had swore off women to dedicate myself to seeking God full time, some girl suddenly takes an interest in me. And so, J. was introduced to me by a mutual friend. It seemed J. loved my long wavy black hair, and I reacted by passing my hand in my hair saying, Dont hate me cause Im beautiful; I use Pantene shampoo! Everyone close enough to hear my ridiculous outburst erupted in laughter. Our mutual friend then whispered to me, She thinks youre cute. I thought to myself that apparently, someone was not put off by my black death look. And so, J. and I danced a couple of times during the night. Inwardly, I felt a little sorry for her though. I already knew that this was a test, and that my newly found rededication to my Goal was unassailable by any means. In short, there was no future for us togetherI was busy finding God now, and not looking for a relationship. Thankfully, we hardly spoke as we danced, therefore, I did not have to actually tell her the news. We just parted at the close of the reception. I already knew ahead of time that this little incident would happenmy Intuition from the day before was right. I kept laughing about this during the night, but not because she thought I was devilishly attractive, but rather because I just knew I would be tested this way. But at least I passed the test. YOU DID WHAT,...WHERE?!? The reception ended later in the night, and most of the wedding party decided to reconvene at a local bar to continue our celebration. I agreed to meet them there after driving K. some miles away to retrieve his truck. On the way to pick up his truck, K. and I were both amazed at just how much fun the whole night had been. It seemed that absolutely everyone had a fantastic time. I told K. that I never had so much fun at a wedding reception before. An infectious happiness had just filled the air all night. K. agreed with me on this also, and we were relieved that the reception was so enjoyable. I dropped him off, said good-bye and drove to the dimly lit, slightly smoky bar. I walked in to find most of the wedding party sitting (?) on the dance floor. I thought this odd, to say the least, but I joined them anyway. The bridesmaids asked me for some quarters for the
135
Jason Blanchard
jukebox, and I returned to my truck to get a handful for them. When I returned and sat down on the floor again, the bride asked me to massage her feet for her she had been standing nearly all day and night by now, and her feet were really hurting. So I began massaging her feet for a few minutes. Then she said she had to go and wish her dad a happy birthday, and asked me to stay there so I could continue with the massage when she came back. I agreed and just spent the next few moments talking with my other friends also sitting on the dance floor. Sing for the day, sing for the moment, sing for the time of your life.lyrics from Sing for the Day, by Styx Moments later, I heard a song begin playing on the jukebox. When I quickly realized which song it was, a huge smile broke on my face. It was Blue Sky by the Allman Brothers Band. I had not heard this particular song in a couple of years, at least, and I was just overjoyed to hear it after so long. Though rarely heard, I remembered it well. I smiled and screamed and began singing along. I normally dont sing aloud in public, but I had not heard this song in so long, and I could not help myself. And besides, I was happy, dammit!! I had just kept feeling better and better as the night went on, and it obviously would not stop now. I let my hair down and began swaying with the rhythm, letting myself flow with it. I even began singing to one of my friends on the floor because I was so happyand I never do that!! What was happening to me? I couldnt understand all this joy, happiness, and carefree feeling washing over me. I almost never feel like that, except sometimes in Meditation. I was so overjoyed at the vibe I was feeling, that when one of my friends who obviously did not like the song asked What the hell is that?, I immediately responded with a spontaneous middle finger in his general direction. Obviously, nothing was going to detract my sudden wave of bliss. The bride S. soon returned from wherever she had run off to and so I resumed massaging her feet, my ecstatic feeling still unabated as I listened to the extended guitar solo in the song. As the last verse in the song was playing on the jukebox, I began singing along again, but I was not singing to anyone around me this time. There I was, at 1:30 in the morning, sitting on a dance floor in some unfamiliar bar, surrounded by tired reception revelers, with my head bent down, eyes closed, and massaging the feet of a woman who was not even my wife, and amidst my already overflowing happiness due to the entire nights events, I suddenly felt a strong compulsion to sing the last verse inwarddirectly to my Inner Spirit. Strange thing to do? Yes. Weird? Definitely. Ridiculous? Absolutely!! But I followed my compulsion anyway. Sitting there, surrounded in an ever-growing tremendous current of bliss and ecstasy, I sang my heart out to God as if God was standing right there in front of me. These are the lyrics of the song I was singingYoure my blue sky, Youre
136
my sunny day. Lord, You know it makes me high when You turn Your Love my way, turn Your Love my way. I felt enormous chills running all over my body, up and down my spine, with all the hairs on my body standing on end. I think that if the hair on my head was not so long and heavy, it would have also been standing straight out from my scalp. Wave after wave of total Joy swept over me as though I were immersed in a cool mountain stream with the swift, cold, current passing over my entire body. Strange as it sounds, it felt like my whole body was smiling!! Happiness and more Happiness!! Joy and more Joy!! All of the delight and fun I had experienced for the past couple of days just seemed to come back to me amplified and all at once. Wow!! Although I have provided a short description here, in Truth, I am really at a loss for words to describe the experience sufficiently. The moment only lasted seconds in duration, but it seemed longer to me, yet it also did not last long enough as far as I was concerned. Oh, to feel such Bliss every day!! Wow!! Gods Joy can strike anywhere, anytime, in any situation if one is just open to it like I was that whole night. Even so, I never expected this to happen, and in the most bizarre of circumstances, too. If I had known ahead of time, what was going to happen to me that night, in the situation I would have been in when it happened, I would have surely laughed my ass off at such nonsense. Gods Joy is available full time, from wherever you are, no matter how desperate, dangerous, or dumb the situation is. All one need do, is be open. When the song finished, I lifted my head and looked up at my friends around me. I was wearing what must have been the biggest smile in history. But no one seemed to notice at allat all!! Now that was amazing. What a night this had been!! What a feeling of Joy!! Didnt anyone else understand? There was so much to rejoicea reunion of countless friends, a declaration of Love in a marriage ceremony and a fun-filled, rollicking reception. If that was not enough, I had my own personal reasons to celebratemy Love for God above all else, my rededication to my Goal, passing a test of my determination, and an exhilarating experience of Total Joy in the most abnormal, absurd, and unexpected of circumstances. Yet most of my friends sitting around me seemed ready to fall asleep!! Oh well. I kept my little experience to myself, since I knew that no one else would understand it anyway. All of us went home soon afterwards. Psalm 40:16But may all who search for you be filled with joy and gladness. As I drove home, I was still reeling from the incredible perfection of the whole series of events during the previous hours. It just seemed to be a perpetual party, a festival of Life, Love, and the simple Joy of Being Alive. The wonderful sensations I had been feeling since I was first reunited with my friend K. up until my Ecstatic experience while sitting on the dance floor pervaded my very being
137
Jason Blanchard
throughout the rest of the weekend. If only each and every day and night could be so marvelous!! One day, when all of us are personally Enlightened to the Reality of God living inside each of us, then I am sure that everyone will know, by experience, what I have written herebecause words are Truly the worst method to communicate such an amazing experience. It is my hope that, one day, everyone on the planet will know just what I am talking about here. Until then, you got a good story? ###
138
CHAPTER 20 AN ENLIGHTENING EXPERIENCE THE AWAKENING OF THE DEAD

The following is another True story. It is an exhaustively detailed account of a phenomenal Meditational experience I had one night at a friends house (a friend who shall only be known as T.) It has been modified very little from its original writing. Immediately after this experience, I decided to write about it before I would start to forget any details. It was not really intended to be read by anyone other than me at the time. But this incredible experience was just too amazing and important not to share. This account may seem like a grandiose and impossible fantasy, but I assure the reader that this story is an absolutely True telling of something which happened to me. This experience was a tremendous and sudden Divine Initiation. It demonstrated to me, by direct experience, an existence of something which was beyond our Physical reality, the reality of the Spiritual world, and the fact that Truly, even the impossible is possible with God. Remember, in Matthew 19:26Jesus himself tells us, But with God everything is possible. possible It began simply enough. While spending an evening at my friend T.s house, I suddenly felt like Meditating on the floor. And so I did. Without saying a word, I sat on the floor, crossing my legs in the half-lotus position and closed my eyes. T. immediately noticed what I intended to do, so she turned off the lights. Some candles were lit and incense set to burn. All of this in addition to a very Meditative music from a familiar CD (Novus Magnificat, by Constance Demby) helped set a mood for me. I noticed the appearance what I called the spinning energy, which always signals that I am in the right state of mind to Meditate, almost immediately after starting to concentrate. This amazed me. It had never come to me this quickly before. I was obviously doing something right. I remember calling out very fervently to Creation after I felt this. Soon I noticed a new feeling: like my body was vibrating at an incredibly high frequency. It felt like my body was on fire. The feeling was very intense and totally captured my attention. My right hand felt very hot and vibrated more than any other part of me. I was so amazed at the level of Meditation I had reached that I really did not know what to do at this time except to try to let go and let God. I began calling out to Creation to spin me harder and take me out of my body. I wanted some experience even beyond this. I called out to Babaji, Yogananda, and all the other saints of India that I had recently read about, calling to them to help me reach
139
Jason Blanchard
even higher than I already was. When nothing happened right away, I called out to my Spirit Guide to come to me for the first time and make itself known. This did not happen quickly eitherbut it did happen later. I sat there immersed in this experience, and I could not help but think that this was a wonderful gift from Divinity. I was grateful and content with what had already occurred. I did not know it at the time, but this experience would become more profound than anything I ever could have imagined. At this time, T. tapped me on the shoulder to ask me a question about an astrological natal chart I had brought to her. I came out of my Meditation and my body slumped over with my head on the floor. I was only mildly upset at the interruption as I struggled to sit up and explain whatever she needed to know, but she must have decided to wait, given my sluggish reaction to her innocent intrusion. She apologized for disturbing me. I told her it was no problemthat I could reach it (the same level of Meditation) again. So I closed my eyes and began once more. But for the next hour, something else seemed to lead my every thought and action. I did not know it at the time, but I was heading for what would be my first conscious meeting with my Spirit Guide. When I closed my eyes to begin again, something immediately took over my breathing rhythm. I had no control over what was happening. I began breathing in a way that I never had beforerhythmically, very hard, through my nose. As soon as a fast inhalation was over, an equally fast exhalation would begin without the slightest pause and vice versa. I turned into a violent breathing machinea sort of non-mechanical human respirator. This was not my idea to do this. Something made me do this; impulsed me to do this and it perplexed me. Why was I breathing like this? This was no way to breathe, certainly not in calm, peaceful Meditation! I decided not to fear what was happening, so I let it go on. In fact, I remember that I felt like I had no choice but to let it go onlike I had suddenly lost control of my own will to stop it at all. I also remember wanting to know why this was happening in the first place, where it would lead to. I truly had no idea what was going on. As I said before, I just let it go on. After about a dozen or so cycles of inhaling and exhaling, the violent breathing just stopped completely at the end of the last exhalation. Just stopped totally and as suddenly as it began only moments earlier. But I did not start breathing normally again at this timeI did not breathe at all until nearly an hour later. The feeling of high frequency vibration came again. The intensity this time was amazing. It was far beyond the level I had felt only moments earlier. I experienced the most excited, ecstatic, energetic feelings that I truly never could have imagined. My body seemed incredibly tense from the energy surging through me, but in fact, my body was quite relaxed. I felt like a balloon filled far beyond capacity with electricity, ready to explode. I was actually afraid to feel this, much less let it go on. But a reassuring voice from in my head told me that I had nothing to fear. So I let it go on. I sat there totally freaked out over the deep
140
state of Meditation I had now reached, feeling like I was on fire, and not breathing at all. My Spirit no longer seemed to be merely in the body sitting on the floor in that tiny house. I (my Unconsciousness or Spiritual Self) was somewhere else, almost like I was floating in a non-Physical, purely Spiritual dimension and at the same time feeling like I was a foot inside my head. I felt set back or set apart from not only my body and surroundings but my own normal perspective. And yet at the same time, I felt very deep inside my body without actually identifying with it. I was perfectly aware of my environment, but I simply was not there, yet I knew exactly where my body was. I was in what I came to call a pure observer mode. Everything was different without actually being different. My perspective had changed because I was observing from a level of Meditation I had never reached before. I felt like my body and my senses were something for me to use and my Spirit did exactly thatuse my senses from a new perspective. My ears were microphones and my eyes were cameras. I decided to open my eyes. This was not accomplished in a normal fashion. I found out I had to impulse my eyes to open. I could actually feel a signal leaving me, wherever I was, and going into my eyelids. They opened incredibly slowly. When they did so, it seemed as though I was looking through the narrow end of a large funnel. I felt very deep in my body looking at the outside world, yet I seemed very far away from the room my body was in, and I processed the information my eyes were sensing. It seemed more than ever that I was a foot inside my head looking through my eyes at the outside world. I could identify everything in the room but it all looked so strange and different because my perspective had changed so much. I impulsed my eyes to move. (I would have to impulse my body to make every move throughout the whole experience. Every single motion my body made happened very, very slowly.) My eyes took in the scene of the living room in front of me. Once again, I felt even more profoundly than before that I was deep inside my own head, yet watching from far away. Objects looked far away, yet looked close at the same time. As I looked through my bodys eyes, I impulsed them to change focus so I could try to detect auras (the electromagnetic Energy field which surrounds the body). I fully expected success in this since I could already detect auras without Meditating. In fact, I was anticipating some incredible displays of color and light simply because I was in such a deep state of Meditation. But to my surprise, I saw no auras no matter where I looked. I tried scanning my friend T. as she was busy reading her natal horoscope. I saw nothing. Scanning a plant and T.s cats also proved fruitless. This confused me, and disappointed me greatly. After all, I was Meditating very deeply, yet I could not see something so simple as an aura. Then a thought occurred to me at that moment that this Meditation was not about seeing auras. So I closed my eyes once more and merely continued observing as time passed.
141
Jason Blanchard
And time itself had changed. I would be in deep Meditation for an hour, in all, but it felt like three or more. Time, from my perspective was totally distorted. It felt like nothing. However, I was able to know about how long I was Meditating at any moment because of the familiar CD playing softly on the entertainment system. I could listen for certain key phrases and high points in the music and know how many minutes I was out. Even so, I had trouble understanding just what time meant. But my Conscious Mind knew exactly what it meant, and it kept trying to make me stop the Meditation. My Conscious Mind was very worried about my body not surviving in this motionless, breathless, ecstatic state. It kept trying to make me move any body part, or make me breathe because it was fearful that my body might die. But I knew better. Months earlier, I had read about certain masters in India who can enter, at will, the breathless, motionless state, called samadhi. In this state, they do not eat, drink, move, or breathe for as long as they wish, sometimes for weeks or months at a time. So I knew very well that my body would be fine for the duration of the Meditation, despite not really comprehending how long I was already out. Consequently, I had to fight with my Conscious Mind for control. I won the battle, but only after my Conscious Mind somehow convinced itself that the Meditation would stop at the end of the first musical selection, which was about 26 minutes long. I now know that my Conscious Mind did this because I was not totally familiar with the second (which was also the last) song on the CD, which was even longer in duration. My Consciousness only wanted to keep a perspective on just how long this experience was lasting. It was simply trying to make itself comfortable because now it was becoming obvious from the song that I had been out for less than ten minutes, yet it seemed like half an hour. In the end, I did not stop Meditating (though my Consciousness tried one last time) after the first song ended, and I did not come back to our real world until well after the next song was over. The music was beautiful and conducive to Meditation, and it just seemed to drag on at an incredibly slow pace because of the time distortion I was experiencing. I tried using my ears to listen very intensely to the song, which is one of my all time favorites, hoping for the deep, moving experience it always had given me even when I was not Meditating. Nothing happened. None of the feelings or emotions which it usually sparked in menothing. These inexplicable sensory failures, not seeing auras and then this, just made me want to block out the outside and go within. I know now that this was by design, so that I could experience what was to come laterthe reason why I had been impulsed to Meditate in the first place. For over the next half hour, I was more or less alone with my thoughts, sometimes paying attention to my environment, sometimes not, but always observing. I noticed, at one point, the physical position that I had assumed when I began the Meditation. My arms were slightly out from my body, my
142
hands resting on my knees, with my index finger and thumb touching each other, creating a small loop on each hand. I did not want my arms pulled out from my body like this, so I impulsed them to move together towards my abdomen. This took incredible willpower on my part. I was mentally straining to accomplish something Physical. My arms began moving inwards very slowly. I couldnt help but think that this had to look funny from the outside, because I was laughing on the inside while at the same time feeling somewhat aggravated that it was taking so long and so much effort to do something so simple. My hands eventually came to rest in my lap with my arms hanging comfortably at my sides. I then joined the loops of my fingers, forming interlocking rings with both of my thumbs and index fingers. I also straightened out my back in the same way, impulsing it mentally and waiting for it to slowly move. I impulsed my head to turn in four directions: straight up and down, and side to side. I impulsed my eyes to open as my head began turning slowly. I simply perceived whatever I saw from my observer mode. I really did not have very many thoughts or opinions about what was around me. I was simply looking while not being there. T. was talking in the kitchen with a friend of hers whom I had just met earlier in the evening. I could see them at times peering around the door catching a glance at me and then subsequently talking about me, wondering whether or not I was OK. T. had seen me Meditate once before, but not with my eyes open, as they were right now. (She told me later, that I had a far away look in my eyes, like I was starring at nothing.) I had to laugh at their concern for this freak on the floor. Who knew just what they were thinking? I was unable, really, to tell them anything at this time, so I just let it go. As time passed, and my observing continued, I noticed that the first song on the CD was ending. I could feel my Conscious Mind wanting to come back and take control of my body and end the Meditation. As the song ended, I fully expected to come back to the world and I let my Conscious Mind try to make me wake up. But it just did not happen. I was still Meditating, despite my Consciousness telling my body and mind to come to life. My Conscious Mind really began freaking out, saying again and again that it was impossible to go on in this state of samadhi. It kept saying that my body would not survive in a breathless, motionless state. But my body was still alive, after 26 minutes, and unable to stop what was still happening. Time just kept on passing. My fearfilled Conscious Mind, with all its screaming and raving, just faded into the depths from which it came, unable to stop what had started so long ago. And I just listened as the next song began. I was only familiar with about the first three minutes of this one, which I listened to very intently, and then it became strange. I had finally lost my reference to time. Now I was floating in a sort of limbo. Time had now become totally incomprehensible to me. I truly had no idea of its passage anymore. It was bizarre, to say the least, and somewhat frightening now that I had no idea of when I was or how long I have been. Time is all too
143
Jason Blanchard
familiar in the waking Physical world. I simply was not used to this complete absence of it. The only way I could now know how long I was still Meditating was to wait for the end of this song, which was longer than the last. I can honestly say that it was absolutely impossible for me to notice the passage of time for the next 15 minutes or so, during which I only remember observing even more of what was around me. After the Meditation was over, I had consulted with T. about the possible time frames for when she became involved later in the story. Even then, once again using the end of the song as a gauge, I was still only able to estimate that I had observed for at least 15 minutes, given the events that were to come next. It was at this point, after a quarter hour of observing, when I received a word, by impulse, in my head. From where it came, I did not know, and why it was coming in the first place, I could not say. Slowly at first, and strangesounding, the word came to me very quietly. It repeated itself again and again as I listened to the pronunciation, and then I repeated, silently to myself, what I heard, for confirmation. I had a strong feeling that this unusual word had to be a name. I had never heard it before. And it sounded so weirdwhat else could it be? I asked, in my head, if this word I was hearing was the name of my Spirit Guide to which I was answered, yes. I was stunned! Actual contact with my Spirit Guide! I had tried at different times in the past to do this, but with no success. And now It had come to me! Now having accomplished this, there was only one thing that I could think to do. The only reason I ever wanted to contact my Guide before was to get advice or ask questions. So that is exactly what I intended to doask questions. So what began here was a series of questions by me which were answered by a simple yes or no. Sometimes I would get an answer before I even finished my question. This is because my Guide knew what I was asking as I was asking it; therefore It could give an answer without waiting. I eventually learned to formulate my questions as a single coherent thought-form instead of a string of words, the way we normally communicate. This definitely sped up the Q&A session. The answers were not audible in a Physical sense. Rather they were impulses from inside. In fact, they were exactly like the Intuitive first instinct voice we all hearthat little spark of a voice inside our heads which makes suggestions to us at certain times concerning what we should or should not do. This, I already knew was the way our guides communicate with us while we are fully conscious. But now, I was communicating directly while in an altered state Meditation, and the voice was very clear and loud. And now a summary of what It told me: This profound, deep experience was a gift to me to show me what to try to accomplish every time I Meditate. Meditate every day, no excuses. Use the tiny quartz crystals (which were in my pocket at the time) to help Meditate at the same level I was now experiencing. This is possible because once the crystals were exposed to the Energy coming off
144
my body that night, they would retain that Energy. Then, I could use them in the future to access the same Energy and therefore reach this new level of Meditation. I was also told that I could reach the Spiritual Perfection I longed for, in this lifetime, if I Meditated every day using any and all methods which I was aware of. The important thing here was to always strive for the Goal, and it would be reached eventually. I was told a number of things in all, and I discovered something very important as I asked my questions. Every answer I received was a confirmation of what my Intuitive first instinct ever told me in the past, during waking consciousness. If ever there was a reason to listen to your first instinct, this Q&A session was definitely it! By now, I had more or less run out of things to ask. And about this time my friend T. walked from her bedroom into the living room where my body sat motionless on the floor. As she did this, she accidentally tripped over a fan which was right next to my body. This made quite a bit of noise, and she obviously thought she had disturbed me because she had apologized, thinking I would wake up. The fact is, it didnt faze me at all! This lack of reaction surprised me, from wherever I was. Even I fully expected to stop Meditating from the sudden racket. But my body sat there perfectly still, with me somewhere else. I just simply knew that she was in the room now. I impulsed my eyes to open, which they did only halfway. I could see through them that she was sitting on the couch by now. Then I felt my Spirit Guide tell me that It wanted to talk to her! My reaction was one of total surprise and horror... What?! In fact, I refused to allow it to happen! I kept saying no inside and refusing to let my Guide use my body to communicate with her. The reason for my refusal is simple. T. had absolutely no idea what had really happened to me for about 45 minutes. She knew I was Meditating, yes, but she had no idea Who had just showed up. If I let my Guide speak through my body, how in the world would T. know that it was my Spirit Guide, of all things, whom I had just met, who was talking to her and not just me talking to her? After all, It would have to use my voice to tell her God-knowswhat and it would just sound like me telling her! How could she possibly understand what was happening, much less accept anything It told her? Wouldnt she just think it was me telling her those things? Perhaps she would think I was playing some cruel, tactless practical joke on her. What if It told her something terrible, or personal, or something she just did not want to hear? What was to stop her from hating me for the things It might want to tell her? I refused to lose my most beloved friend because of the whims of some Spirit I could not even see! So I just kept saying NO again and again. Then I felt a pain in my heart chakra (one of 7 Spiritual Energy centers located along the spine), which is located in the center of the chest. Was my Guide doing this? The pain grew worse as It repeated that It wanted to speak to her. I repeated NO. And the pain grew worse. I felt Energy reaching out from my heart to my friend who was
145
Jason Blanchard
only a few feet away. I knew It wanted to communicate with her, but something was terribly wrong. Why this pain?! Then a thought occurred to me. I had learned a long time earlier that we humans need to live with Love in our hearts, not fear. I had been teaching some friends, T. included, that Love is the opposite of fear, that every action we undertake in our lives should be motivated by Love. And where does this feeling of Love come fromthe heart. Exactly where this pain wasthe heart. I then realized that nothing but fear had surfaced when my Guide said that It wanted to speak with her. All those horrible possibilities I thought of arose from fear. My Guide only asked permission to use my body and I went crazy from fear. What could It possibly do to her? Why would It intentionally hurt her? It had not hurt me or my body. I felt absolutely no malice from It whatsoever since It spoke to me. Seeing the error I had made, I gave permission for It to speak through my body. The pain, which was caused by my own fearful actions and my refusal to act out of Love, quickly subsided. I took a back seat for the next few minutes. What happened until the end of the Meditation was a strange sort of requestand-approval between my Guide and myself. Every action that It wanted to take, every word It wanted to speak, was passed along to me so I could give my approval and forward it to my body, which carried out the commands under the control of my Guide. Of course, in order to talk to T., my body would have to breathe again, which it had not been doing for nearly an hour now. I felt an impulse from my Guide to breathe, so I told my body to inhale. It did so very slowly, but only after a few failed attempts! (imagine that) This was obviously difficult to start doing again. I still was not identifying with my body, so I had to impulse it to do every single thing I wanted it to do. I was basically preparing my body for my Guide to use. After finally inhaling successfully, I felt the impulse to call my friends name. This was of course, my Spirit Guide trying to do this. My body again failed a few times to call her name as my vocal chords were slowly called into action. This whole process at first was very laborious. Her name finally came out, garbled at first. Again and again, a little louder and clearer each time, sounding just like a normal speaking voice from my perspective. Through my bodys halfopen eyes, I could see that she was on the couch. She did not seem to respond to my guides calling her. I impulsed my Guide to speak louder. My body responded. It told her to go to her entertainment system and lower the volume of the music, which was still playing. She did get up and do something with the console, just what that was, I could not tell, but the volume did not seem to change. My Guide called to her again. It told her to sit next to my body, but she sat on the couch again. Then my Guide started a short monologue, telling her things while she sat on the couch motionless. This monologue went on for perhaps two or three minutes (it was hard to tell, the music, which was my time gauge, was unfamiliar), and then she arose once
146
more and walked to the CD player again. I, from my own vantage point, thought that something was wrong. It seemed that she was oblivious to the personal things my Guide was telling her. Then I realized that she had not even heard It call her in the first place! It had been talking to the air! This perplexed me, for it seemed that the voice coming from my body was practically booming. I impulsed my Guide to speak louder, explaining that she had not heard It the first time. Her name issued from my bodys mouth again, this time seeming, to me at least, at a deafening volume. I could see through my half-open eyes that she had responded. She asked what I wanted. My Guide told her to lower the volume and sit next to my body. She did not hear this request at all, as she walked over to my body and asked me to repeat what I said. The request came forth again. She motioned so close to me that I could feel, through the skin on my face, that her hair was brushing my nose as she drew her ear close to my mouth. The request came again to lower the music. She did so. Then my Guide told her to sit next to my body. She did not move. It told her again. She finally moved close, only because, once again, she could not hear the request. She pressed her ear against my mouth again to hear what was being said. I found out later from T. that even though the voice coming from my body sounded very loud, it was, in fact, barely audible, even with her ear pressed against my mouth during the next few minutes. My Guide then told her, Dont be afraid. Your friend (referring to me) is not here, but he will be back soon. I cant stay in this body for long. It then began to repeat the first few phrases of the monologue from only a few moments earlier, since she was now listening. It stopped for a short time, to perhaps catch her reaction. She did not respond. I told It to repeat the phrases again. So It did. She then responded with the comment thats interesting. I thought about these words and realized that either she did not know what was happening or she thought that I had lost my mind sitting on that floor for so long. (I felt that the latter was true because of a slight tone in her voice which seemed to indicate such) I impulsed my Guide to explain somehow what was happening before she lost interest in the crazy man sitting in the half-lotus position. So It proceeded to ask her if she thought that something strange has happened since her friend had been sitting on the floor motionless for almost an hour now. It told her again that I was not here but was safe and would be returning soon. It told her once more, at my own request, not to be afraid. I once had the experience of someone elses Spirit Guide come through and call me by name. I remember an initial fear before realizing what was really happening. I figured she might feel the same way, hence the reason for my request to put her at ease. She had not responded to the reassurances my Guide had just given her, though she was still paying attention. I was hoping that she could figure out that, indeed, something strange had happened. At the very least, she was still listening.
147
Jason Blanchard
Then my Guide began all over again by giving her advice about Love. It said that she must not fear expressing her Love. That she must express Love inside and out. That fear is the opposite of Love. To never fear Love and never be afraid to give it. These few comments on Love gave me a sense of vindication. I learned from T.s natal chart that she had great difficulty expressing emotion, something which I had eventually learned just by spending time with her. I remember telling her about this fact from her chart at some time. And besides this, my guides comments on Love were exactly the views I held on the subject. My guides words and advice pleased me and made me realize two things: 1) That what I taught to T. and other friends was accurate and; 2) That my attempts to live this way, with Love and not fear, was Spiritually correct. My Guide then told her about a certain man who was prominent in her life, that he Loved her, but that she should not seek anything permanent with him, since he would not be in her life much longer. (The man It referred to was T.s friend, whom I had just met earlier in the evening, the same one who along with T. kept checking up on me and wondering if I was OK.) It then asked of her, What do you want to know? She did not say anything. I told my Guide to reassure her with the same words as before that everything was fine, that I would be back soon, etc. It did so and then It repeated the question. All my worrying about whether or not she understood what was happening was put to rest when she leaned over my body and whispered, in my ear, a question about the wisdom of her recent career move. My Guide told her that she indeed made a good decision concerning such, and that she need not worry. She then asked about the same man my Guide had just told her about. It was apparent from the phrasing of the question and the tone of her voice that she wanted to make sure that she understood what my Guide said only seconds before. Suddenly, I jumped in and tried to influence the answer coming from my body. Up until this point, my Guide was impulsing words, about five to seven at a time, to me, which I would then pass along to my body to be spoken aloud (or barely whispered, actually). But now, once again, I was reacting out of fear. I truly Love my friend very deeply. We have had a special friendship which has never diminished even though we are sometimes separated by months, even years. Our friendship and my Love for her have only become stronger over time. And even though our relationship has always been platonic, (though I have wished for more at times), here I was reacting like some jealous, possessive husband! A tug of war with my Guide ensued. Inside my head I kept screaming the answer I wanted to hear my body say, deliberately blocking and confusing the impulses which, up until now, had come through so clearly. A flurry of yess and nos flashed between my Guide and I so quickly that I could not even tell what the guides actual answer was! I was covering both of the possible answers to the question! All this time T. was waiting for her answer. Then I remembered what I had always taught others about acting out of Love
148
rather than fear, and I realized what I had just done. I forced myself to take a back seat again and await the answer, and just accept it. No. It was exactly what I had foolishly hoped for anyway...never mind that she was only confirming what my Guide had already told her in the previous monologue about not seeking anything permanent with the man. I must have completely forgotten about that at the time. I find this strange, because I completely remember the whole conversation now. But it seems that I forgot this important fact at just the right timewhen her question affected my own personal feelings for her. Looking back, I think that my Guide had a hand in this, making me forget so that I, myself, would also learn the lesson of what I was already teaching to others about Love and allowing complete freedom for those we Love. I can see no other explanation for this incident, because I do not see my friend as an object to own or control in any way. My actions made no senseit simply contradicts my views on relationships and the freedom we have within them. This little episode, I think, was a lesson from my Guide. In any event, fear makes us do stupid thingsand makes us look like fools when we do them. Having relinquished my control, my Guide then asked her if there was anything else she wanted to know before It left. She said no and left to go to the kitchen. My eyes fully closed and my Guide apparently left me. Having finished with this unexpected turn of events, I wanted to come back to my body. I felt like everything that was supposed to happen did happen, and I was just anxious to come back. I began commanding myself to Come back! again and again. I must have repeated this over a dozen times. I felt the sensations in my body change as I came back to this Physical world, and began identifying with my body more and more. When I felt like I had fully come back, I told my eyes to open. My eyelids slowly opened to the scene of the living room around me. My back then slumped over. My head fell towards my chest, and my whole body finally leaned over forward to the floor. My head hit the floor with a light thud, and turned slightly to the leftgiving me a great view of what was under the coffee tablemy shoes. I then told my body to inhale. This happened slowly also. Every movement I made for the next few minutes was amplified to supreme slowness. The sound my body made as I first inhaled resembled someone who had just had their throat cleared of some food blocking their windpipe. A terrible, hoarse, wheezing, but only lasting for a very long time. The exhalation that followed sounded no better. My breathing became very labored and difficult. It would apparently take some time to get used to breathing again (wow!). This went on for perhaps a minute or more. I was sure that T. must be able to hear these ghastly sounds coming from her living room. I dont know if she did for sure, but she did walk in. She noticed my condition and walked over to me. I felt her rubbing my back and she asked me if I was OK. I struggled for the next few moments to say a wordafter all, I had just learned to breathe again! I tried several times to make my voice come to
149
Jason Blanchard
life, and failed several times. But I finally managed to say, quietly and pathetically, Help me up. I was still in a fetal position on the floor, unable to move a muscle. She moved in front of me, grabbed me by the shoulders and forced me upright. She let me go and I fell forward into her arms. She steadied me up once more and I tried to maintain my posture while she held me a few moments longer. All this was rather painfulphysically, mentally and emotionally. It is as though I did not want to have to be in a body again, at least not in this condition. It saddened me to have to fight to regain control like this I would have cried if I had the energy. Gradually, I was able to sit upright by myself. I asked her to stretch out my legs because they simply were not responding to my commands to do so themselves. She did as I asked. I asked her for some water and then for a pen and paper to write down the name of my Spirit Guide, which I wrote with a trembling hand. I told her with a shaky voice what the word was and that this was who she talked to. I proceeded to tell her all kinds of things about the experience as I would remember it, in a total stream of Consciousness, one thing after another, not necessarily connected to what was said before. I can honestly say that if I had heard a recording of someone else saying what I said before I finally left her house half an hour later, that I would think that person was a total idiot. I managed to crawl to the couch, dragging my legs behind me, and sit, eventually standing so I could force my legs to begin working again. I walked around the house, sipping orange juice, and babbling on and on about the experience and anything related to it as T. followed me making sure I didnt fall over, occasionally snapping me out of some blank stares to see if I was still coherent. We stepped outside to give me a change of scenery so I could come back to the real world. But it didnt help much. The foot inside my head feeling was still with me. As time went on, I simply gained more control of my body. But what I was feeling inside was totally unbelievable, and not diminishing in the least. I kept thinking to myself You are not the same any more, Jason. Things are different now. Not the same, Jason. Indeed, what I saw outside gave me near permanent gaping-mouthsyndrome. I could not stop staring at the world with slack-jawed wonder. I was obviously feeling some ridiculously profound after-effects of the Meditation. T. kept gently reminding me that it was far past her bedtime. She was getting so that she could barely function anymore. I eventually decided to leave, even though I was fearful that I could not drive with my mind so totally distracted and absorbed with whatever happened to be directly in front of me. But I said goodbye anyway, and drove away down the street towards the main road. I could not focus on driving at all. My own thoughts were dominating. I still felt like I was a foot inside my head. And I would feel that way for about the next hour. Before arriving at the main road, I felt my Spirit Guide saying, Trust me. You will be
150
safe. I felt as though my Guide took over my body again as I turned on the main road to go back home. The trip seemed to take about three hours, though it lasted a little less than an hour. I could not believe how slowly the scenery passed before my eyes, and yet I was driving at the speed limit the whole way. The trip was totally safe the whole way. I, of course was totally absorbed in thought. I honestly dont remember at all what I thought about on the way home except that I know that I went over again and again what had happened at T.s house. Everything else, if there is anything else, is a blur, and probably not important anyway. Originally, I never intended to write about this experience. It seemed indescribable through the use of words. About two days later, I realized that it was getting harder to remember it all. So I began to write some quick notes by hand and realized that I would have to type it all because it would be very long. That is why I have written this, so that I could have an accurate record of my first contact with my Spirit Guide. WAKE THE HELL UP And there it is. This extraordinary experience was so much more than I realized at the time. Back then, apparently, I tended to think of it as only a meeting with my Spirit Guide. It was so much more than that, of course. Looking back on the time I wrote the above narrative, I think that I conveniently overlooked the fact of the non-breathing, because I dont think I could have possibly come to grips with the reality of such a thing ever happening, even though it did. I remember, now, that the whole experience left me literally dazed for days. The world I lived in, and all its idiotic, moronic, and just plain stupid beliefs and concepts about what was possible and impossible were now laughable. Limitations were useless. Whatever silly preconceptions I had about Physical reality were shattered forever, and even if I chose to ignore the whole experience (which I never did, of course), there was still no denying the fact that, medically speaking, I died right there in my friends houseand yet, I am still alive. The experience was intense, but it was definitely not too much for me to handle, or else God would not have given it to me. God challenges us only with those things we can handle at our level of maturity, even if it seems otherwise. This experience was given to me because I could handle it. Experiences like this one (and others) are not given to those who are not ready. Enlightening experiences like this one are nearly impossible to explain, and cannot even be comprehended by the unenlightened. Sometimes, they will dismiss the occurrence outright. I remember, that when I told my friend T. what had happened to me, especially the fact that I was not breathing for nearly an hour, she quickly dismissed it, saying something like, Of course you were
151
Jason Blanchard
breathing. Of course, she never once bothered to check just what I was doing the whole time I was on the floor. To her, the Truth, as experienced by me, was denied as impossible. To me, the Truth was impossible to deny. There simply is no running away from Truth. This experience was an Initiation, a Divine Awakening, calling me to awaken from my dead slumber. I was directly exposed to Death itself, a certain death, and by the Power and Grace of God, I survived. I realized from my own experience, that we humans are indeed so much more than a mass of flesh and bloodwe are Divine, Spiritual Beings capable of so much more than we believe. Those last vestiges of my limited ways of thinking were utterly destroyed. My self-created coffin of limited thinking and beliefs was finally opened and a New Life, full of unlimited possibilities was revealed to me. I learned, through my own undeniable experience, that Truly, with God, nothing is impossible. ...with God everything is possible.Jesus, in Matthew 19:26 possible you are gods!Jesus, in John 10:34 ...but you are dead. Now wake up!Revelation 3:1-2
152
CHAPTER 21 A WORLD OF POSSIBILITIES THE FOOLS JOURNEY ENDS

Well, I have finally come to the end of this book. What I have written so far is not the sum total of the entire Spiritual Science, of course. There is so much more to this Science than what I have written here. It is simply not conceivable to write the end-all be-all of all books on the subject of the Spiritual Science. And thank God, because I would not want to write it. Reading books is so much easier than writing them!! Perhaps, if Spirit inspires me once again, I will write another volume, which will go into more detail of the Spiritual Science. But this is for Divine Providence to decide. For now, I have completed what I was inspired to do. SPIRITUAL SOAPBOX At the end of the autobiography, I stated the reason I wrote this book was that it was greatly needed. No one, to my knowledge, has ever detailed the precise Scientific process of manifesting miracles in such a fashion as was done here. I have often wondered why this has never been done before. The only explanation I repeatedly come back to is simply that it was not time to release such information openly. Information, especially Scientific information, is very valuable. It is no secret that intelligence agencies and covert groups around the world have murdered countless people just to acquire Scientific secrets which could give their respective governments some technical advantage over other countries. Sometimes, even scientists themselves have been the victims, once their experiments have proven successful. Only a fool would disagree that the world is full of damnable, dubious, diabolic, devious doings. Some groups in this world could care less what tools they employ to carry out their harmful plans. All too often, some kind of Science is utilized to perform their evil work. Dont make the mistake of thinking that Science is therefore a bad thing just because it is being employed with harmful intentions. Science is just a tool. The one who wields the tool is harmful. This is where the timing of the release of the Spiritual Science comes in. Dont for a second think that this Science is brand new. It is the so ancient, there are no adjectives to accurately describe its age. This Science is literally the Science which God created and then utilized to create the entire Universe. It is the most Supreme of all Sciences in existence. In fact, it is at the heart of Every Science. The Spiritual Science is the Key which unlocks every other
153
Jason Blanchard
Science. It is the Ultimate Science which, if utilized, can provide Ultimate results. And the point of this? Put one and one together. Can you imagine what would happen if an organization with bad intentions happened to get a hold of this Spiritual Science and tried to utilize it for their dark purposes? Can you Imagine? Science is a tool, nothing more, nothing less. This Spiritual Science is the tool which God utilized to create the Universe. By the Law of Opposites, this Spiritual Science can also destroy the Universe. So, once again, I ask, can you Imagine? Obviously, the utilization of the tool of Science depends on the individual who uses it. Science can be used by noble people for noble purposes or it can be exploited in the hands of lesser-minded people. This has always been a problem since humanity discovered and used its very first tool. (Does anyone remember the opening scenes of the movie 2001: A Space Odyssey?) Because humanity as a whole still has not united itself in the Spirit of Love, the Spiritual Science has been kept secret by the Wisest and Holiest people of history, passing it along only to those who would not only use it solely for good purposes, but also protect it from misuse. This is why the majority of humanity has remained ignorant of this Spiritual Science. We have no one to blame but ourselves for our collective ignorance of the Spiritual Science. When we turn away from Fear and move towards Love, we will all have access to the Spiritual Science of God. This Spiritual Science has always existed since the very beginning. But, God revealed it only to those who had United with their Inner Spirits. In this way, it was kept secret. And for good reason. This Science is far more powerful than any other in existence. It is, after all the Science of God if you think about it. Consider this: since with God, nothing is impossible, then is it not conceivable that someone armed with this Science of God could literally do anything? Rather exciting and frightening at the same time, isnt it? Think about it. What are the possible applications of a Science with no limits whatsoever? What would one do with it? What would you do with it? Feed all the worlds hungry in an instant? Heal every sick person with the wave of a hand? Bring about world peace? Acquire all of the worlds wealth? Utterly obliterate ones enemies off the face of the earth in a flash? Acquire absolute tyrannical authoritarian control over the whole world? Get the idea? God has kept this Science a secret, revealing it only to those who United with their Inner Spirits. In this way there was no possibility that it would fall into the wrong hands. But why is any of it being revealed now?
154
THE TIMES, THEY ARE A CHANGING The time is Now...And the Word is Lovelyrics from Time and a Word, by Yes In this time of Now, in this day and age, we are living in a time which is unprecedented in history. There is a New Age of Spirit upon us. The Spiritual Age is making its presence known all around the world. That which is not Spiritual in nature, which does not resemble the Spirit of God or the Spirit of Love, is quickly disappearing from the planet. This includes everything which is upon the planet, even us Human beings. This dawning Spiritual Age is currently cleaning house, so to speak. This cleaning process was predicted by every single notable prophet in history. Each and every worthy prophet in history has predicted the tremendously turbulent times in which we now live. They have repeatedly predicted that the Time we live in now is a make or break time. All prophecies have shown that in the dawning of this New Age of Spirit, we humans must make a choice which will determine our future, a choice which will determine whether or not we will even be a part of that Spiritual future. And that choice? Remember the chapter on the Two Ways. You have no choice but to choose Fear or Love. Those who actively choose Love will see that wonderful Spirit-filled future. They will survive the currently tumultuous day and age to see a whole new order of things upon the Earth. The coming Spiritual Age has been predicted (more times than can be counted) to be an Age of Miracles. More than one Spiritually inspired visionary has stated that what we currently call miracles will be an every day occurrence in the New Age of Spirit. Those future inhabitants will not wonder in awe at such phenomenon the way we do today, because they will know it is through the Spirit that miracles are possible. They will know that such incredible occurrences are absolutely normal when one Unites with the Inner Spirit. And in this coming future, all of its inhabitants will be aware of the Inner Spirit, and all will be making a personal effort to Unite with their Inner Spirits, if they have not done so already. In this Spiritual Age, people will live with Love, with God in their hearts. This Age is already upon us. It is already here. It will only make its presence more strongly felt over time. As the New Age of Spirit prevails, Evil deeds will disappear. There will be no more wars. No more murder. No more hate. No more crime. No more intentional inflicting of pain. Sorrow will be replaced with Joy. All things will be transformed with Love. There will be no more Evil because no one will choose to let Fear run and ruin their lives. And if you choose Fear? Then you will not see this future. You will not be a part of it. You will not survive the current and coming times of transition into this New Age of Spirit. The dawning Spiritual Age will not only clean house, but it will clean you out also. To put it bluntly, You can kiss your ass good-bye.
155
Jason Blanchard
The New Age of Spirit has no room for Fear-filled fools. It is that Goddamn simple. CHOOSE WISELY The New Age of Spirit belongs to those who are aware that God lives within themselves. The New Age of Spirit belongs to those who live with Love in their hearts. The New Age of Spirit belongs to the gods which Jesus spoke of nearly 2000 years ago. The gods of which he spoke are all of us. The New Age of Spirit belongs to the gods who realize that God is within. This Age belongs to you, if you will choose it for yourself. It belongs to you if you will make the effort to be a part of it. Unite with your Inner Spirit!! Establish the Union with God. Meditate!! God is not outside of you. God is hiding behind your eyes. You will find a whole World, an entire Universe of Limitless possibilities, if only you will look for it in the last place you ever expected to find itwithin. God is that Universe. Your Inner Spirit reflects God within. You are gods...
156
APPENDIX MEDITATION INSTRUCTIONS

I feel I must give the reader at least some information on Meditation. This is not really the purpose of this book, but some simple instructions are in order here, especially since I have practically shoved the importance of Meditation down the readers throat. With some basic instructions, at least the reader can begin to experience Meditation. But, it is up to the reader to search the bookstore, internet, the local Spiritual community, etc., for any specific ways of Meditation. And in this respect, I cannot fail to inform the reader that the organization I mentioned in the autobiography, Self Realization Fellowship, the one founded by the monk/yogi named Paramahansa Yogananda, is an organization beyond compare in regards to teaching a simple, yet extremely powerful method of Meditation. SRF has carefully created its own special program of teaching an ancient Yogic way of Meditation which anyone can employ, and is also available to anyone on request. It is not my place to summarize all of the teachings though. That is out of the question. If the reader wishes to pursue Meditation as taught by SRF, the organization has headquarters around the world. They are also on the internet. The reader may also find them by purchasing the book, Autobiography of a Yogi, just as I did years ago. By personal experience, I would highly recommend this book and also the SRF way of Yogic Meditation to anyone, especially since it can be done by absolutely anyone. Also, I must recommend that the reader get a copy of The Lost Teachings of Atlantis, by Jon Peniel. I have found some of the Spiritual teachings in this phenomenal book in a few other works, and I have also echoed what I feel are the most important of them here in my book as well. But I want to draw the readers attention to the meditations in the back of The Lost Teachings of Atlantis. Many of these meditations have never even been hinted at, much less mentioned outright, in any publication at any time in history. The meditations are ancient and effective. They are geared towards taking a Spiritual student to the Ultimate Goal of Enlightenment. And in regards to this Goal, I cannot emphasize enough the importance of this very comprehensive book by a modern-day monk. While still on the subject of Enlightenment, I cannot fail to mention one last bookInitiation Into Hermetics, by Franz Bardon. The author lays out in 10 steps a series of specific meditations and practices. If they are accomplished in order, they will eventually lead the student to his/her own Enlightenment.
157
Jason Blanchard
If the reader is serious about attaining his/her own Enlightenment, then the works of these three authors, in my opinion, are absolutely essential. While I cant repeat here all of those meditations given by the preceding authors, what I can offer the reader for now is a sort of summary or brief review of what I have already mentioned about Meditation in early chapters. All Meditation (and Hypnosis too) has similar qualities. And these similarities are at the core of all methods of Meditation. All Meditation can be seen as an entrance into the Inner Spiritual realm. Meditation is a tool employed to completely take ones attention away from the Physical, so that the attention can be focused inward, within. As described earlier, Meditation can be described as putting the body to sleep while keeping the Mind awake. By doing this, the attention is focused completely within, since the body is no longer as active as it usually is. So, what to do exactly? I will give the simplest instructions here, which are applicable to every style of Meditation. First, you must assume a comfortable position. For Meditation, there are two primary positions which are used extensively. The first is one to simply lie down straight, on your bed, on the floor, on the couch, etc. The idea is to get comfortable of course. But there is one problem with the lying positionsome people tend to completely fall asleep while Meditating in a lying position. Of course, you dont want to fall asleep during your Meditation. That would defeat the purpose altogether. Your own experience will teach you if this position is for you. If you keep falling asleep, use the second position. The second (and most recognizable) position is to sit cross-legged on a flat surface. It is recommended that your sit on a pillow or small cushion. Sit up straight, keeping your back straight throughout the Meditation, but without straining or overly tensing your back muscles, since this would not allow you to relax during Meditation. Hold your head straight and level. Make sure your shoulders are not tenselet them drop down and relax. Let your arms hang loose at your sides, resting your hands wherever they are most comfortableon your knees or on your lap, or wherever they are most comfortable and relaxed. The idea here is to completely keep any muscular tension from bothering you during the Meditation. The body must be relaxed. Close your eyes. Keep your mouth closed, and breathe through your nose at all times. Now, take a very deep slow breath without straining yourself, and exhale slowly. It is not necessary to pump your lungs full of air like you are trying to blow up a balloonjust breathe slowly and deeply enough to allow you to start relaxing. If you do it correctly, you will feel yourself relaxing immediately after taking your first breath. But, of course, dont stop with just one breath. Keep breathing deeply and slowly. Just relax your body and breathe, breathe, breathe. With every breath, relax your body more and more.
158
Keep a vigil out for your posture. Make sure your spine is straight. You dont want to slouch during Meditation. You may notice that your posture slowly changes from time to time. Persist in keeping your spine straight. The same goes for your headkeep it level and straight. Periodically check the tenseness of your muscles throughout your body. If you notice any of them have tensed up at all, immediately relax them. Keep your body relaxed at all times. Keep your head straight and level. And keep your spine straight. Keep breathing slowly and deeply throughout. Just keep a simple comfortable rhythm. Just keep doing all of this for as long as is comfortable for you. Before long, your body will be very relaxed, your breath very slow and rhythmic, and you will start to notice your body less and less as it starts to relax. When this happens, after you have relaxed your body and it no longer demands your attention, the next thing you will want to do is to quiet the mind. Have you ever noticed how your mind never seems to shut up during the day? A very simple way to quiet the mind is to simply watch your breathing with all of your attention. Just concentrate all of your attention on your breathing. Really, it is that easy. Watching breath is a very ancient, simple, and effective way to quiet the chatter of the mind. It focuses the mind on the fact that I am Meditating. When your body is deeply relaxed, and the mind is quieted down, congratulations!! You are in a deep state of Meditation. It is that simple. And that is about it. Meditation is nothing but a process of relaxing the body and then quieting the mind so that the Meditator can then concentrate or contemplate on other things. Believe it or not, even 5 minutes of Meditation a day can make a world of difference in your life. After Meditating each day for a certain length of time, before long, you will notice changes in your character, your temperament, even your general health. It goes without saying, that the longer you meditate each day, the more profound effects you will experience, not only during Meditation, but also during your waking hours. While 5 minutes a day can already begin to affect you in noticeable ways, 10, 15, even 20 minutes will naturally be more beneficial. You may notice that after you have Meditated daily for any moderate length of time, you might be craving Meditation more and more because you have noticed the positive effects it has had on you. It is natural to want to Meditate for longer periods of time once one has started to make it a habit. There is no upper time limit for Meditation. It is not unusual for Spiritual Seekers to spend many hours a day immersed in Meditation. But the question of how long you Meditate is up to you. There are 24 hours in a day. Cant you afford to spend just a few minutes a day in Union with your Inner Spirit? To say that it is impossible to find any time during the day to Meditate is absolutely stupid. One can wake up a few minutes earlier each day, or put off sleep for a few minutes each night. A few minutes of daily Meditation
159
Jason Blanchard
is all that is needed to make a dramatic change in ones life by Uniting with the Inner Spirit. Sit down. Sit still. Shut up. Go away.
160
About the Author

The author, Jason Blanchard, has been writing quietly for the last decade. Only now has he decided to begin writing for a popular audience. Possessed with both a natural and insatiable curiosity for all things both Scientific and Spiritual since birth, and an innate ability for studying them as well, he has spent his life looking for a secret that he was certain existedthe hidden Union of Scientific and Spiritual Law And he found it. He has finally decided to bring together his accumulated knowledge of all manner of subjects Spiritual and Scientific, and penned his first book for publication, The Spiritual Science of Miracles. The author has been interviewed on both national radio & internet radio concerning The Spiritual Science of Miracles. With his first book, he as accomplished what few, if any in the publishing world ever havepresents to the world the discovery of a Spiritual Science which is, in essence, the Unity of both Scientific and Spiritual Laws. This book proves there is a direct connection, a Union, between the Scientific and Spiritual worlds. This Spiritual Science, as he names it, has the capacity to explain all traditionally unexplainable Spiritual and Scientific phenomenon. Not merely an armchair theoretician, the author speaks from practical, firsthand experience regarding this Spiritual Science, especially as it pertains to the phenomenon of Miracles, whereas he has been witness to, and participant in, the performance of actual Miracles. What the reader will find in his first book is not fantasy, but Truth, derived from both a lifetime of Scientific/Spiritual study and research, combined with years of practical application of, and personal experience with, the Spiritual Science. In The Spiritual Science of Miracles, the author begins publishing the secret of this Spiritual Science as it applies to accurately explaining the hitherto mysterious phenomenon of Miracles in such a way that is both Spiritually valid and Scientifically correct. The author feels it is part of his destiny to publish books on the Spiritual Science. Just as he has all of his life, the author is constantly studying subjects both Scientific and Spiritual, and delving deeper into the Spiritual Science. He is
currently writing a second Spiritual Science book, researching for a third, and in addition to writing these & possibly more volumes in the Spiritual Science Series, he also has a number of novels/screenplays in the works. In addition to his writings and continuous study, research, and practice with the Spiritual Science, the author is also a musician, composer, a music teacher, a sound recording and mixing engineer, and is currently producing albums for two musical groups. He is also at work on his own solo musical effort, which is slowly progressing towards an eventual Compact Disc release. The authors many diverse studies throughout his life comprise the following (incomplete) list: Alchemy, astrology, mantic arts, prophecy, divination, tarot, theology, dream research, psychic studies, occult, magic, Rosicrucianism, quabalah, sacred geometry, philosophy, mythology, meditation, yoga, metaphysics, psychology, hypnosis, gemology, numerology, gematria, spiritual healing, past-lives & reincarnation, remote viewing, investigations of hauntings. Archaeology, ancient civilizations, ancient history, early Christian history, gnosticism, paganism, study of heretical scriptures, dead sea scrolls, bible study, world religions. Genetics, astronomy, physics, quantum physics, astrophysics, over unity engines, free energy technology, anti-gravity, biology, chemistry, mathematics, geology, meteorology, paleontology, computer programming, mind control, diet & nutrition, herbalism, longevity science, ufology.

Spiritual Science of Miracles

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Spiritual Science of Miracles

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

DEDICATIONS, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS, & THANKS

JOURNEY ENDS ................................................................ 153 MEDITATION INSTRUCTIONS ....................................... 157

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

AUTOBIOGRAPHY A FOOLS JOURNEY

8:1 Ecclesiastes 8:1

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

CHAPTER 1 THE MIRACLE WORKER & THE SPIRITUAL SCIENTIST

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

CHAPTER 2 LESSON 101THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF GOD

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

CHAPTER 3 OPPOSITES OF THE ONE THING

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

CHAPTER 4 PROPERTIES OF THE EXTREMITIES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

CHAPTER 5 VIBRATION AND THE HUMAN BEING

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

CHAPTER 6 ITS ALL IN YOUR MIND

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

CHAPTER 8 MEDITATION & HYPNOSIS

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

CHAPTER 9 EFFECTS OF MEDITATION

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

CHAPTER 10 LOVE & EMOTION

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

CHAPTER 11 MASTER OF LOVE

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES

THE SPIRITUAL SCIENCE OF MIRACLES